Home

Port Commands of CLI

1. The port number for which the configuration below applies QoS class Controls the default QoS class i e the QoS class for frames not classified in any other way There is a one to one mapping between QoS class queue and priority A QoS class of 0 zero has the lowest priority DP level Controls the default DP level i e the DP level for frames not classified in any other way PCP Controls the default PCP for untagged frames DEI Controls the default DEI for untagged frames Tag Class Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port Disabled Use default QoS class and DP level for tagged frames Enabled Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames Click on the mode in order to configure the mode and or mapping DSCP Based Click to Enable DSCP Based QoS Ingress Port Classification After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 151 2 3 57 QoS Port Policing Function name QoS Port Policing Function description The function is used to provide an overview of f QoS Ingress Port Policers for all switch ports The Port Policing is useful in constraining traffic flows and marking frames above specific rates Policing is primarily useful for data flows and voice or vi
2. Parameters description VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 85 86 Global Configuration Snooping Enabled Enable the Global IGMP Snooping Unregistered IPMC Enable unregistered IPMC traffic flooding Flooding enabled IGMP SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range Format IP address sub mask Proxy Enabled Enable IGMP Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side Port Related Configuration Port The switch port number Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port Fast Leave Enable the fast leave on the port Throttling effect Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 3 14 IGMP Snooping VLAN General Setup Function name IGMP Snooping VLAN General Setup Function description The section describes the VLAN configuration setting process integrated with IGMP Snooping function F
3. normal participant VLAN gt The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure GARP settings Timer Values Three different timers can be configured on this page 1 Join Timer The default value for Join timer is 200ms 2 Leave Timer The range of values for Leave Time is 600 1000ms The default value for Leave Timer is 600ms 3 Leave All Timer The default value for Leave All Timer is 10000ms Application Currently only supported application is GVRP Attribute Type Currently only supported Attribute Type is VLAN GARP Applicant This configuration is used to configure the Applicant state VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide machine behavior for GARP on a particular port locally Applicant state machine behavior for GARP on a particular port locally normal participate In this mode the Applicant state 147 machine will operate normally in GARP protocol exchanges non participate In this mode the Applicant state machine will not participate in the protocol operation The default configuration is normal participant Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 54 GA
4. 00 e0 bb 3Com phones 00 50 7f Draytek Vigorphone Parameters description Delete Check this box to delete the entry Telephony OUI A telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE It must be 6 characters long and the input format is xx xx xx x is a hexadecimal digit Description The description of OUI address Normally it describes which vendor telephony device it belongs to The allowed string length is 0 to 32 Add new entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is added to the table the Group Name VLAN ID and port members can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 53 GARP General Setup The Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP provides a generic framework whereby devices in a bridged LAN e g end stations and switches can register and de register attribute values such as VLAN Identifiers with each other In doing so the attributes are propagated to devices in the bridged LAN and these devices form a reachability tree that is a subset of an active VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide topology GARP defines the architecture rules of operation state machines and variables for the registration and de regist
5. D id Se a F AE C Pe E gt Le Lo Y A __ AGL ee vy LLO i Pa 24 2 Giga Port L2 Your reliable networking solutions partner User s Guide V1 1 VigorSwitch P2261 PoE 24 2 Giga Port L2 Managed Switch User s Guide Version 1 1 Date May 28 2015 All rights reserved VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Intellectual Property Rights IPR Information Copyrights Trademarks All rights reserved This publication contains information that is protected by copyright No part may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language without written permission from the copyright holders The following trademarks are used in this document Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corp Windows Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP and Explorer are trademarks of Microsoft Corp Apple and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc Other products may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers Caution and Electronic Emission Notices Caution Warranty Be a Registered Owner Firmware amp Tools Updates Circuit devices are sensitive to static electricity which can damage their delicate electronics Dry weather conditions or walking across a carpeted floor may cause you to acquire a static electrical charge To protect your device always Touch the metal chassis of your computer to
6. Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 96 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 3 21 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Function name MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Function description The function is used to set the Port Group Filtering in the MLD Snooping function On the web page that you could add a new filtering group and safety policy Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto L to x sania da MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Overview bli rl bait Delete Port Filtering Groups Static Trunk g p gt LACP Add new Filtering Group gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping Y MLD Snooping General Setup VLAN General Setup Status Groups Information IPv6 SSM Information gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN DrayTek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview Y ayy eyauurr Static Trunk gt LACP gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping Y MLD Snooping General Setup VLAN General Setup Status Groups Information IPv6 SSM Information gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN Parameters description Delete Click to delete the entry Port The logical port for the settings Filtering Groups The IP Multicast Grou
7. To set the MSTP restrictedTcn port parameter Syntax r ten lt port list gt lt disable enable gt Parameter VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt disable gt Disable MSTP restricted TCN lt enable gt Enable MSTP restricted TCN EXAMPLE Switch mstp r tcn 3 5 enable Switch mstp Recovery To set edge port error recovery timeout Syntax recovery lt ime range gt Parameter lt time range gt Time before error disabled ports are re enable available value is from 30 to 86400 seconds 0 is disabled EXAMPLE Switch mstp recovery 4000 Switch mstp Show To show Region configuration MSTI VLAN mapping instance parameter and port parameters Syntax show lt CName gt Parameter lt CName gt To show the MSTP configuration name EXAMPLE Switch mstp show CName Configuration name 00 01 c1l 00 00 00 Configuration rev 0 Switch mstp Syntax show lt Statistics gt Parameter lt Statistics gt To show the STP port statistics EXAMPLE Switch mstp show statistics Port Rx MSTP Tx MSTP Rx RSTP Tx RSTP Rx STP Tx STP Rx TCN Tx TCN Rx Ill Rx Unk Switch mstp Switch mstp Syntax show lt Status gt lt 0 7 gt VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 325 326 Parameter lt Status gt To show the STP Bridge status lt 0 7 gt STP bridge instance no
8. IP Source Guard Configuration Mode Disabled Translate dynamic to static Port Mode Configuration Mode Max Dynamic Clients Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled Mj Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled v Minaki a Unlimited reer Mode Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard All configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled Translate dynamic static Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries Port Mode Configuration Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled IP Source Guard is enabled on this given port Max Dynamic Clients Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients that can be learned on given port This value can be 0 1 2 or unlimited If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal to 0 it means only allow the IP packets forwarding that are matched in static entries on the specific port After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 182 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 4 6 IP Source Guard Static Table Function name IP Source Guard Static Table Function description The function is used to configure the Static IP Source Guard Table parameters of the s
9. Partner System ID The partner s System ID MAC address Partner Port The partner s port number connected to this port LACP Received Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port LACP Transmitted Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port Discarded Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 5 Spanning Tree Bridge Settings The Spanning Tree Protocol STP can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STP compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down STP STP uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device STP compliant switch bridge or router that serves as the root of the spanning tree network It selects a root port on each bridging device except for the root device which incurs
10. show Show user account information SYNTAX Show lt name gt EXAMPLE Switch account show User Name Privilege Level admin 15 Switch account VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 251 ACL Commands of CLI ace 252 Add or modify Access Control Entry SYNTAX ace lt index gt Parameter lt 1 256 gt If the ACE ID is specified and an entry with this ACE ID already exists the ACE will be modified Otherwise a new ACE will be added lt 0 256 gt If the next ACE ID is non zero the ACE will be placed before this ACE in the list If the next ACE ID is zero the ACE will be placed last in the list policy Policy ACE keyword the rule applies to all ports configured with the specified policy port Port ACE keyword the rule applies to the specified port only switch Switch ACE keyword the rule applies to all ports lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 5 any Any frame can match this ACE arp Only ARP frames can match this ACE Notice the ARP frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type etype Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE icmp Only ICMP frames can match this ACE Notice the ICM frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type ipv4 Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE Notice the IPv4 frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type tcp Only TCP frames can match this ACE Notice the TCP frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type udp Only UDP frames can match
11. MSTI Configuration ST Pront Configuration Priority _ i v 32768 ix MsTi1 32768 MSTI2 32768 MSTI3 32768 MSTI 32768 v MSTI5 32768 MSTI6 32768 MSTI7 32768 Apply VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is the default instance which is always active Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 8 Spanning Tree CIST Ports When you implement a Spanning Tree protocol on the switch for the bridge instance you need to configure the CIST Ports Function name Aggregation Static Trunk Function description The function is used to inspect the current STP CIST port configurations and possibly change them as well Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview System Y Aggregation Static Trunk gt LACP Y Spanning Tree Bridge Settings MSTI Mapping MSTI Priorities MSTI Ports Bridge Status Port Status Port Statistics gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping gt naum Parameters description STP CIST Port Configuration im CIST Aggregated Port Configuration STP Admin Enable
12. Role v Aggregation Static Trunk LACP System Status Port Status amp Statistics gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base Active Active Active Active EIR Active lt Active Active Active oly om e wo mnl Active s KKK Active Parameters description Port The switch port number LACP Enabled Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port LACP will form an aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner LACP can form max 12 LLAGs per switch and 2 GLAG s per stack Key The Key value incurred by the port range 1 65535 The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by the physical link speed 10Mb 1 100Mb 2 1Gb 3 Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group while ports with different keys cannot Role The Role shows the LACP activity status The Active will transmit LACP packets each second while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner speak if spoken to VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 3 Aggregatio
13. To configure system time manually Syntax manual lt date of system gt lt time of system gt Parameter lt date of system gt Date of system format is YYYY MM DD example 2011 06 25 lt time of system gt Time of system format is HH MM SS example 23 10 55 EXAMPLE Switch time manual 2011 08 03 16 12 55 Switch time To configure system time by NTP Syntax ntp lt mode gt lt disable enable gt Parameter lt mode gt Indicates the NTP mode operation lt disable gt Disable NTP mode operation lt enable gt Enable NTP mode operation EXAMPLE Switch time ntp mode enable Switch time Syntax ntp lt server gt lt server index gt lt ipv6 address ip hostname gt Parameter lt server gt Indicates the NTP mode operation lt server index gt NTP server index the available value is from 1 to 5 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 369 Show 370 lt ipv6 address gt NTP server ipv6 address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 cSff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 lt ip hostname gt NTP server ip address or hostname EXAMPLE
14. VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout o wM Overview System Configuration Security a Factory Defaults Are you sure you want to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults Restart Device gt Firmware Y Save Restore Save Start Yes Save User Restore User gt Export import gt Diagnostics Restore Default Configuration without changing current IP address Click Yes to reset the Switch configuration to Factory Defaults Only the IP configuration is retained VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 5 5 Save Restore Save Start Function name Save Restore Save Start Function description The function is used to save the Switch Start configuration Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout of m Overview System Configuration Security Save as Start Configuration Are you sure to save the current setting as Start Configuration Restart Device gt Firmware v Save Restore Factory Defaults ave Sta Save User Restore User gt Export import gt Diagnostics Click Save to perform the work You can save view or load the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 227 2 5 6 Save Restore Save User Function name Save Restore Save User Function description The function is used to save users information Any current configuration files will be saved as XML fo
15. eeu KS co i o fo FG nw fee Parameters description Rate Limiter ID The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row Rate The rate unit is packets per second pps configure the rate as 1 2 4 512 1K 2K 4K 3276700k The 1 kpps is actually 1002 1 pps The allowed values are 0 3276700 in pps or 0 100 200 300 1000000 in kbps Unit Specify the rate unit The allowed values are pps Packets per second kbps Kbits per second After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 174 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 4 3 ACL Access Control List The section describes how to configure Access Control List rule An Access Control List ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match the frame is accepted Other actions can also be invoked when a matching packet is found including rate limiting copying matching packets to another port or to the system log or shutting down a port Function name ACL Access Control List Function description The function is used to show the Access Control List ACL which is m
16. After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 113 2 3 31 LLDP LLDP MED Neighbours This page provides a status overview of all LLDP MED neighbours The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbour is detected Function name LLDP LLDP MED Neighbours Function description This function applies to VoIP devices which support LLDP MED Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of 2 LLDP MED Neighbour Information Auto refresh _ Overview v Aggrey No LLDP MED neighbour inf ion found Static Trunk o neighbour information foun gt LACP gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping gt MVR Y LLDP LLDP General Setup LLDP Neighbours LLDP MED General Setup pe LLOP MED Neighbours i EEE Port Statistics gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN Parameters description Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received Device Type LLDP MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device Definition LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices as defined in TIA 1057 provide access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP MED Endpoint Devices An LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies
17. Disabled Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation Discovery Protocol Indicates the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol It will only work when auto detect mode is enabled We should enable LLDP feature before configuring discovery protocol to LLDP or Both Changing the discovery protocol to OUI or LLDP will restart auto detection process Possible discovery protocols are OUI Detect telephony device by OUI address LLDP Detect telephony device by LLDP Both Both OUI and LLDP After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 145 2 3 52 Voice VLAN QUI Function name Voice VLAN QUI Function description The function is used to Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table The maximum entry number is 16 Modifying the OUI table will restart auto detection of OUI process VigorSwitch P2261 Auto L tor M uio ogout Wi Voice VLAN OUI Table Overview gt LLDP gt PoE Delete Telephony OUI Description 00 01 23 Siemens AG phones 00 03 6b Cisco phones gt Filtering Data Base VLAN VLAN Membership 00 0f e2 H3C phones Ports 00 60 b9 Philips and NEC AG phones Switch Status 00 d0 1e Pingtel phones Pot Status 00 e0 75 Polycom phones Private VLANs gt MAC based VLAN gt Protocol based VLAN Voice VLAN Add new entry General Setup gt GARP gt GVRP gt Qos
18. Function name Traffic Overview Function Description It describes to the Port statistics information and provides overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of A A me os A Port Statistics Overview Auto refresh C Refresh Clear view Packets Bytes Errors Drops Filtered System Information Received Transmitted Received Transmitted Received Transmitted Received Transmitted Received 6680 2390 1672553 1015955 0 0 0 0 3146 0 0 D g a NTP amp Time Configuration Account IP yPort General Setup Detailed Statistics QoS Statistics SFP Information EEE Loop Protection Trap Event Severity SNMP Syslog SMTP General Setup sFlow Agent Configuration Security Maintenance 0 0 0 IS ko io 0 o le eo o e ho BR lew l l ko 3E Parameter Description Port Display the port number The number is 24 Both port 21 24 are optional modules Packets The number of received and transmitted packets per port Bytes The number of received and transmitted bytes per port Errors The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per port Drops The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion Filtered
19. Port The port number for which the configuration below applies Admin State If NAS is globally enabled this selection controls the port s authentication mode The following modes are available Force Authorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication Force Unauthorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be disallowed network access Port based 802 1X In the 802 1 X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The authenticator acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which VigorS
20. The Power Allocated shows the amount of power the switch has allocated for the PD Power Used The Power Used shows how much power the PD currently is using Current Used The Power Used shows how much current the PD currently is using Priority The Priority shows the port s priority configured by the user Port Status The Port Status shows the port s status Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh 2 3 36 PoE Power Delay Function name VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button 123 PoE Power Delay Function description Set the delay time for PoE power supply Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview y agyreyauon Static Trunk Por gt LACP Disable gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping Disable gt MVR Disable gt LLDP F Y PoE General Setup Disable Sialis Disable Auto Checking Schedule Disable gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN gt GARP Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Parameters description Delay Mode Enable Disable this function Delay Time 0 300 sec Set the delay time for power mode 2 3 37 PoE Auto Checking Function name PoE Auto Checking Dra
21. VigorSwitch P2261 EEEIEE wjlrrrrrrirrerrrr 1 iy Auto Logout Off SSH Configuration _ Overview sytem i Configuration gt ACL gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay gt NAS gt AAA gt Port Security Access Management HTTPS Auth Method Maintenance Parameters description Mode Indicates the SSH mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SSH mode operation Disabled Disable SSH mode operation After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 220 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 4 27 HTTPS Function name HTTP Function description The function uses HTTPS to securely access the Switch HTTPS is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication via the browser Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of a HTTPS Configuration Overview SYSTEM oe Mode Enabled v Sonfiguration Automatic Redirect Disabled v gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay gt NAS gt AAA gt Port Security gt Access Management SSH Auth Method Maintenance Parameters description Mode Indicates the HTTPS mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS mode operati
22. gt VLAN gt GARP Disabled Receiver Disabled MVR Configuration Port Configuration Disabled Receiver Disabled Disabled Receiver Disabled gt GVRP Disabled Receiver Disabled gt Qos Disabled Receiver Disabled S S S RE Parameters description MVR Mode Enable Disable the Global MVR VLAN ID Specify the Multicast VLAN ID Port Switch port number Mode Enable MVR on the port Type Specify the MVR port type on the port Immediate Leave Enable the fast leave on the port After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 101 102 2 3 26 MVR Group Information Function name MVR Group Information Function description The function is to display the MVR Groups detail information on the switch Entries in the MVR Group Table are shown on this page The MVR Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview Sores Static Trunk gt LACP gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping Y MVR General Setup Statistics gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN gt GARP gt GVRP gt Qos MVR Groups Information Auto refresh Refresh Start from VLAN j add group address 224
23. lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt access gt Untag all frames lt hybric gt Tag all frames except VLAN ID same as PVID lt trunk gt Tag all frames EXAMPLE Switch vlan egress rule 3 5 access Switch vlan show port config TPID for Custom S port 0x88a8 Port PVID Frame Type Ingress Filter Egress Rule Port Type 1 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 2 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 3 3 All Disabled Access UnAware 4 3 All Disabled Access UnAware 5 3 All Disabled Access UnAware 6 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware Fi 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 8 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 9 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 10 1 Al Disabled Hybric UnAware Switch vlan frame type To configure frame type of switch ports Syntax frame type lt port list gt lt all tagged untagged gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt all gt Accept all frames lt tagged gt Accept tagged frames only lt untagged gt Accept untagged frames only EXAMPLE Switch vlan frame type 3 5 untagged Switch vlan show port config TPID for Custom S port 0x88a8 Port PVID Frame Type Ingress Filter Egress Rule Port Type 1 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 2 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 3 3 Untagged Disabled Access UnAware 4 3 Untagged Disabled Access UnAware 5 3 Untagged Disabled Access UnAware 6 T All Disabled Hybric UnAware
24. nurrne Parameters description Start from Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed VLAN ID VLAN ID in which the ARP traffic is permitted MAC Address User MAC address of the entry IP Address User IP address of the entry Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 187 2 4 11 DHCP Snooping General Setup Function name DHCP Snooping General Setup Function description The function is used to configure the DHCP Snooping parameters of the switch The DHCP Snooping can prevent attackers from adding their own DHCP servers to the network Auto Logout Of Overview System Configuration gt ACL gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection Y DHCP Snooping Statistics gt DHCP Relay gt NAS gt AAA gt Port Security gt Access Management SSH HTTPS in skin RB Alin on ol Parameters description DHCP Snooping Configuration wlrrrrrrirrrrry DHCP Snooping Configuration Snooping Mode Disabled Port Mode Configuration v o a Unirusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted v oN nnr wry s Untrusted Snooping Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP
25. packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Lease Active The number of lease active option 53 with value 13 packets received and transmitted After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 4 13 DHCP Relay General Setup Function name DHCP Relay General Setup Function description The function is used to describe how to forward DHCP requests to another specific DHCP server via DHCP relay The DHCP servers may be on another network DrayTek VigorSwitch P2261 Configuration gt ACL gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt DHCP Snooping Y DHCP Relay eneral Setup Statistics gt NAS gt AAA gt Port Security gt Access Management Parameters description Relay Mode mm DHCP Relay Configuration Relay Mode Disabled Relay Server Relay Information Mode Disabled Relay Information Policy Replace Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP relay mode operation When DHCP relay mode operation is enabled the agent forwards and transfers DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not in the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t be flooded for security considerations Disabled Disable DHCP relay mode operation Relay Server Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address A DHCP relay agent is use
26. 0 BE S F S SII to Bi Be w Boe n gt foe Fea oO fe Available QoS Class value ranges from 0 to 7 QoS Class 0 7 can be mapped to followed parameters DPL Drop Precedence Level 0 1 can be configured for all available QoS Classes DSCP After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Select DSCP value 0 63 from DSCP menu to map DSCP to corresponding QoS Class and DPL value 159 2 3 65 QoS QoS Control List Function name QoS QoS Control List Function description The function shows the QoS Control List QCL which is made up of the QCEs Each row describes a QCE that is defined The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new QCE to the list Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 YIII IIIT Auto Logout Of Overview E l A eae Qce Port F type SMAC DMAC VID PCP DEI QoS Control List Configuration Port Policing Port Scheduler Port Shaping Port Tag Remarking Port DSCP DSCP Based QoS OSCP Translation DSCP Classification QCL Status Storm Control gt Single IP Easy Port Mirroring UPnP Cnnucions Parameters description QCE Indicates the index of QCE Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incoming fram
27. Bast as eet a eaa ad aa Sete 172 2 a e NCI E OTA CEEE A A E E E E A aaa 172 24 2 AGL Rate Limiters risin aeei a ae enaa aar a aa te Aara eae ea 174 243 ACL Access Control Listessi iesenii iiaaaeaoe aetna a a ea 175 2 4 4 ACL ACL Stat S iiin a a a adnia a ea ada aa deaan aa aaa aa 179 2 4 5 IP Source Guard General S tup ccccccececceceeeeeenaeeeeneeceeeeeaaeeeseeeeseaeeesaeeeeaaeseenees 182 2 4 6 IP Source Guard Static Table eccccccceeeeeeecneeeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeaeseeeeeeseaeeeeaeeeenees 183 2 4 7 IP Source Guard Dynamic Table c ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeseeneeseaeeesaeeeeaeeeenees 184 2 4 8 ARP Inspection General Setup cccccceceeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaaeeeeneeseeeeesaeeesaaeenenees 185 2 4 9 ARP Inspection Static Table c ccccccceseeeeceeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeesaaeeseeeesaeeeeaeeeenees 186 2 4 10 ARP Inspection Dynamic Table ooo eecceeeenneeeeeenneeeeeenaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeneaaes 187 2 4 11 DHCP Snooping General Setup ceecceeecceceneeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeaaeeeeneeseaeeesaeeeeaeeeeees 188 2 4 12 DHCP Snooping Statistics cccccccceceeececeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeceaeeeecaaeeseeeeseeeesaeseeaeeeenees 189 2 4 13 DHCP Relay General Setup cccceesceceeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeceaeeeseaesesaaeeseaeeesaeeesaeeeenees 190 2 4 14 DHCP Relay Statistics 0 ccccecccececeeceeneeceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaaeeeeaaesseaeeseeeesaeeeea
28. For MAC based ports reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration has changed It does not involve communication between the switch and the client and therefore doesn t imply that a client is still present on a port see Aging Period below Reauthentication Period Determines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be reauthenticated This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds EAPOL Timeout Determines the time for retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 seconds This has no effect for MAC based ports Aging Period This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1 e MAC Based Auth When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses the Port Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time This parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in an 802 1 X based mode this is not so critical since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon the next reauthentication which will fail
29. It can be either Allow or Deny Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 3 25 MVR General Setup The MVR feature enables multicast traffic forwarding on the Multicast VLAN In a multicast television application a PC or a television with a set top box can receive the multicast stream Multiple set top boxes or PCs can be connected to one subscriber port which is a switch port configured as an MVR receiver port When a subscriber selects a channel the set top box or PC sends an IGMP join message to Switch A to join the appropriate multicast Uplink ports that send and receive multicast data to and from the multicast VLAN are called MVR source ports Function name MVR General Setup Function description The function is used to set the MVR basic configuration and some parameters in the switch Dray Tek r DrayTek Trierriucrenre Cj vernrme CIR eo EO Mh VigorSwitch P2261 L Auto Logout Of B Se innl 7 Static Trunk MVR Mode Disabled gt LACP VLANID 100 gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping Y MVR zape Bieda Laava Groups Information nd i id id ih Statistics Disabled Receiver x Disabled gt LLDP Disabled Receiver Disabled gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base
30. MST Swit z n 3 j auone UNBE N h mstp 328 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide MVR of CLI immediate leave To configure MVR port state about immediate leave Syntax immediate leave lt port list gt lt disable enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt disable gt Disable immediate leave on the specific port lt enable gt Enable immediate leave on the specific port EXAMPLE Switch mvr immediate leave 3 5 enable Switch mvr Mode To configure the MVR mode globally port mode port type Syntax mode lt disable enable gt lt VLAN ID gt Parameter lt disable gt Disable the MVR function globally lt enable gt Enable multicast traffic forwarding on the Multicast VLAN function globally lt VLAN ID gt Multicast VLAN ID available is from 1 to 4094 EXAMPLE Switch mvr mode enable 2 Switch mvr To configure the MVR port mode Syntax port mode lt port list gt lt disable enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt disable gt Disable the MVR on the specific port lt enable gt Enable the MVR on the specific port EXAMPLE Switch mvr port mode 3 5 enable Switch mvr To configure the MVR port type Syntax port type lt port list gt lt receiver source gt VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 329
31. Overview System Y Aggregation Static Trunk gt LACP Y Spanning Tree MSTI Mapping MSTI Priorities CIST Ports MSTI Ports Bridge Status Port Status Port Statistics gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping Parameters description Basic Settings STP Bridge Configuration 2351 Setigs Protocol Version Bridge Priority Forward Delay Max Age Maximum Hop Count 20 Transmit Hold Count 6 img Advanced Settings Edge Port BPDU Filtering Edge Port BPDU Guard Port Error Recovery Protocol Version The STP protocol version setting Valid values are STP RSTP and MSTP Bridge Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier For MSTP operation this is the priority of the CIST Otherwise this is the priority of the STP RSTP bridge Forward Delay The delay used by STP Bridges to transit Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Max Age The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds and MaxAge must be lt FwdDelay 1 2 Maximum Hop Count This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the
32. Parameter lt number gt The numerical digit string for the Emergency Call Service EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed ecs 886227853961 Switch lldpmed Fast To configure LLDP MED fast start repeat count Syntax fast lt 10 gt Parameter lt 1 10 gt The number of times the fast start LLDPDU are being sent during the activation of the fast start mechanism defined by LLDP MED EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed fast 2 Switch lldpmed To configure LLDP MED policy Syntax policy lt tagged untagged gt lt VLAN ID gt lt Layer2 priority gt lt DSCP value gt lt guest voice guest voice signaling softphone voice streaming video video conferencing video signaling voice voice signaling gt Parameter lt tagged gt The device is using tagged frames lt untagged gt The device is using untagged frames lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID available value is from 1 to 4094 lt L2 priority gt Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type available value is from 0 to 7 lt DSCP value gt DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 available value is from 0 to 63 lt guest voice gt Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 30
33. Port Status gt Private VLANs gt MAC based VLAN D VLAN Membership Status Combined Auto refresh Refresh Port Members Parameters description VLAN USER VLAN User module uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configurations such as PVID and UVID Currently we support the following VLAN user types Combined Static p NAS GVRP IMVR M Voice VLAN MSTP VCL Combine CLI Web SNMP These are referred to as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP allows dynamic registration and deregistration of VLANs on ports ona VLAN bridged network VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single multicast VLAN Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MSTP The 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to create multiple spanning trees in a network which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a loop free environment VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN Auto refresh Th
34. S port is S port with Custom TPID Ingress Filtering Shows the ingress filtering on a port This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN the frame is discarded Frame Type Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on that port are discarded Tx Tag Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide untagged UVID Shows UVID untagged VLAN ID Port s UVID determines the packet s behaviour at the egress side Conflicts Shows status of Conflicts whether exists or not When a Volatile VLAN User requests to set VLAN membership or VLAN port configuration the following conflicts can occur Functional Conflicts between features Conflicts due to hardware limitation Direct conflict between user modules Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button 2 3 45 VLAN Private VLANs Private VLAN Membership In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted A VLAN can be configured as a private VLAN Private VLANs are based on the source port mask and there are no
35. Server disconnect Switch aaa VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 245 NOTE If you didn t connect the RADIUS Server already then the switch will show Server disconnect fallback author To configure the fallback function of RADIUS authorization with enable disable if remote authorization Radius fails Syntax fallback author lt disable enable gt Parameter lt disable gt Disable fallback function lt enable gt Enable fallback function if remote authorization fails EXAMPLE Switch aaa fallback author enable Server disconnect NOTE If you didn t connect the RADIUS Server already then the switch will show Server disconnect To configure the RADIUS Server detail parameter Syntax radius lt index gt lt enable disable gt lt ip hostname gt lt 0 65535 gt lt Line gt Parameter lt index gt The RADIUS accounting Server index The available value is from to 5 lt disable enable gt To enable or disable the RADIUS accounting service lt ip hostname gt The RADIUS accounting server IP address or hostname lt 0 65535 gt The RADIUS accounting server UDP port If the port is set to 0 zero then the default port 1813 is used lt LINE gt Secret shared with external accounting server The Available value is up to 29 characters long EXAMPLE Switch aaa radius 1 enable 192 168 2 22 0 radius Server disconnect NOTE If you didn t connect the RADIUS Se
36. Switch lldpmed coordinate latitude 20 north Switch lldpmed Syntax coordinate longitude lt coordinate value gt lt east west gt Parameter lt coordinate value gt 0 to 180 degrees with max 4 digits lt east gt East of the prime meridian lt west gt West of the prime meridian EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed coordinate longitude 90 west Switch lldpmed show config Fast Start Repeast Count 4 Location Coordinates Latitude 20 0000 North Longitude 90 0000 West Altitude 25 0000 floor Map datum NAD83 NAVD88 Civic Address Location Country code tw National subdivison Taipei County City Taipei City district El Block Neighborhood block2 Street Nan Kang Road Street Dir north Trailling Street 2 Street Suffix 3 House No 5 House No Suffix line3 Landmark great Additional Location Info test Name gt BCOL Zip s236 Building Manufacture Unit 005 Floor Pees Room No ILs Placetype meetingroom Postal Community Name LLDP MED01 P O Box 2 22 Addination Code 21205 Emergency Call Service Switch lldpmed To delete the selected policy Syntax delete lt policy ID gt VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Ecs Policy Parameter lt policy ID gt Policy ID available value is from 0 to 31 EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed delete 1 Switch lldpmed To configure LLDP MED Emergency Call Service Syntax ecs lt number gt
37. developed MAC based VLANs group VLAN members by MAC address With MAC based VLAN configured the device adds a VLAN tag to an untagged frame according to its source MAC address MAC based VLANs are mostly used in conjunction with security technologies such as 802 1X to provide secure flexible network access for terminal devices Function name VLAN MAC based VLAN General Setup Function description The function is used for adding and deleting MAC based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports This page shows only static entries Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Off Auto Logout Ot MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base l i Port Members MAC VLAN Y VLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VLAN Membership Pors Switch Status Add new entry Port Status gt Private VLANs MAC based VLAN General Setup Status gt Protocol based VLAN gt Voice VLAN gt GARP gt GVRP gt Qos Parameters description Delete To delete a MAC based VLAN entry check this box and press Apply MAC Address Indicates the MAC address VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC based VLAN entry To include a port in a MAC based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the MAC based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By d
38. exported as XML format Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of r Configuration Save Overview system Configuration Security Restart Device gt Firmware gt Save Restore Exportiimport Import Config gt Diagnostics Click Save configuration to perform the work You can save view or load the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags 230 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 5 9 Export Import Import Config Function name Export Import Import Config Function description The function is used to import the Switch Configuration for maintenance needs Any current configuration files will be exported as XML format Auto Logout Off _ Configuration Upload System Configuration Restart Device gt Firmware gt Save Restore Y Export import Export Config Import Config gt Diagnostics Click Browser to select firmware in you device and click Upload You can save view or load the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 231 2 5 10 Diagnostics Ping Diagnostics is used to provide a set of basic system diagnosis It let users know whether the system is health or needs to be fixed The basic system check includes ICMP Ping ICMPv6 and VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Function name Diagnostics Ping F
39. gt Delete snmpv3 users entry lt view gt Delete snmpv3 views entry lt table index gt The SNMP entry table index the available value is from 1 to 4 EXAMPLE Switch snmp delete community 1 Delete SNMPv3 community entry success Switch snmp engine id To configure the SNMP Engine ID the command sets the SNMPVv3 local engine ID Group 354 Syntax engine id lt HEX gt Parameter lt HEX gt The SNMPv3 engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all ff H and is restricted to 5 32 octet string EXAMPLE Switch snmp engine id 80001455030001c1000000 Change Engine ID will clear all original local users Switch snmp NOTE gt An SNMPv3 engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides on the switch This engine protects against message replay delay and redirection The engine ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets gt A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch This is referred to as the default engine ID If the local engine ID is deleted or changed all local SNMP users will be cleared You will need to reconfigure all existing users To configure SNMP group the command adds an SNMPvV3 group entry Syntax group lt user name gt lt security model gt lt group name gt Parameter lt user name gt The name of user connecting to the SNMP ag
40. no special character is allowed Whichever group name you try mapping to a VLAN must be present in Protocol to Group mapping table and must not be pre used by any other existing mapping entry on this page VLAN ID Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1 4095 Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID mapping To include a port in a mapping check the box To remove or exclude the port from the mapping make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Add new entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is added to the table the Group Name VLAN ID and port members can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 143 144 Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 51 Voice VLAN General Setup Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN we can perform QoS related configuration for voice data ensuring the transm
41. storm broadcast disable Switch qos tag remarking QoS egress port tag remarking 348 SYNTAX tag remarking lt disable gt lt enable gt dei Configure the default DEI This value is used when port tag remarking mode is set to default map Configure the port tag remarking map This map is used when port tag remarking mode is set to mapped and the purpose is to translate the classified QoS class 0 7 and DP level 0 1 to PCP and DEI mode Configure the port tag remarking mode pep Configure the default PCP This value is used when port tag remarking mode is set to default lt 0 1 gt Drop Eligible Indicator lt 0 1 gt Drop Eligible Indicator EXAMPLE Switch qos tag remarking dei 1 1 Switch qos VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide SMTP of CLI Level To configure Severity level and parameter Syntax level lt Severity level gt Parameter lt Severity level gt To configure the Severity level the available value is from 0 to 7 lt 0 gt Emergency system is unusable lt 1 gt Alert action must be taken immediately lt 2 gt Critical critical conditions lt 3 gt Error error conditions lt 4 gt Warning warning conditions lt 5 gt Notice normal but significant condition lt 6 gt Informational informational messages lt 7 gt Debug debug level messages EXAMPLE Switch smtp level 1 Switch smtp mail address To configure the email address ali
42. vcl Show To show the VCL status command Syntax show lt mac vlan gt Parameter lt mac vlan gt Show MAC based VLAN entry EXAMPLE Switch vcl show mac vlan 374 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide MAC Address VID Ports Qa lb 2c 3d 4e 5f 5 9 10 Switch vcl Syntax show lt protocol vlan gt Parameter lt protocol vlan gt Show protocol based VLAN configuration EXAMPLE switch vcl show protocol vlan Protocol Type Protocol Value Group Name SNAP OUI 00 40 c7 PID 0x0 snapvl01 LLC DSAP 0x00 SSAP 0xff licv13 Ethernet ETYPE 0x600 ethevin3 Group Name VID Ports protvlal 5 7 10 provla0 3 7 10 Switch vcl VLAN of CLI Delete To delete VLAN group and remove the VLAN member egress rule Syntax delete lt tag group gt lt VLAN ID gt Parameter lt tag group gt Delete tag based VLAN group lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID available value is from 1 to 4094 EXAMPLE Switch vlan tag group 3 testvlan 3 5 Switch vlan show vlan combined VID VLAN Name User Ports 1 default Combined 1 14 2 Combined 3 5 3 testvlan Combined 3 5 Switch vlan delete tag group 3 Switch vlan show vlan combined VID VLAN Name User Ports 1 default Combined 1 14 2 Combined 3 5 Switch vlan To configure egress rule of switch ports Syntax VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 375 egress rule lt port list gt lt access hybric trunk gt Parameter
43. 0 in which each bit of the first three bytes is 1 It s now clear that the first two bytes is used to identify the class B network the third byte is used to identify the subnet within this class B network and of course the last byte is the host number Not all IP address is available in the sub netted network Two special addresses are reserved They are the addresses with all zero s and all one s host number For example an IP address 128 1 2 128 what IP address reserved will be looked like All Os mean the network itself and all 1s mean IP broadcast VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Network Subnet All Os 128 1 2 128 All 1s 128 1 2 255 11111111 In this diagram you can see the subnet mask with 25 bit long 255 255 255 128 contains 126 members in the sub netted network Another is that the length of network prefix equals the number of the bit with 1s in that subnet mask With this you can easily count the number of IP addresses matched The following table shows the result Prefix Length No of IP matched No of Addressable IP 32 1 31 2 130 4 2 29 8 6 28 16 14 27 32 30 26 64 62 25 128 126 24 256 254 123 512 510 22 1024 1022 21 2048 2046 20 4096 4094 19 8192 8190 18 16384 16382 17 32768 32766 16 65536 65534 According to the scheme above a subnet mask 255 255 255 0 will partition a network with the class C It means there will have a maximum of 254 effective nodes existed in t
44. 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page Lis lt Port Members No more entries Parameters description VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group Groups Group ID of the group displayed Port Members Ports under this group Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 3 27 MVR Statistics Function name MVR Statistics Function description The function is used to display the MVR detail Statistics after you had configured MVR on the switch It provides the detail MVR Statistics Information Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview aggiegauon Static Trunk gt LACP gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping Y MVR General Setup Groups Information statistics gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN gt GARP gt GVRP gt Qos Parameters description VLAN ID Refresh Clear 0 Cima e The Multicast VLAN ID V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports V3 Reports Received The number of Received V3 Reports V2 Leaves Received The number of Received V2 Leaves Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on
45. 0 3 4 7 or Any DEI Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0 1 or Any SMAC Source MAC address 24 MS bits OUD or Any DMAC Type Destination MAC type possible values are unicast UC multicast MC broadcast BC or Any Frame Type Frame Type can have any of the following values 1 Any 2 Ethernet 3 LLC 4 SNAP 5 IPv4 6 IPv6 Note all frame types are explained below 1 Any Allow all types of frames 2 Ethernet Valid ethernet type can have value within 0x600 OxFFFF or Any default value is Any 3 LLC Valid SSAP Source Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any Valid DSAP Destination Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any Valid Control Address can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any 4 SNAP Valid PID a k a ethernet type can have value within 0x00 OxFFFF or Any default value is Any 5 IPv4 IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Specific Source IP address in value mask format or Any IP and Mask are in the format x y z w where x y Z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 When Mask is converted to a 32 bit binary string and read from left to right all bits following the first zero must also be zero Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value range of value or Any
46. 1 LAN Switch Router 2 IEEE 802 1 Bridge 3 IEEE 802 3 Repeater included for historical reasons 4 IEEE 802 11 Wireless Access Point 5 Any device that supports the IEEE 802 1AB and MED extensions defined by TIA 1057 and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method LLDP MED Endpoint LLDP MED Endpoint Devices as defined in TIA 1057 are located at the IEEE 802 LAN network edge and participate VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Device Definition in IP communication service using the LLDP MED framework Within the LLDP MED Endpoint Device category the LLDP MED scheme is broken into further Endpoint Device Classes as defined in the following Each LLDP MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities defined for the previous Endpoint Device Class For example will any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint Class II also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to Generic Endpoints Class I and any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication Device Class II will also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to both Media Endpoints Class II and Generic Endpoints Class I LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class I The LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class I definition is applicable to all endpoint products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA 1057 however do not support IP media or act as an end user communication appliance Such d
47. 2 3 33 LLDP Port Statistics Function name LLDP Port Statistics Function description Two types of counters are shown Global counters are counters that refer to the whole stack switch while local counters refer to per port counters for the currently selected switch Auto Logout Off Auto refresh Refresh Clear erview vagy eyauun Static Trunk gt LACP Global Counters Neighbour entries were last changed 2011 01 01 00 00 00 252485 sec ago Total Neighbours Entries Added 0 gt IGMP Snooping Total Neighbours Entries Deleted gt MLD Snooping Total Neighbours Entries Dropped gt MVR Total Neighbours Entries Aged Out Y LLDP LLDP General Setup LLDP Statistics LLDP Neighbours LLDP MED General Setup Local Counters LLDP MED Neighbours Local Tx Rx Rx Frames TLVs TLVs Age EEE Port Frames Frames Errors Discarded Discarded Unrecognized Outs cits 0 B gt PoE a 7 gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN gt Spanning Tree 0 0 0 Parameters description Global Counters Neighbour entries were It also shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or last changed on added It also shows the time elapsed since the last change was detected Total Neighbours Entries Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot Added Total Neighbours Entries Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch Deleted reboot Tot
48. 2 Static 33 33 ff a8 01 01 1 None CPU 3 Static 33 33 ff ab c0 e2 1 None CPU 4 Static PE LESRE LLEAEE LE 1 1 10B CPU VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Mirror Commands of CLI analyzer port Configure LLDP MED civic address location port mode show SYNTAX analyzer port lt disable gt Parameter disable Disable port mirroring lt port gt Analyzer port available value is from 1 to 10 EXAMPLE Switch mirror analyzer port disable Switch mirror Configure LLDP MED coordinate location SYNTAX port mode lt port list gt lt disable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 disable Disable mirroring enable Enable Rx and Tx mirroring rx only Enable Rx mirroring tx only Enable Tx mirroring EXAMPLE Switch mirror port mode 1 disable Switch mirror Show port mirroring information SYNTAX Show EXAMPLE Switch mirror show Analyzer Port Disabled Port Mode Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled o J A OF WY BP VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 309 310 9A Disabled 10A Disabled 9B Disabled 10B Disabled Switch mirror VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide MLD Commands of CLI fast leave filtering flooding leave proxy Set per port Fast Leave SYNTAX fast leave Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is fro
49. 5 2 192 168 2 22 0a 1b 2c 3d 4e 5f Switch ip source guard Switch ip source guard show binding table 3 5 Type Port VLAN IP Address MAC Address lt none gt Switch ip source guard To set the IP source guard port limitation for dynamic entries Syntax limit lt port list gt lt 0 2 unlimited gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 283 lt 0 2 gt Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients that can be learned on given port If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal to 0 it means only allow the IP packets forwarding that are matched in static entries on the specific port lt unlimited gt Unlimited dynamic clients EXAMPLE Switch ip source guard limit 3 5 0 Switch ip source guard Switch ip source guard show binding table 3 5 Type Port VLAN IP Address MAC Address lt none gt Switch ip source guard Mode To configure IP source guard mode globally Syntax mode lt disable enable gt Parameter lt disable gt Globally disable IP source guard mode lt enable gt Globally enable IP source guard mode NOTE All configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled EXAMPLE Switch ip source guard mode enable Switch ip source guard show binding table 3 5 Type Port VLAN IP Address MAC Address lt none gt Switch ip source guard p
50. Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 73 74 Function name 2 3 4 Aggregation LACP Port Status amp Statistics Aggregation LACP Port Status amp Statistics Function description The function shows a Port Status and Statistics overview for all LACP instances when you complete to set LACP function on the switch DrayTek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off Overview System v Aggregation Static Trunk Vv LACP General Setup System Status gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base a nann Parameters description Port LACP Status Auto refresh Refresh Partner partner LACP LACP Discardec ort Aggr LACP Key ID P Received Transmitted Unknown Ill No No No No No No No No No No No No No The switch port number LCAP Yes means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up No means that LACP is not enabled or that the port link is down Backup means that the port could not join the aggregation group but will join if other port leaves Meanwhile its LACP status is disabled Key The key assigned to this port Only ports with the same key can aggregate together Ager ID The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group IDs 1 and 2 are GLAGs while IDs 3 14 are LLAGs
51. DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 IPv4 frame fragmented option yesInolany Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP 6 IPv6 IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any IPv6 source address a b c d or Any 32 LS bits Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide value range of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Action Parameters Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS Class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Classified Drop Precedence Level if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column DSCP Classified DSCP value If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column Other buttons After finished the above settings clic
52. Enable dynamic power control enable Enable power saving EXAMPLE Switch port power saving 1 actiphy Switch port VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 335 show 336 Show port information SYNTAX Show Parameter configuration Show port configuration detail counter Show detailed traffic statistics for specific switch port sfp Show sfp information simple counter Show general traffic statist ics for all switch ports status Show port status EXAMPLE Switch port show configuration Port Media State Speed Duplex Flow Control Max Frame Excessive Power Description 1 UTP Disabled Auto Disabled 1518 Discard ActiPHY POE SWITCH 2 UTP Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Discard Disabled 3 UTP Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Discard Disabled 4 UTP Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Discard Disabled 5 UTP Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Discard Disabled 6 UTP Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Discard Disabled Switch port show detail counter 1 Port 1 statistics Receive Total Transmit Total Rx Packets 0 Tx Packets 0 Rx Octets 0 Tx Octets 0 Rx Unicast 0 Tx Unicast 0 Rx Multicast 0 Tx Multicast 0 Rx Broadcast 0 Tx Broadcast 0 Rx Pause 0 Tx Pause 0 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide speed duplex Configure speed duplex operation SYNTAX speed duplex lt port list gt lt 10 full gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 10 full Force speed duplex to 10 full op
53. Fiber Transceiver to the Chassis c cccccsseeeeesseeeeeeesteeeeesnaees 14 1 5 2 Installing Optional SFP Fiber Transceivers to the switch cccesseceeeesteeeeeeesteeeeeeaes 15 1 5 3 Installing Chassis to a 19 Inch Wiring Closet Rail esssesesssesesenesrnesrrssrnnssrnssrnssrnssns 15 1 5 4 Cabling REQUIFEMENIS aasia anara eo aaaea a eaaa e eaaa aaa ai a ae aaa A na a aaa aaant 16 1 5 5 Configuring the Management Agent of Switch ssssssssessssnssirssirssirsssrnssrnssrrssrrssrrssrns 20 TOG IP Address ASSIQGNMONt corir kekek enana EREE A E AERIENE SEERE 21 RAE eE aea P E E E E E T E EE EE TETE 25 Chapter 2 Operation of Web based Management ssssnsssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 27 2 1 Web Management Home Overview cccccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeseneeseeeeeseaeeesaaeseeeeeseeeeenaeenenees 28 2 1 1 The Information of Page Layout ccccccceeeeeeeeeceneeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeceaeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeneneeee 29 2 2 SY STON ceeke deste cascada N E panes E E E E 30 2 2 1 System Information Information ccceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeesaaeeseeeeecaeeesaeeneneeees 30 2 2 2 System Information Device Name ccceecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeseaeseeeeeeeaeeesaeeneneeees 31 2 2 3 System Information CPU LOG cececccteeeeeeee eens eeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeceaeeesaaeeseeeesaeeesaeeneneeee 32 2 2 4 NTP amp Time Configuration ccceccecceeeceeeneeeeseeceeeeecaeeeeaae
54. Function name Trap Function description This function is used to configure SNMP trap To create a new trap account please click the No number link and enter the trap information then click Apply Max Group Number 6 Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 wi oo Logout or E Trap Hosts Configuration Overview NTP amp Time Configuration a gt Account gt IP gt Port gt Loop Protection Trap Event Severity Y SNMP System General Setup Communities Apply Users Groups Views Access gt Syslog Server UDP Community Security Severity Security Auther IP Port Name Level Level Protoc Im ov He feo Im Io Parameters description Delete Click to delete the entry No Number link for Trap Host configuration Version Display the version of the trap host Server IP Display the SNMP Host IP address UDP Port Display the port number for UDP Community Security Display the name of community security Name Severity Level Display the level for severity Security Level Display the level for security Authentication Protocol Display the protocol configured for authentication Privacy Protocol Display the protocol configured for privacy Click the number link to access into the configuration page for each trap host VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 61 Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview NTP amp Time Configuration
55. Get to open the following page Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto L t of uto Logout MST3 MSTI Port Configuration Overview y m MSTI Aggregated Ports Configuration Y Aggregation Priority Static Trunk f gt LACP Spanning Tree Bridge Settings MSTI Mapping MSTI Priorities CIST Ports Bridge Status Port Status Port Statistics gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping navm Parameters description VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 81 Port The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST and MSTD port Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favour of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 10 Spanning Tree Bridge Status After you complete the MSTI Port configuration you could to ask the switch display the Bridge Status Function name Spannin
56. ID of the group Groups Group address of the group displayed Port Members Ports under this group VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 91 Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button 2 3 18 IGMP Snooping IPv4 SSM Information Source Specific Multicast SSM is a datagram delivery model that best supports one to many applications also known as broadcast applications SSM is a core network technology of IP multicast targeted for audio and video broadcast application environments For the SSM delivery mode an IP multicast receiver host must use IGMP Version 3 IGMPv3 to subscribe to channel S G By subscribing to this channel the receiver host is indicating that it wants to receive IP multicast traffic sent by source host S to group G The network will deliver IP multicast packets from source host S to group G to all hosts in the network that have subscribed to the channel S G SSM does not require group address allocation within the network only within each source host Different applications running on the same source host must use different SSM groups Different applications running on different source hosts can arbitrarily reuse SSM group addresses without causing any excess traffic on the network Addresses in the range 232 0 0 0 8 232 0 0 0 to 232 255 255 255 are reserved for SSM b
57. None None Disabled Disabled Disabled None None None VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 291 8 Disabled 4 None 9A Disabled 4 None 10A Disabled 4 None 9B Disabled 4 None 10B Disabled 4 None Switch limit control LLDP Commands of CLI cdp aware clear delay Interval 292 Configure CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol aware mode SYNTAX cdp aware lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 disable Disable CDP awareness enable Enable CDP awareness CDP discovery information is added to the LLDP neighbor table EXAMPLE Switch lldp cdp aware 1 enable Switch lldp Clear LLDP statistics SYNTAX clear EXAMPLE Switch lldp clear Switch lldp Configure LLDP Tx delay SYNTAX limit lt 1 8192 gt Parameter lt 1 8192 gt LLDP transmission delay EXAMPLE Switch lldp delay 1 Switch lldp Configure LLDP transmission interval SYNTAX Interval lt 5 32768 gt Parameter lt 5 32768 gt LLDP transmission interval EXAMPLE VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide mode option tlv reinit Switch lldp interval 5 Switch lldp Configure the LLDP mode SYNTAX Mode lt port list gt lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 disable The switch will not send o
58. OK 0 bad VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 5 11 Diagnostics Ping6 Function name Diagnostics Ping6 Function description The function allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues DrayTek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout lor m Overview System Configuration Security Restart Device gt Firmware gt Save Restore gt Export import v Diagnostics Ping VeriPHY Parameters description ICMPv6 Ping IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ping Length 56 Ping Count Ping Interval 1 IP Address The destination IP Address with IPv6 Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes Ping Count The count of the ICMP packet Values range from 1 time to 60 times Ping Interval The interval of the ICMP packet Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds Start Click the Start button then the switch will start to ping the device using ICMPv6 packet size what set on the switch After you click Start 5 ICMPv6 packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs PING server 10 10 132 20 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 64 bytes
59. Parameters description Tx Interval LLDP Configuration LLDP Parameters Tx Interval 30 seconds Tx Hold 4 times Tx Delay 2 seconds Tx Reinit seconds Optional TLVs Sys Sys Sys Name Descr Capa Disabled v Disabled 1x Disabled w Disabled 1 The switch periodically transmits LLDP frames to its neighbours for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds Tx Hold Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 times Tx Delay If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 1 8192 seconds VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Tx Reinit When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted an LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds betw
60. Port Error Recovery setting as well Point to point Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than to a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false Transition to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 80 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 3 9 Spanning Tree MSTI Ports An MSTI port is a virtual port which is instantiated separately for each active CIST physical port for each MSTI instance configured on and applicable to the port The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options It contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports The aggregation settings are stack global Function name Spanning Tree MSTI Ports Function description The function is used to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations and possibly change them as well VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout or w Overview Sys l Select MSTI MSTI Port Configuration Y Aggregation Static Trunk LACP Y Spanning Tree Bridge Settings MSTI Mapping MSTI Priorities CIST Ports Bridge Status Port Status Pot Statistics gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping gt navm MSTI Get Use the drop down list to choose one of the MSTI ports and click
61. SS Time Zone Offset UTC 0 00 Daylight Savings C Enable Time Set Offset 60 min Range 1 1440 Default 60 Daylight Savings Type E etn Recurring From YYYY MM DD HH MM To YYYY MM DD HH MM Month Time Month Time There are two modes for configuring where the Clock Source is from You can choose one of them to make time setting 1 Use Local Settings In this mode Clock Source is from Local Time Set the time manually 2 Use NTP Server In this mode Clock Source is from NTP Server The switch can link to Network Time Protocol server to obtain the correct time automatically when NTP server has been set Local Time Show the current time of the system Time Zone Offset Provide the time zone offset relative to UTC GMT The Time Set Offset offset is given in minutes east of GMT The valid range is from 720 to 720 minutes Daylight Saving Daylight saving is adopted in some countries If set it will VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide adjust the time lag or in advance in unit of hours according to the starting date and the ending date For example if you set the day light saving to be 1 hour When the time passes over the starting time the system time will be increased 33 one hour after one minute at the time since it passed over And when the time passes over the ending time the system time will be decreased one hour after one minute at the time since it passed ov
62. Setup 00 cccceesceceeeeeceneeeeeaeeeeneeceaeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeaeeesaaesseaaeenenees 104 2 3 29 L LDP LLDP NeighDo rS 3 Geda t ae aa acuta cvdvachectneeestactubahveis cheedd edyenectastebolccestaedis 106 2 3 30 LLDP LLDP MED General Setup eccccceseeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeeaeeeeaeeesaaeenenees 107 2 3 31 LLDP LLDP MED Neighbours 0 00 ccccceecccceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeaeeeeeaeeeeaaeseeneeesenees 114 2 902 EE DP SHEE AEAEE A E EAE EEE ET 118 2 3 93 LLDP Port Statisties esters shvsesehestesteshchiesclevtteescchinis aeaa aain ceviiceptiesdeelent ieteetivias 120 2334 POE General Sep a ee aaraa aaa aaa e Daa aaae aa eiaa raa aa aa beater beaten tee leotlade haves 121 2 3730 POE Status E EEE ETE EEEE E EEE EE TTET 122 2 3 90 POE Power Dola yoe dene a e EE AE E ERE ES RA A EER EEE E e tas 123 2 3 37 O a CHECKING APE EEEE ETETA E AEE A EE EE A 124 PAR Tete POE SCNECUI e A E E TE AE E E E E EEE A 125 2 3 39 Filtering Data Base General Setup cecccececeeeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeaaeeeeneeeeeeeseaeeesaeeeenees 126 2 3 40 Filtering Data Base Dynamic MAC Table cccccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseaeeeeaeeeenees 127 2 3 41 VLAN VLAN Membership cccccceceseeceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeseaeeeeeaaeeseeeeseeeesaeetsaaeeeenees 128 253 42 VLAN POMS haiena aee aonar esas debs aa aao aa AE soe naabstdceeedecustenavasehegh AEAN aE AEAEE ARS AAi 130 2 3 43 VLAN Switch Status ccc cec
63. Show 330 Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt receiver gt Define the port as receiver port lt source gt Define the port as source port EXAMPLE Switch mvr port type 3 5 receiver Switch mvr To show the Multicast VLAN Registration status or configuration Syntax show lt config gt Parameter lt config gt To display the MVR configuration EXAMPLE Switch mvr show config MVR Mode Enabled Muticast VLAN ID 2 Port Port Mode Port Type Immediate Leave al Disabled Receive Disabled 2 Disabled Receive Disabled 3 Enabled Receive Enabled 4 Enabled Receive Enabled 5 Enabled Receive Enabled 6 Disabled Receive Disabled 7 Disabled Receive Disabled 8 Disabled Receive Disabled 9 Disabled Receive Disabled 10 Disabled Receive Disabled Switch mvr Syntax show lt group gt Parameter lt group gt To display the MVR group information EXAMPLE Switch mvr show group Switch mvr NOTE If you didn t set the MVR environment already then the switch won t show any information Syntax show lt statistics gt Parameter lt statistics gt To display the MVR statistics information VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide EXAMPLE Switch mvr show statistics VID Rx V1 Reports Rx V2 Reports 2 0 0 0 Switch mvr Rx V3 Reports Rx V2 Leave VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide MVRP of CL
64. Spanning Tree System Trap Event VCL VLANs Voice VLAN Privilege Levels form 1 to 15 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide rT tear ict ee CIELA AAA ICL VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Privilege Level Configuration Overview E Group Name Privilege Levels gt System Information count NTP amp Time Configuration Y Account Users Diagnostics EEE gt IP Aggregation gt Port Easyport gt Loop Protection GARP Trap Event Severity gt SNMP gt Syslog IP SMTP General Setup gt sFlow Agent Configuration LACE Security LLDP Maintenance GVRP IPMC Snooping LLDP MED Loop Protect Parameter description Group Name The name identifying the privilege group In most cases a privilege level group consists of a single module e g LACP RSTP or QoS but a few of them contains more than one Privilege Levels Every group has an authorization Privilege level After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration 2 2 7 IP Configuration IPv4 IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across an internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of information sent over is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each device connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address and this IP address is used to
65. Switch time ntp server 1 timeserver0l Switch time show ntp Current Time 2011 08 03 16 24 46 Time Zone GMT 0 00 NTP Mode Enabled Index Server IP host address or a host name string timeserver0l 192 168 30 35 oO fF WN FP Switch time To show time information Syntax show lt daylight ntp gt Parameter lt daylight gt Show the daylight time information lt ntp gt Show the NTP information EXAMPLE Switch time show daylight Clock Source Local Settings Local Time 2011 08 03 16 27 56 YYYY MM DD HH MM SS Time Zone Offset O min Daylight Savings Enabled Time Set Offset 50 min Daylight Savings Type By dates From 2011 08 10 13 30 YYYY MM DD HH MM To 2011 10 31 13 30 YYYY MM DD HH MM Switch time show ntp Current Time 2011 08 03 16 28 11 Time Zone GMT 0 00 NTP Mode Enabled Index Server IP host address or a host name string timeserver01l 192 168 3035 of WN FE Switch time VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide VCL of CLI Delete To delete the configured command or VCL rule entry Syntax delete lt mac vlan gt lt mac address gt Parameter lt mac vlan gt Delete MAC based VLAN entry lt mac address gt MAC address format Oa 1b 2c 3d 4e 5f EXAMPLE Switch vcl mac vlan 0a 1b 2c 3d 4e 5f 3 9 10 Switch vcl show mac vlan MAC Address VID Ports Oa lb 2c 3d 4e 5f f 3 9 10 Switch vcl delete mac vlan 0a 1b 2c 3d 4e 5f S
66. System Management CDP Port Mode Description Name Description Capability Address awareness 1 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled 2 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled 3 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled 4 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled 5 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled 6 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled 7 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled 8 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled 9A Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled 10A Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled 9B Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled 10B Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Switch lldp Switch lldp show info 1 No LLDP entries found Switch lldp Switch lldp show statistics LLDP global counters Neighbor entries was last changed at 2011 01 01 00 00 00 7279 sec ago Total Neighbors Entries Added 0 Total Neighbors Entries Deleted 0 Total Neighbors Entries Dropped 0 Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out 0 LLDP local counters Rx Tx Rx Rx Rx TLV Rx TLV Rx TLV Port Frames Frames Errors Discards Errors Unknown Organz Aged p lt MA lt lt Ms So MS a is a es 40 MO ao GS oS VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10A 0 0 0 0 0 0
67. The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen 42 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button Clear The simple counts will be reset to zero when user use mouse to click on Clear button 2 2 11 Port Detailed Statistics The section describes how to provide detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display The selected port belongs to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Function name Detailed Statistics Function description The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit the size counters for receive and transmit and the error counters for receive and transmit VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off he Overview I Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Port Auto refresh C Refresh Clear System Information Rx Packets 6792 Tx Packets 2455 NTP amp Time Configuration Rx Octets 1703056 Tx Octets 1043962 Account Rx Unicast 2716 Tx Unicast 2368 IP Rx Multicast 2669 Tx Multicast 83 vPort eat Rx Broadcast 1407 Tx Broadcast 4 Anora getup Rx Pause Tx Pause o Traffic Overview ce Receive Size Counters Transmit Size Counters Rx 64 Bytes 2697 Tx 64 Bytes 132 SFP Inform
68. W Detection Reset 4 id v Enabled Low eij Enabled Low Enabled Low v Enabled Low Enabled Enabled Enabled Primary Power Supply The switch can have PoE power supplies It is used as W power source For being able to determine the amount of power the PD may use it must be defined what amount of power the power sources can deliver Port This is the logical port number for this row PoE State The PoE Mode represents the PoE operating mode for the port Disabled PoE disabled for the port Enabled Enables PoE IEEE 802 3af at Priority The Priority represents the ports priority There are three levels of power priority named Low High and Critical The priority is used in the case where the remote devices requires more power than the power supply can deliver In this case the port with the lowest priority will be turn off starting from the port with the highest port number Maximum Power The Maximum Power value contains a numerical value that indicates the maximum power in watts that can be delivered to a remote device NOTE If you want to set the Port support IEEE802 3at then you can set the Maximum allowed value is 30W Detection Allows you to choose power supply mode Legacy and 4 Point Reset Rest the PoE status 2 3 35 PoE Status Function name
69. and timer from some OSI layer 2 protocols such as 802 1d 802 1g LACP and so on The fiber TP cables and devices bit time delay round trip are as follows 1000Base X TP Fiber 100Base TX TP 100Base FX Fiber Round trip Delay 4096 Round trip Delay 512 Cat 5 TP Wire 11 12 m Fiber Cable Fiber Cable 10 10 m TP to fiber Converter 56 1 0 m Bit Time unit Ins 1sec 1000 Mega bit Bit Time unit 0 01 ps 1sec 100 Mega bit Sum up all elements bit time delay and the overall bit time delay of wires devices must be within Round Trip Delay bit times in a half duplex network segment collision domain For full duplex operation this will not be applied You may use the TP Fiber module to extend the TP node distance over fiber optic and provide the long haul connection Typical Network Topology in Deployment A hierarchical network with minimum levels of switch may reduce the timing delay between server and client station Basically with this approach it will minimize the number of switches in any one path will lower the possibility of network loop and will improve network efficiency If more than two switches are connected in the same network select one switch as Level switch and connect all other switches to it at Level 2 Server Host is recommended to connect to the Level 1 switch This is general if no VLAN or other special requirements are applied Case 1 All switch ports are in the same local ar
70. aware switches If Hybrid the default value is selected if the classified VLAN ID of a frame transmitted on the port is different from the Port VLAN ID a VLAN tag with the classified VLAN ID is inserted in the frame If Access is selected untag all frames transmitted on the port Traffic Class It is used to scroll to select the traffic class for the data stream priority The available value from 0 Low to 7 High If you want the voice has high priority then you can set the value with 7 Port Security It is used to scroll to enable or disable the Port Security function on the Port If you turn on the function then you need to set Port Security limit to allow how many device can access the port via MAC address Port Security Action It is used to scroll to select when the device wasn t allow to access then switch action as trap shutdown or trap amp shutdown Port Security Limit It is used to set the Port security limit the default is 1 Spanning Tree Admin It is used to scroll to enable or disable the Spanning Tree Edge Admin Edge function on the Easy Port Spanning Tree BPDU It is used to scroll to enable or disable the Spanning Tree Guard BPDU Guard function on the Easy Port Voice VLAN If you connect the IP Phone you need to assign the Voice VLAN ID The value of the port number has to be typed into the text box After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configur
71. be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 129 130 2 3 42 VLAN Ports Function name VLAN Ports Function description The function in VLAN Tag Rule Setting user can input VID number to each port The range of VID number is from 1 to 4094 User also can choose ingress filtering rules to each port There are two ingress filtering rules which can be applied to the switch The Ingress Filtering Rule 1 is forward only packets with VID matching this port s configured VID The Ingress Filtering Rule 2 is drop untagged frame You can also select the Role of each port as Access Trunk or Hybrid Auto Logout Off rview v ayy eyauen Static Trunk gt LACP gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base Y VLAN VLAN Membership Switch Status Port Status gt Private VLANs gt MAC based VLAN Parameters description Ethertype for Custom S ports 0x 8100 Normally Ethertype is 0x8100 or 0x88A8 VLAN Port Configuration Port Type Ingress Filtering Frame Type Egress Rule Unaware Access Unaware Access Unaware Access Unaware Access Unaware Access SS I Be Unaware Access U
72. boundary of an MSTI region It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information to Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops Transmit Hold Count The number of BPDU s a bridge port can send per second When exceeded transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU s per second Advanced Settings Edge Port BPDU Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will Filtering transmit and receive BPDUs VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Edge Port BPDU Guard Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU The port will enter the error disabled state and will be removed from the active topology Port Error Recovery Control whether a port in the error disabled state automatically will be enabled after a certain time If recovery is not enabled ports have to be disabled and re enabled for normal STP operation The condition is also cleared by a system reboot Port Error Recovery The time to pass before a port in the error disabled state can Timeout be enabled Valid values are between 30 and 86400 seconds 24 hours After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 6 Spanning Tree MSTI Mapping When you implement a Spanning Tree protocol on the switch that the bridge instance the CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it
73. characters of the address are multicast addresses and any node that listens to such an address will receive the traffic sent to that address Application software running on the source and destination systems cooperates to determine what multicast address to use Note that this is a function of the application software not of MLD When MLD snooping is enabled on a VLAN the switch acts to minimize unnecessary multicast traffic If the switch receives multicast traffic destined for a given multicast address it forwards that VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 93 traffic only to ports on the VLAN that have MLD hosts for that address It drops that traffic for ports on the VLAN that have no MLD hosts MLD snooping enabled Listener MLD host a g Switch Source NEL O O Listener MLD host Function name MLD Snooping General Setup Function description The function is used to configure the MLD Snooping basic configuration and the parameters Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of 1 uto Logou m MLD Snooping Configuration Overview aggregator Static Trunk gt LACP gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping a Global Configuration Snooping Enabled Unregistered IPMCv 6 Flooding Enabled ff3e i MLD Snooping SSI i MLD SSM Range VLAN General Setup Proxy Enabled Port Group Filtering Status Port Related Configuration Groups Informati
74. connections to VLANs This means that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets By default all ports are VLAN unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1 A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN but it can be a member of multiple Private VLANs Function name VLAN Private VLANs Private VLAN Membership Function description The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified here Private VLANs can be added or deleted here Port members of each Private VLAN can be added or removed here VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 135 Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base Y VLAN VLAN Membership Ports Switch Status Port Status Private VLANs Private VLAN Membership 7 Port Isolation gt MAC based VLAN gt Protocol based VLAN gt Voice VLAN gt GARP gt GVRP gt Qos Parameters description an o OPT TSS al p 5 Port Members 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 PVLAN ID os ie oie oe le i 1 M v v v v v e v v Delete Delete Check this box to delete the entry Private VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN Port Members A row of check boxes for each port
75. frame type you selected Value Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the preceding Frame Type selection menu Below is the criteria for three different Frame Types For Ethernet Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type is called etype Valid values for etype ranges from 0x0600 Oxffff For LLC Valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub values a DSAP 1 byte long string 0x00 0xff b SSAP 1 byte long string 0x00 Oxff For SNAP Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different sub values a OUI OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier is value in format of xx xx xx where each pair xx in string is a hexadecimal value ranges from 0x00 Oxff b PID If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000 the protocol ID is the Ethernet type EtherType field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP if the OUI is an OUI for a particular organization the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization to the protocol running on top of SNAP In other words if value of OUI field is 00 00 00 then value of PID will be etype 0x0600 Oxffff and if value of OUI is other than 00 00 00 then valid value of PID will be any value from 0x0000 to Oxffff Group Name A valid Group Name is a unique 16 character long string for every entry which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 Note special ch
76. frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port Transmit Error Counters Tx Drops The number of frames dropped due to output buffer VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide congestion Tx Late Exc Coll The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions 2 2 12 Port QoS Statistics The section describes that switch could display the QoS detailed Queuing counters for a specific switch port for the different queues for all switch ports The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Function name QoS Statistics Function description The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit the size counters for receive and transmit and the error counters for receive and transmit Dray Tek Overview Auto refresh Refresh Clear System Information NTP amp Time Configuration Account gt IP yPort General Setup Traffic Overview Detailed Statistics Cos statistics SFP Information EEE Loop Protection Trap Event Severity SNMP Syslog SMTP General Setup sFlow Agent Configuration Security Maintenance IS o 00 It I on e lo Ino Iho BR ken Ie es ko BKLEBI Parameter description POOSTDDOFDF FOB DOF BDO 00000000X PEOSBESPSBSCeeCoC oOo DOD DOD ooo OX ee 0000000 POESSSGGGGCFFCOODOODOODOoOoOS
77. ground the static electrical charge before you pick up the circuit device Pick up the device by holding it on the left and right edges only We warrant to the original end user purchaser that the device will be free from any defects in workmanship or materials for a period of one 1 year from the date of purchase from the dealer Please keep your purchase receipt in a safe place as it serves as proof of date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials we will at our discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor to whatever extent we deem necessary tore store the product to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal value and will be offered solely at our discretion This warranty will not apply if the product is modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions The warranty does not cover the bundled or licensed software of other vendors Defects which do not significantly affect the usability of the product will not be covered by the warranty We reserve the right to revise the manual and online documentation and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation to notify any person of such revision or chang
78. gt sFlow Agent z ys shite i Caneole Raudrate VigorSwitch P2261 20 Port 10 100 1000Base T 4 TP 100 1G SFP Combo 2 100 1G SFP PoE L2 Plus Managed Switch P2261 2011 01 01 02 12 30 Od 02 12 30 v1 00 v1 45 2012 09 17 v1 01 v1 01 033408000007 10 28 60 21 255 255 255 0 10 28 60 254 00 50 7f f0 c0 49 1415200 28 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 1 1 The Information of Page Layout On the top side it shows the front panel of the switch In the front panel the linked ports will display green as to the ports which are link off they will be dark For the optional modules the slot will show only a cover plate if no module exists and will show a module if a module is present The image of module depends on the one you inserted The same if disconnected the port will show just dark if linked green In this device there are clicking functions on the panel provided for the information of the ports These are very convenient functions for browsing the information of a single port When clicking the port on the front panel an information window for the port will be pop out Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 he a dence or a System Information Auto refresh System e Model Name VigorSwitch P2261 gt sedi System Description el ETA TP 100 1G SFP Combo 2 100 1G SFP Device Name Location CPU Load Contact NTP amp Time Configuration Device Name P2261 A
79. identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended network The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4 which has 32 bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol IPv6 which would have 128 bits Internet Protocol addresses This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet Function name IPv4 Function description The IPv4 address for the switch could be obtained via DHCP Server for VLAN 1 To manually configure an address you need to change the switch s default settings to values that are compatible with your network You may also need to establish a default gateway between the switch and management stations that exist on another network segment VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 37 Configure the switch managed IP information on this page The Configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration PTrETririerest tT CIERRA RILRA RA VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout of IP Configuration Overview Ea g Configured Current gt System Informati
80. is set to 0 It is the maximum UDP datagram size to send out the sFlow samples to the receiver The value accepted is within the range of 200 1500 bytes The default is 1400 bytes Datagram Size After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 2 31 sFlow Agent Sampler Function name sFlow Agent Sampler Function description The function is used to display the sFlow sampler what you set or you can edit it for your requirement That will help user based on a defined sampling rate an average of 1 out of N packets operations is randomly sampled This type of sampling does not provide a 100 accurate result but it does provide a result with quantifiable accuracy ei ae be SS A ee ee CLILAABARILA ES 2 ee F Auto Logout Of Overview Oro tvau Counter NTP amp Time Configuration i Sampling gt Account gt IP gt Port gt Loop Protection Trap Event Severity gt SNMP Y Syslog General Setup Log Detailed Log SMTP General Setup sFlow Agent Collector 3 Configuration sFlow Flow Sampling Instance Sampler Sampling Max Hdr Polling OOO0000000000 Parameters description sFlow Ports Display the port numbers on which sFlow is configured sFlow Instance Display the configured sFlow instance for the port number Flow Sampling 68 Packet flow sampling refers to arbitrarily choosing some
81. last numbers are displayed as text as well In order to display the SVG graph your browser must support the SVG format Consult the SVG Wiki for more information on browser support Specifically at the time of writing Microsoft Internet Explorer will need to have a plug in installed to support SVG Note CPU Load is using SVG Scalable Vector Graphics to display the chart and this feature is only available on MS IE 9 0 amp above or Firefox v4 0 amp above VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Function name NTP amp Time Configuration Function description 2 2 4 NTP amp Time Configuration This page configures the switch Time Time configure is including Time Configuration and NTP Configuration The switch provides manual and automatic ways to set the system time via NTP Manual setting is simple and you just input Year Month Day Hour Minute and Second within the valid value range indicated in each item Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout of Overview E gt System Information gt Account gt IP gt Port gt Loop Protection Trap Event Severity gt SNMP gt Syslog SMTP General Setup gt sFlow Agent Configuration Security Maintenance Parameter description Clock Source CIEL RRR RIC ee oe Time Configuration Use Local Settings Use NTP Server 2011 01 01 01 26 58 Clock Source Local Time YYYY MM DD HH MM
82. mac Delete static MAC address lt mac address gt MAC address format Oa 1b 2c 3d 4e 5f lt 1 4094 gt VLAN ID available value is from 1 to 4094 EXAMPLE Switch mac delete static mac 0a 1b 2c 3d 4e 5f 1 Flush out dynamic learned MAC address SYNTAX flush EXAMPLE Switch mac flush Switch mac Configure learning mode of switch ports SYNTAX learning lt port list gt lt auto gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 auto Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is receiveddisable Disable learning secure Only static MAC entries are learned all other frames EXAMPLE Switch mac learning 1 auto VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 307 show 308 Switch mac Configure LLDP MED fast start repeat count SYNTAX Show Parameter configuration Show MAC address table configuration mac table Show MAC address table static mac Show static MAC address EXAMPLE Switch mac show configuration Automatic Aging Enabled Aging Time 300 seconds Port Learning Mode 1 Auto 2 Auto 3 Auto 4 Auto 5 Auto 6 Auto 7 Auto 8 Auto 9A Auto 10A Auto 9B Auto 10B Auto Switch mac Switch mac show mac table Switch mac Switch mac show static mac Total static MAC address 0 Switch mac No Type MAC Address VID Ports 1 Static 00 01 c1 00 00 00 1 None CPU
83. maximum time to wait for a reply from a server EXAMPLE Switch aaa timeout 360 Switch aaa 248 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Access Commands of CLI add clear delete Add or modify access management entry SYNTAX add lt I 16 gt lt ipv4 ipv6 gt lt ip address gt lt ip address gt lt all gt lt snmp gt lt telnet gt lt web gt Parameter 1 16 Entry index ipv4 IPv4 format address ipv6 IPv6 format address lt ip address gt Start IP address lt ip address gt End IP address all All interface snmp SNMP interface telnet TELNET SSH interface web HTTP HTTPS interface EXAMPLE Switch access add 1 ipv4 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 241 all Switch access show config Access Management Mode Disabled W WEB HTTPS Switch access S SNMP T TELNET SSH Index Start IP Address End IP Address 1 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 241 Clear access management statistics SYNTAX Clear lt statistics gt Parameter Clear access management statistics EXAMPLE Switch access clear statistics Switch access Delete access management entry SYNTAX Delete lt J 6 gt Parameter 1 16 Entry index VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 249 mode EXAMPLE Switch access delete 1 Switch access show config Access Management Mode Disabled W WEB HTTPS S SNMP T TELNET SSH Index Start IP Address Switch access End IP Address Con
84. network policy is defined for use with an untagged VLAN see Tagged flag below then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance 6 Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive videO audio services 7 Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type 8 Video Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy Tag Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 In this case both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802 1Q VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide tagged frame format and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priori
85. not include a tag header as defined by TEEE 802 1Q 2003 Tagged The device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format VLAN ID VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID A value of 0 Priority Tagged is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 meaning that only the TEEE 802 1D priority level is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead Priority Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type One of the eight priority levels 0 through 7 DSCP DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 Contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button 117 118 2 3 32 LLDP EEE By using EEE power savings can be achieved at the expense of traffic latency This latency occurs due to that the circuits EEE turn off to save power need time to boot up before sending traffic over the link This time is called wakeup time To achieve minimal latency devices can use LLDP to exchange information about their
86. number Range 0 10 O unlimited EXAMPLE Switch mld throttling 1 0 Switch mld the per VLAN Unsolicited Report Interval SYNTAX uri lt vlan list gt lt 0 31744 gt VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 315 316 Parameter lt vlan list gt VLAN list available value is from 1 to 4094 format 1 3 5 lt 0 31744 gt Range 0 31744 sec Default 1 sec EXAMPLE Switch mld uri 1 1 Switch mld VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide MRP of CLI applicant To enable disable applicant administrative control join time leave all Syntax applicant lt port list gt lt disable enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt disable gt Disable applicant administrative control lt enable gt Enable applicant administrative control EXAMPLE Switch mrp applicant 3 5 enable Switch mrp To set the MRP join timer configuration Syntax join time lt port list gt lt time value gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt time value gt join time value available value is from 200 to 400 seconds EXAMPLE Switch mrp join time 3 5 200 Error Set join timer failed Switch mrp NOTE If you didn t set the MRP environment already then the switch will show Set join timer failed To set the MRP leave all timer configuration Syntax lea
87. of this device QoS Support Quality of Service by the IEEE 802 1P standard There are two priority queue and packet transmission schedule Spanning Tree Support IEEE 802 1D IEEE 802 1w RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol standards VLAN Support Port based VLAN and IEEE802 1Q Tag VLAN Support 256 active VLANs and VLAN ID 1 4094 Port Trunking Support static port trunking and port trunking with IEEE 802 3ad LACP Bandwidth Control Support ingress and egress per port bandwidth control Port Security Support allowed denied forwarding and port security with MAC address SNMP RMON SNMP agent and RMON MIB In the device SNMP agent is a client software which is operating over SNMP protocol used to receive the command from SNMP manager server site and echo the corresponded data i e MIB object Besides SNMP agent will actively issue TRAP information when happened RMON is the abbreviation of Remote Network Monitoring and is a branch of the SNMP MIB The device supports MIB 2 RFC 1213 Bridge MIB RFC 1493 RMON MIB RFC 1757 statistics Group 1 2 3 9 Ethernet like MIB RFC 1643 Ethernet MIB RFC 1643 and so on IGMP Snooping Support IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 The function IGMP snooping is used to establish the multicast groups to forward the multicast packet to the member ports and in nature avoid wasting the bandwidth while IP multicast packets are running over the network IGMP Proxy The implementation
88. on to the Internet It can configure NAS setting of IEEE 802 1X MAC based authentication system and port settings The NAS configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of 5 Network Access Server Configuration Refresh Overview g System Alf System Configuration Configuration Mode Disabled v gt ACL Reauthentication Enabled Oo gt IP Source Guard Reauthentication Period seconds PARP Inspection EAPOL Timeout 30 seconds gt DHCP Snooping Aaa PERGI e i gt DHCP Relay 4 ging Perio seconds Y NAS Hold Time 10 seconds RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled Switch Status RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled O oa Guest VLAN Enabled PASA Gi VLAN ID gt Port Security u pes gt Access Management Max Reauth Count SSH Allaw Gueet VI AN if FAPOI Seen e4 vi lt gt eee Parameters description System Configuration Mode Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switchstack If it is disabled all ports are allowed forwarding of frames Reauthentication Enabled If checked successfully authenticated supplicants clients VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 193 194 are reauthenticated after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1X enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached
89. p p2p lt port list gt lt auto disable enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt auto gt Automatic MSTP point to point detection lt disable gt Disable MSTP point to point lt enable gt Enable MSTP point to point EXAMPLE VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 323 Switch mstp p p2p 3 5 auto Switch mstp p priority To set the STP port instance priority Syntax p priority lt 0 7 gt lt port list gt lt 0 240 gt Parameter lt 0 7 gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt 0 240 gt STP bridge priority 0 16 32 48 224 240 EXAMPLE Switch mstp p priority 0 3 5 240 Switch mstp Priority To set the bridge instance priority Syntax priority lt 0 7 gt lt 0 240 gt Parameter lt 0 7 gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt 0 240 gt STP bridge priority 0 16 32 48 224 240 EXAMPLE Switch mstp priority 0 240 Switch mstp r role To set the MSTP restricted Role port parameter r tcn 324 Syntax r role lt port list gt lt disable enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt disable gt Disable MSTP restricted role lt enable gt Enable MSTP restricted role EXAMPLE Switch mstp r role 3 5 enable Switch mstp
90. received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Logging Indicates the logging operation of the ACE Possible values are Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Shutdown Indicates the port shut down operation of the ACE Possible values are Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame VLAN Parameters 802 1Q Tagged 178 Specify whether frames can hit the action according to the 802 1Q tagged The allowed values are Any Any value is allowed don t care Enabled Tagged frame only Disabled Untagged frame only The default value is Any VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide VLAN ID Filter Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE Any No VLAN ID filter is specified VLAN ID filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a VLAN ID number appears Tag Priority Specify the tag priority for this ACE A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority The allowed number range is 0 to 7 The value Any means that no tag p
91. significantly longer Address Provide the IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Prefix Provide the IPv6 Prefix of this switch The allowed range is 1 to 128 Gateway Provide the IPv6 gateway address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 39 up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration 2 2 9 Port General Setup Port configuration is applied to change the setting of each port In this configuration function you can set reset the following functions All of them are described in detail below Function name General Setup Function descriptio
92. switch supported maximum frame size 2 2 2 System Information Device Name Function name Device Name Function description You can identify the system by configuring the contact information name and location of the switch Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview System Information System gt System Information Device Name CPU Load NTP amp Time Configuration gt Account gt IP gt Port gt Loop Protection Trap Event Severity gt SNMP gt Syslog General Setup Log Detailed Log SMTP General Setup gt sFlow Agent Auto refresh Refresh Model Name VigorSwitch P2261 System Description SR senha 5 TP 100 1G SFP Combo 2 100 1G SFP Location Contact Device Name P2261 System Date 2011 01 01 02 12 30 System Uptime 0d 02 12 30 BIOS Version v1 00 Firmware Version v1 45 2012 09 17 eying AO Series Code 033A08000007 Host IP Address 10 28 60 21 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP Address 10 28 60 254 Host MAC Address 00 50 7f f0 c0 49 Cancale Raudrate 414900 S Parameter description System Contact VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to 31 contact this person The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 System Name An administratively assi
93. syslog01 Switch syslog show config Mode Enabled Address syslog01 Level Debug Switch syslog Show To show syslog i Syntax nformation show lt config detail log log gt Parameter lt config gt Sho w syslog configuration lt detail log gt Show detailed syslog information lt log gt Show s EXAMPLE yslog entry Mode Address Level Switch sys lt log id gt Switch sys Switch sys Switch syslog show config Enabled syslog01 Debug log show detail log Log ID log show detail log 3 log VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide SYSTEM of CLI contact Description 362 To configure the system contact information Syntax contact lt system contact information gt Parameter lt system contact information gt Up to 255 characters describing system contact information EXAMPLE Switch system contact administrator Switch system show Model Name PSGS 23147 System Description 10 Port 10 100 1000Base T 4 100 1G SFP PoE L 2 Plus Managed Switch Location Contact administrator Device Name PSGS 23140 System Uptime s ORF30819 Current Time gt 2011 08 03 16 39 20 BIOS Version v1 00 Firmware Version v0 87 Hardware Mechanical Version vl 00 v1 00 Series Number TIM0123456789 Host IP Address v eee Des LsL Subnet Mask Z 29929929940 Gateway IP Address E O06100 Host MAC Address 00 01 c1 00 00 00 Console Baudrat
94. the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button Clear The simple counts will be reset to zero when user use mouse VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide to click on Clear button 103 104 2 3 28 LLDP LLDP General Setup The switch supports the LLDP For current information on your switch model The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP provides a standards based method for enabling switches to advertise themselves to adjacent devices and to learn about adjacent LLDP devices The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is a vendor neutral Link Layer protocol in the Internet Protocol Suite used by network devices for advertising their identity capabilities and neighbors on a IEEE 802 local area network principally wired Ethernet The protocol is formally referred to by the IEEE as Station and Media Access Control Connectivity Discovery specified in standards document IEEE 802 1AB Function name LLDP LLDP General Setup Function description The function is used to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of rview v Ayy eyauorn Static Trunk gt LACP gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping gt MVR Y LLDP LLDP Neighbours LLDP MED General Setup LLDP MED Neighbours EEE Pot Statistics gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN
95. the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 Password again Type the new password again to confirm the setting Privilege Level The privilege level of the user The allowed range is 1 to 15 If the privilege level value is 15 it can access all groups i e that is granted the fully control of the device But others value need to refer to each group privilege level User s privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the access of that group By default setting most groups privilege level 5 has the read only access and privilege level 10 has the read write access And the system maintenance software upload factory defaults and etc need user privilege level 15 Generally the privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account Note You can add more user name up to 19 set in Users configuration You can configure 20 set of user name totally including admin account After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration 2 2 6 Account Privilege Level Function name Privilege Level Function description This page provides an overview of the privilege levels The switch provides user set Account Aggregation Diagnostics EEE GARP GVRP IP IPMC Snooping LACP LLDP LLDP MED MAC Table MRP MVR MVRP Maintenance Mirroring POE Ports Private VLANs QoS SMTP SNMP Security
96. the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports After determining the lowest cost spanning tree it enables all root ports and designated ports and disables all other ports Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports eliminating any possible network loops Designated Root T X I Designated i f Designated Port X Bridge Root Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the Root Bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Maximum Age the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology Function name Spanning Tree Bridge Settings Function description The function is used to configure the Spanning Tree Bridge and STP System settings It allows you to configure STP System settings are used by all STP Bridge instance in the Switch Stack VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 75 76 DrayTek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off
97. time To set the GARP join timer configuration leave all leave time VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Syntax join time lt port list gt lt time value gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt time value gt join time value available value is from 200 to 400 seconds EXAMPLE Switch garp join time 3 5 200 Error Set jointimer failed NOTE If you didn t set the GARP environment already then the switch will show Set jointimer failed To set the GARP leave all timer configuration Syntax leave all lt port list gt lt timer value gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt timer value gt leave all time value available value is from 10000 to 100000 seconds EXAMPLE Switch garp leave all 3 5 10000 Error Set leavealltimer failed Switch garp NOTE If you didn t set the GARP environment already then the switch will show Set leavealltimer failed To set the GARP leave timer configurationv Syntax leave time lt port list gt lt timer value gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 273 lt timer value gt leave time value available value is from 600 to 1000 seconds EXAMPLE Switch garp leave time 3 5 600 Error Set leavetimer failed Switch garp NOTE If you didn t set the GARP env
98. to be defined with a maximum of 254 248 2 hosts per network Bit O12 3 23 24 31 op Network address Hest address Class D and E Class D is a class with first 4 MSB Most significance bit set to 1 1 1 0 and is used for IP Multicast See also RFC 1112 Class E is a class with first 4 MSB set to 1 1 1 1 and is used for IP broadcast According to IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority there are three specific IP address blocks reserved and able to be used for extending internal network We call it Private IP address and list below Class A 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 Class B 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 Class C 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 Please refer to RFC 1597 and RFC 1466 for more information Subnet mask It means the sub division of a class based network or a CIDR block The subnet is used to determine how to split an IP address to the network prefix and the host address in bitwise basis It is designed to utilize IP address more efficiently and ease to manage IP network For a class B network 128 1 2 3 it may have a subnet mask 255 255 0 0 in default in which the first two bytes is with all 1s This means more than 60 thousands of nodes in flat IP address will be at the same network It s too large to manage practically Now if we divide it into smaller network by extending network prefix from 16 bits to say 24 bits that s using its third byte to subnet this class B network Now it has a subnet mask 255 255 255
99. to click on Refresh button After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 4 17 NAS Port Status Function name NAS Port Status Function description The function is used to provide detailed NAS statistics for a specific switch port running EAPOL based IEEE 802 1X authentication Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of om at NAS Statistics Port1 Pot1 Auto refresh O System Port State Configuration Admin State Force Authorized gt ACL Port State Globally Disabled gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay Y NAS General Setup Switch Status gt AAA gt Port Security gt Access Management SSH nerna Parameters description Port State Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 205 2 4 18 AAA General Setup Function name AAA General Setup Function description The function uses an AAA Authentication Authorizatio
100. type there mainly are LC and BIDI LC gt Gigabit Fiber with multi mode LC SFP module gt Gigabit Fiber with single mode LC SFP module gt Gigabit Fiber with BiDi LC 1310nm SFP module gt Gigabit Fiber with BiDi LC 1550nm SFP module The following table lists the types of fiber that we support and those else not listed here are available upon request IMulti mode Fiber Cable and Modal Bandwidth IEEE 802 3z Multi mode 62 5 125um Multi mode 50 125um Gigabit Ethernet odal Bandwidth Distance odal Bandwidth Distance 1000SX 850mm H6OMEZ Kmn 220m hOOMHz Km 500m 0OMHz Km 00OMHz Km 550m Single mode Fiber 9 125um 1000Base LX LH X XD ZX Single mode transceiver 1310nm 10Km Single mode transceiver 1550nm 30 50Km TX Transmit 1310nm IRX Receive 1550nm TX Transmit 1550nm IRX Receive 1310nm 1000Base LX Single Mode 20Km Single Fiber BIDI LC Single Mode 20Km Switch Cascading in Topology Takes the Delay Time into Account Theoretically the switch partitions the collision domain for each port in switch cascading that you may up link the switches unlimitedly In practice the network extension cascading levels amp overall diameter must follow the constraint of the IEEE 802 3 802 3u 802 3z and other 802 1 series VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide protocol specifications in which the limitations are the timing requirement from physical signals defined by 802 3 series specification of Media Access Control MAC and PHY
101. will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped Due to the reason that you need to set the list of VLANs mapped to the MSTI the VLANs must be separated with comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI An unused MSTI should just be left empty i e not having any VLANs mapped to it Function name Spanning Tree MSTI Mapping Function description The function is used to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well DrayTek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto L tor s E MSTI Configuration System Ai Add VLANs separated by spaces or comma Unmapped VLANs are mapped to the CIST The default bridge instance Y Aggregation gt LACP v Spanning Tree Bridge Settings MSTI Priorities Configuration Name 00 50 7f f0 c0 49 Configuration Revision 0 MSTI Ports Bridge Status MST VLANs Mapped Port Status msTi1 Port Statistics gt IGMP Snooping 4 MSTI2 S gt MLD Snooping gt aan vis ul gt Parameters description Configuration Identification VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 77 Configuration Name The name identifying the VLAN to MSTI mapping Bridges must share the name and revision see below as well as the VLAN to MSTI mapping configuration in order to share spanning trees for MSTT s Intra region The name is at most 32 characters Configuration Revision The revision of the MSTI
102. zero when user use mouse to click on Clear button Remove All Clean up all ACL configurations on the table 176 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Click the button to add a new ACL or use the other ACL modification buttons to specify the editing action i e edit delete or moving the relative position of entry in the list e e err i a old VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off E Overview e System e Configuration ACE Configuration Action Permit Tank Ji Ingress Port Port 2 Rate Limiter Disabled w Pot3 Disabled Ex Vv ACL Pot4 w Pot1 amp Ports Port Redirect Port 2 Rate Limiters Port 3 Policy Filter any g Erme Type er ACL Status Mirror Disabled gt IP Source Guard Logging Disabled gt ARP Inspection Shutdown Disabled DHCP Snooping Counter 0 gt DHCP Relay gt NAS gt AAA gt Port Security VLAN Parameters gt Access Management a 802 10 Taaaed Anv v Parameters description ACE Configuration Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any ingress port Policy The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port Policy Filter Specify the policy number filter for this ACE Any No policy filter is specified policy filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific poli
103. 0 Rx Packets Dropped 0 State Disabled Round Trip Time 0 ms Server 1 0 0 0 0 1813 RADIUS Accounting Statistics Rx Responses 0 Tx Requests 0 Rx Malformed Responses 0 Tx Retransmissions 0 Rx Bad Authenticators 0 Tx Pending Requests 0 Rx Unknown Types 0 Tx Timeouts 0 Rx Packets Dropped 0 State Disabled VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 247 Round Trip Time 0 ms Switch aaa tacacs To configure the TACACS authentication server detail parameter Syntax tacacs lt index gt lt enable disable gt lt ip hostname gt lt 0 65535 gt lt Line gt Parameter lt index gt The TACACS authentication Server index The available value is from 1 to 5 lt disable enable gt To enable or disable the TACACS authentication service lt ip hostname gt The TACACS authentication server IP address or hostname lt 0 65535 gt The TACACS authentication server UDP port If the port is set to 0 zero then the default port 1813 is used lt LINE gt Secret shared with external accounting server The Available value is up to 29 characters long EXAMPLE Switch aaa tacas 1 enable 192 168 2 22 0 tacacs Server disconnect NOTE If you didn t connect the TACACS Server already then the switch will show Server disconnect timeout To configure server response timeout Syntax timeout lt 3 3600 gt Parameter lt 3 3600 gt The Timeout which can be set to a number between 3 and 3600 seconds is the
104. 0 0 9B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Switch lldp Switch lldp VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 295 LLDP MED of CLI civic To configure LLDP MED civic address location Syntax civic additional code lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic additional code 205 Switch lldpmed Syntax civic additional info lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic additional info test Switch lldpmed Syntax civic apartment lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic apartment 005 Switch lldpmed Syntax civic block lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic block block2 Switch lldpmed Syntax civic building lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE 296 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Switch lldpmed civic building Manufacture Switch lldpmed Syntax civic city lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic city Taipei Switch lldpmed Syntax civic comm name lt LINE gt Parameter l
105. 0 7 CIST 0 MSTH 1 EXAMPLE Switch mstp show status 0 CIST Bridge STP Status Bridge ID FO 00 00 01 C1 00 00 00 Root ID FO 00 00 01 C1 00 00 00 Root Port eS Root PathCost 0 Regional Root F0 00 00 01 C1 00 00 00 Int PathCost 0 Switch mstp Syntax show lt nstance gt Parameter lt Instance gt To show the instance status EXAMPLE Max Hops 20 TC Flag Steady TC Count mo TC Last sO Port Port Role State Pri PathCost Edge P2P Uptime Switch mstp show instance STP Configuration Protocol Version MSTP ax Age gt 20 Forward Delay BTS Tx Hold Count 46 ax Hop Count 20 BPDU Filtering Disabled BPDU Guard Disabled Error Recovery 4000 seconds Error Recovery Disabled Switch mstp Syntax show lt msti vlan gt Parameter lt msti vlan gt To show the MSTP MSTI VLAN mapping configuration EXAMPLE Switch mstp show msti vlan MSTI VLANs mapped to MSTI MSTI1 No VLANs mapped VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide MSTI2 No VLANs mapped MSTI3 No VLANs mapped MSTI4 No VLANs mapped MSTI5 No VLANs mapped MSTI6 No VLANs mapped MSTI7 No VLANs mapped Switch mstp Switch mstp Syntax show lt p config gt lt 0 7 gt Parameter lt p config gt To show the STP port instance configuration lt 0 7 gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTII 1 EXAMPLE Switch mstp show p config 0 MST Port
106. 1 gt Save Restore Date 2012 08 16T17 44 21 08 00 gt Export Import gt Diagnostics l Activate Alternate Image Cancel Parameters description Image The flash index name of the firmware image The name of primary preferred image is image the alternate image is named image bk Version The version of the firmware image Date The date where the firmware was produced Activate Alternate Image Click to use the alternate image This button may be disabled depending on system state Note In case the active firmware image is the alternate image only the Active Image table is shown In this case the Activate Alternate Image button is also disabled If the alternate image is active due to a corruption of the primary image or by manual intervention uploading a new firmware image to the device will automatically use the primary image slot and activate this The firmware version and date information may be empty for older firmware releases This does not constitute an error VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 225 226 2 5 4 Save Restore Factory Defaults Function name Save Restore Factory Defaults Function description The function is used to save and restore the Switch configuration including reset to Factory Defaults Save Start Save Users Restore Users for any maintenance needs Any configuration files or scripts will recover to factory default values Dray Tek
107. 107 108 The function is used to configure the LLDP MED This function applies to VoIP devices which support LLDP MED VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off Overview Static Trunk gt LACP gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping Coordinates Location gt MLD Snooping T gt MVR Latitude o Noth Longitude bo o Y LLDP degrees degrees LLDP General Setup LLDP Neighbours LLDP MED Neighbours EEE Port Statistics gt PoE Trailing stree gt Filtering Data Base x a Lo suffix wa diractinn gt VLAN i gt LLDPMED Configuration Fast Start Repeat Count Fast start repeat count 4 Civic Address Location State County City Block district O ij Neighbourhe F Leading Street street Parameters description Fast start repeat count Fast start repeat count Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a critically important aspect of VoIP systems in general In addition it is best to advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to particular endpoint types for example only advertise the voice network policy to permitted voice capable devices both in order to conserve the limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy With this in mind LLDP MED defines an LLDP MED Fast Start interaction between the protoco
108. 122 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide PoE Status Function description This page allows the user to inspect the current status for all PoE ports The section show all port Power Over Ethernet Status Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off Overview Static Trunk gt LACP gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP Y PoE General Setup Power Delay Auto Checking Schedule Filtering Data Base General Setup Dynamic MAC Table Parameters description Local Port Power Over Ethernet Status Auto refresh Port _ Status No PD detected No PD detected No PD detected No PD detected No PD detected No PD detected No PD detected No PD PD class Power Current Allocated Used Used om ow 0 ow ow 0 Power Power Requested ow ow Local Port Priority 1 0 mA Low 2 0 mA 3 0 mA 0 w 0 w 0 0 w ow 0w ow ow w mA w mA 0 w ow mAl mA 0 w 0 w mA ow ow detected Na PN This is the logical port number for this row PD Class To display the PD Power class that identify with a specified current The classification current describes the amount of power the PD will require during normal operation Power Requested The Power Requested shows the requested amount of power the PD wants to be reserved Power Allocated
109. 128 Polling Interval 0 mery This is the port number on which sFlow can be configured sFlow Instance Multiple instances of sFlow can be supported on the port Currently we support one sFlow instance on each port due to hardware limitation Sampler Type Sampler type on the port can be one of the following types None RX TX ALL If type is none then the sampling rate is 0 and no other value is accepted The default value is none Sampling Rate Determines the rate at which samples must be taken on the VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide ports If sampling rate is configured as N 1 N frames is sampled The sampling rate ranges from 0 to 4095 Default value is 0 meaning sampling is disabled on the 69 port If receiver time_out is Osec this sFlow configuration is disabled operationally To make it operational the receiver time_out has to remain alive When operational the sample rate N is rounded off to the nearest possible value Max Hdr Size Configures the size of the header of the sampled frame to be copied to the Queue for further processing The Max header size ranges from 14 to 200 bytes Default is 128 bytes Polling Interval Configures the polling interval for the counter sampling It decides at what regular intervals the counter should be polled for statistics The accepted value for Counter Polling Interval ranges from 0 to 3600 seconds Default is 0 seconds which means po
110. 2261 User s Guide 29 2 2 System 2 2 1 System Information Information Function name System Information Function description Show the basic system information DrayTek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview System gt System Information nformation Device Name CPU Load NTP amp Time Configuration gt Account gt IP gt Port gt Loop Protection Trap Event Severity gt SNMP gt Syslog General Setup Log Detailed Log SMTP General Setup gt sFlow Agent Parameter description Model name System Information Auto refresh Refresh Firmware Version Hardware Mechanical Version Series Code Host IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Host MAC Address Caneole Randrata Model Name VigorSwitch P2261 System Description PE E TP 100 1G SFP Combo 2 100 1G SFP Location Contact Device Name P2261 System Date 2011 01 01 02 12 30 System Uptime Od 02 12 30 BIOS Version v1 00 v1 45 2012 09 17 v1 01 v1 01 033A08000007 10 28 60 21 255 255 255 0 10 28 60 254 00 50 7f 0 c0 49 14490N The model name of this device System description Display what the device s description Location Set the location of the switch where it was located Contact For easily managing and maintaining device you may write down the contact person and phone here for getting help soon You can configure this parameter through
111. 261 User s Guide 27 Dray Tek Username admin VigorSwitch G2260 Password eeeee 2 1 Web Management Home Overview After you login the switch shows you the system information as below This page is default and tells you the basic information of the system including Model Name System Description Location Contact Device Name Version Firmware Version Address Host MAC Address Device 99 66 System Up Time Current Time BIOS Hardware Mechanical Version Serial Number Host IP Port RAM Size Flash Size and CPU Load With this information you will know the software version used MAC address serial number how many ports good and so on This is helpful while malfunctioning In the following figure left section is the whole function tree with web user interface and we will travel it through this chapter Auto refresh O VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of J n System Information Overview System s Model Name gt System Information System Description Device Name Location CPU Load Contact NTP amp Time Configuration Device Name gt Account System Date gt IP 3 System Uptime rece f BIOS Version gt Loop Prptaction Firmware Version Map Eye SSWONIY Hardware Mechanical gt SNMP Version Syslog Series Code Spp Host IP Address a Subnet Mask SMTP General Setup
112. 3 lt guest voice signaling gt Guest Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media lt softphone voice gt Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN lt streaming video gt Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type lt video conferencing gt Video Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media lt video signaling gt Video Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media lt voice gt Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications lt voice signaling gt Voice Signaling conditi
113. 7 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 376 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 8 5i All Disabled Hybric UnAware 9 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 10 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware Switch vlan ingress filtering To configure ingress filtering of switch ports Syntax ingress filtering lt port list gt lt disable enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt disable gt Disable ingress filtering lt enable gt Enable ingress filtering If ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded EXAMPLE Switch vlan ingress filtering 3 5 enable Switch vlan show port config TPID for Custom S port 0x88a8 Port PVID Frame Type Ingress Filter Egress Rule Port Type 1 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 2 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 3 3 Untagged Enabled Access UnAware 4 3 Untagged Enabled Access UnAware 5 3 Untagged Enabled Access UnAware 6 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 7 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 8 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 9 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 10 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware Switch vlan port type To configure port type of switch ports Syntax port type lt port list gt lt c port s custom port s port unaware gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt c port gt To set the port as the customer port type lt s custom port gt To set the port as th
114. 802 1X e Multi 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor VLANs VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration Guest VLAN Operation When a Guest VLAN enabled port s link comes up the switch starts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max Reauth Count and no EAPOL frames have been received In the meanwhile the switch considers entering the Guest VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide VLAN The interval between the transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN If disabled the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port s Admin State is changed and if not the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout Once in the Guest VLAN the port is considered authenticated and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN While in the Guest VLAN the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames and if
115. 92 Function name DHCP Relay Statistics Function description 2 4 14 DHCP Relay Statistics The function is used to show the DHCP Relay Statistics information of the switch The statistics show both of Server and Client packet counters when DHCP Relay mode is enabled Auto Logout Of Overview System Configuration gt ACL gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt DHCP Snooping Y DHCP Relay General Setup gt NAS gt AAA gt Port Security Access Management SSH HTTPS Aisha Anadia nt Parameters description Server Statistics DHCP Relay Statistics Auto refresh Server Statistics Transmit _ Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive ra Transmit from Missing Missing Missing Bad Bad Error Agent Circuit Remote Circuit Remote Option Client Statistics Receive Receive Replace Keep Drop from Agent Agent Agent Agent Client Option Option Option Option Transmit Transmit to Client Error 0 0 0 Transmit to Server The number of packets that are relayed from client to server Transmit Error The number of packets that resulted in errors while being sent to clients Receive from Server The number of packets received from server Receive Missing Agent Option The number of packets received without agent information options Receive Missing Circuit ID Receive Missing Circuit
116. AMPLE VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 299 300 Switch lldpmed civic street Nan Kang Road Switch lldpmed Syntax civic street suffix lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic street suffix 3 Switch lldpmed Syntax civic trailing street suffix lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic trailing street suffix 2 Switch lldpmed Syntax civic zip code lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic zip_code 236 Switch lldpmed show config Fast Start Repeast Count 4 Location Coordinates Latitude 0 0000 North Longitude 0 0000 East Altitude 4 0000 floor Map datum WGS84 Civic Address Location Country code tw National subdivison Taipei County Cay Taipei City Listrict EL Block Neighborhood x Black2 Street Nan Kang Road Street Dir north Trailling Street a4 Street Suffix e055 Placetype meetingroom Postal Community Name LLDP MEDO1 P O Box 2 22 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Addination Code 205 Emergency Call Service Switch lldpmed coordinate To configure LLDP MED coordinate location Syntax coordinate altitude lt coordinate value gt lt floor meter gt Parameter l
117. But if reauthentication is not enabled the only way to free resources is by aging the entries For ports in MAC based Auth mode reauthentication doesn t cause direct communication between the switch and the client so this will not detect whether the client is still attached or not and the only way to free any resources is to age the entry Hold Time This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1 e MAC Based Auth VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide If a client is denied access either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or because the RADIUS server request times out according to the timeout specified on the Configuration gt Security AAA page the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state The hold timer does not count during an on going authentication In MAC based Auth mode the switch will ignore new frames coming from the client during the hold time The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled RADIUS assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to which traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled below for a detailed descrip
118. Cing En asa aa aA a E a aaa A a T AE A AE 152 2 3 58 QOS Port Scheduler isena n e E aE a a E a a a 153 2 3 59 QOS Port Shapin gusien n a a anina a aade AE a a aariaa NATRA ENDE 154 2 3 60 QoS Tag Remarking ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeneeseaeeesaaeeeseneeseeeesaeeteaaeeeenees 155 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 3 61 QOS DSCP ist ceciste ahs Gis aden a eigen i a died eae 156 2 3 62 QOS DSCP BasSed QOS 0 0 ceescccecceceeeeeeaeeeeneeeceaeeeeaaesneeceaeeeeaaesseaaesneeeeseaeseeeaaeesenees 157 2 3 63 QOS DSCP Translation ccccecccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeseaaeseeeeeesaeeeeaeeeenees 158 2 3 64 QoS DSCP Classification ecccccccceeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeseeeeseeeesaeeseaeeeenes 159 2 3 65 QOS QOS Control LiSt 00 eeeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeceeeee cae eeeaaeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeeseeeesaeeeeaeeeenees 160 2 38 00 Q0S QOS Status sisi en idee Neh acetarcwanieg aa a A i 164 2 3 67 QOS Storm CONTO isnie anao aa a a a a A aa a i 165 2 3 68 Single IP General Setup ccecececeseceeseceeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeneeceeeeeeaaaesseneeseaeeesaeseenaeesnees 166 2 3 69 Single IP Information s sssseessesesessseeseesseessessessnnsrnntsnnstnnstnnsnnnsnnnsnnnstnnttnnntnnntnnnnt 167 Za VEIS POr as ce shies yout E A ssasdeosdaussuvieneieteas eiaestaed 168 PARTE TO TA E EEIE E EE E S E A E E E EEE 170 R TE AI A E EEA E A A A A E A A EET 171 ZA SECY araa a a e aaa ee
119. D h o n DNS Server 0 00 0 8 8 8 8 IPv6 7 gt Port IP DNS Proxy Configuration gt Loop Protection Thermal Protection DNS Proxy Trap Event Severity gt SNMP Apply gt Syslog SMTP General Setup gt sFlow Agent Configuration First IP Address as shown above enter 192 168 1 226 for instance For sure an IP address such as 192 168 1 x must be set on your PC Second Subnet Mask as shown above enter 255 255 255 0 Any subnet mask such as 255 255 255 x is allowable in this case DNS The Domain Name Server translates human readable machine name to IP address Every machine on the Internet has a unique IP address A server generally has a static IP address To connect to a server the client needs to know the IP of the server However user generally uses the name to connect to the server Thus the switch DNS client program such as a browser will ask the DNS to resolve the IP address of the named server VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 1 6 Typical Applications The 24 2 port Gigabit L2 Managed Switch supported comprehensive fiber types of connection including LC BiDi LC for SFP For more details on the specification of the switch please refer to Appendix A The switch is suitable for the following applications gt Central Site Remote site application is used in carrier or ISP ik E iz Copper Twisted pair Fiber Optic mm orsm fiber Fiber Optic Fiber Optic M
120. Down Trap Event Severity 12 Shutdown Enabled 0 Down gt SNMP E 13 Shutdown Enabled 0 Down gt Syslog 14 Shutdown Enabled 0 Down SMTP General Setup 15 Shutdown Enabled 0 Down a ou 16 Shutdown Enabled 0 Down v Parameter description Port Display the port number The number is 26 Action Display the currently configured port action Transmit Display the currently configured port transmit mode Loops Display the number of loops detected on this port VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 49 Status Display the current loop protection status of the port Loop Display Whether a loop is currently detected on the port Time of Last Loop Display the time of the last loop event detected Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button 2 2 17 Trap Event Severity Function name Trap Event Severity Function description The function is used to set a Alarm trap and get the Event log The Trap Events Configuration function is used to enable the switch to send out the trap information while pre defined trap events occurred Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of A Trap Event Severity Configuration Overview P Yy g S Group Name Severity Level gt System Information AC
121. E Switch mvrp show config MVRP global mode Enabled Port Mode Restricted Role il Diabled Diabled 2 Diabled Diabled 3 Enabled Enabled 4 Enabled Enabled 5 Enabled Enabled 6 Diabled Diabled 7 Diabled Diabled 8 Diabled Diabled 9 Diabled Diabled 10 Diabled Diabled Switch mvrp Syntax show lt statistics gt lt port list gt Parameter lt statistics gt To display Show the basic MVRP port statistics lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 EXAMPLE Switch mvrp show statistics 3 5 Port Joins Tx Count Leaves Tx Count 3 0 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 Switch mvrp VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 333 Port Commands of CLI clear description Clear port counter SYNTAX Clear Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 EXAMPLE Switch port clear 1 Switch port Interface specific description SYNTAX Description lt port list gt lt LINE gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 lt LINE gt Up to 47 characters describing this interface EXAMPLE Switch port description 1 POE port Switch port excessive collision Configure excessive collision operation flow control 334 SYNTAX excessive collision lt port list gt Discard Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 Discard Discard th
122. Enable When Port No is chosen and enable port s Loop detection the port can detect loop happens When Port No is chosen enable port s Loop detection and the port detects loop happen port will be locked If Loop did not happen port maintains Unlocked Action Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port Valid values are Shutdown Port Shutdown Port and Log or Log Only Tx Mode Controls whether the port is actively generating loop protection PDU s or whether it is just passively looking for looped PDU s After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration 2 2 16 Loop Protection Status Function name General Status Function description Display the status for the switch which opens Loop protection Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 l of w sie i a Loop Protection Status Auto refresh Refresh 1 Port Action Transmit Loops Status Loop Time of Last Loop gt System Information 1 Shutdown Enabled 0 Up Information 2 Shutdown Enabled 0 Down Device Name 3 Shutdown Enabled 0 Down CPU Load 4 Shutdown Enabled 0 Down NTP amp Time Configuration 5 Shutdown Enabled 0 Down gt Account E 6 Shutdown Enabled 0 Down gt IP 7 7 Shutdown Enabled 0 Down gt Port 8 Shutdown Enabled 0 Down Y Loop Protection 9 Shutdown Enabled 0 Down General Setup 10 Shutdown Enabled 0 Down 11 Shutdown Enabled 0
123. Function description Display whether switch opens Loop protection Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off Overview gt System Information Information Device Name CPU Load NTP amp Time Configuration gt Account gt IP gt Port Y Loop Protection Status Trap Event Severity gt SNMP gt Syslog SMTP General Setup me Plas man Parameter description Global Configuration Loop Protection Configuration img Clobal Configuration Enable Loop Protection Disable seconds Transmission Time 5 Shutdown Time 180 seconds ig Port Configuration Port Enable Action Shutdown Port x Enable Shutdown Port Enable Shutdown Port Fable Enable Loop Protection Choose Enable to activate this function The default setting is Disable Transmission Time The interval between each loop protection PDU sent on each port Valid values are 1 to 10 seconds Shutdown Time 48 The period in seconds for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a loop is detected and the port action shuts down the port Valid values are 0 to 604800 seconds 7 days A value of zero will keep a port disabled VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide until next device restart Port Configuration Port Display the port number The number is 26
124. I Clear To clear the basic MVRP port statistics Control Mode Rrole 332 Syntax clear lt port list gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 EXAMPLE Switch mvrp clear 3 5 Switch mvrp To enable or disable the MVRP function globally Syntax control lt disable enable gt Parameter lt disable gt Disable the MVRP globally lt enable gt Enable the MVRP globally EXAMPLE Switch mvrp control enable Switch mvrp To enable or disable MVRP function on port Syntax mode lt port list gt lt disable enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt disable gt Disable the MVRP on port lt enable gt Enable the MVRP on port EXAMPLE Switch mvrp mode 3 5 enable Switch mvrp To enable or disable the MVRP restricted role on port Syntax mode lt port list gt lt disable enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide lt disable gt Disable the MVRP restricted role on port lt enable gt Enable the MVRP restricted role on port EXAMPLE Switch mvrp rrole 3 5 enable Switch mvrp Show To show the MVRP information and configuration Syntax mode lt config gt Parameter lt config gt To display the MVRP configuration EXAMPL
125. ID Auto refresh System Log Information The total number of entries is 6 for the given level Refresh Clear Start from ID 1 with 20 entries per page lt lt J lt lt jl gt gt J gt gt Level _ Time Message Waring 2011 01 01 00 00 02 Switch just made a cold boot Warning 2011 01 01 00 00 16 Link up on port 1 Info 2011 01 01 00 51 09 Login passed for user admin Info 2011 01 01 01 20 41 Login passed for user admin Info 2011 01 03 18 18 04 Login passed for user admin Info 2011 01 03 20 14 37 Login passed for user admin ID on l N e O ID gt 1 of the system log entry Level Level of the system log entry The following level types are supported Info Information level of the system log Warning Warning level of the system log Error Error level of the system log All All levels Time The time of the system log entry Message The message of the system log entry Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh 64 The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide mouse to click on Refresh button Clear The simple counts will be reset to zero when user use mouse to click on Clear button 2 2 28 System Log Detailed Log Function name System Log Detailed Log Function description I
126. ID Receive Missing Remote ID The number of packets received with the Remote ID option missing Receive Bad Circuit ID The number of packets whose Circuit ID option did not match known circuit ID Receive Bad Remote ID The number of packets whose Remote ID option did not match known Remote ID Client Statistics Transmit to Client The number of relayed packets from server to client Transmit Error The number of packets that resulted in error while being sent to servers VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Receive from Client The number of received packets from server Receive Agent Option The number of received packets with relay agent information option Replace Agent Option The number of packets which were replaced with relay agent information option Keep Agent Option The number of packets whose relay agent information was retained Drop Agent Option The number of packets that were dropped which were received with relay agent information After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 4 15 NAS General Setup Function name NAS General Setup Function description The function is used to configure the NAS parameters of the switch The NAS server can be employed to connect users to a variety of resources including Internet access conference calls printing documents on shared printers or by simply logging
127. IUS QoS Disabled RADIUS VLAN Disabled Guest VLAN Disabled Guest VLAN ID d Maximum Reauthentication Count 2 2 Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Frame Seen Disabled port guest vlan Configure the Guest VLAN mode of switch ports SYNTAX port guest vlan lt port list gt lt disable gt lt ensable gt Parameter Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 5 Disable Disable Guest VLAN Enable Enable Guest VLAN EXAMPLE Switch 802 1X port guest vlan 1 disable Switch 802 1X port radius qos A constant that defines a nonzero number of seconds between periodic reauthentication of the supplicant SYNTAX VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 241 port radius qos lt port list gt lt disable gt lt ensable gt Parameter Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 5 Disable Disable RADIUS assigned QoS Enable Enable RADIUS assigned QoS EXAMPLE Switch 802 1X port guest vlan 1 disable Switch 802 1X port radius vlan Configure the RADIUS assigned VLAN mode of switch ports port state radius qos 242 SYNTAX port radius vlan lt port list gt Parameter Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 5 EXAMPLE Switch 802 1X port radius vlan 1 Switch 802 1X Configure the 802 1X port state SYNTAX port state lt port list gt lt force auth gt lt force unauth gt lt mac based gt lt multi gt lt port based gt lt single gt Parameter P
128. L nho Information ACL Log Debug BARENE Access Mgmt no v CPU Load NTP amp Time Configuration Auth Fed Waming iii gt Account Auto Check Warning gt IP Cold Start Warning gt Port Config Info Info gt Loop Protection Firmware Upgrade Info x Trap Event Severity Import Export info S gt SNMP 7 L Sa gt syslog LACP Info xj SMTP General Setup Link Status Waming Gil gt sFlow Agent Login Info v Configuration Logout Info v Ennoite M w Parameter description Group Name The name identifies the severity group Severity Level Scroll to select a severity level on each group The following level types are supported VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Into v Emerg Alert Crit Error Warning Notice Info Debug lt 0 gt Emergency System is unusable lt 1 gt Alert Action must be taken immediately lt 2 gt Critical Critical conditions lt 3 gt Error Error conditions lt 4 gt Warning Warning conditions lt 5 gt Notice Normal but significant conditions lt 6 gt Information Information messages lt 7 gt Debug Debug level messages After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration Or click Reset to cancel the settings just made 2 2 18 SNMP System Any Network Management System NMS running the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP can manage the Managed devices equipped with SNMP agent provided that the Management Informatio
129. LAN memberships and VLAN port configurations such as PVID and UVID Currently we support the following VLAN user types 133 134 Combined vil i Voice VLAN MSTP VCL CLI Web SNMP These are referred to as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP allows dynamic registration and deregistration of VLANs on ports ona VLAN bridged network MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single multicast VLAN Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MSTP The 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to create multiple spanning trees in a network which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a loop free environment Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row PVID Shows the VLAN identifier for that port The allowed values are 1 through 4095 The default value is 1 Port Type Shows the Port Type Port type can be any of Unaware C port S port Custom S port If Port Type is Unaware all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed C port is Customer Port S port is Service port Custom
130. Level if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column Click the to open the following page for adding a new QCE QoS Control Entry Auto Logout Of Overview Por Classification Port Policing Port Scheduler Port Shaping Port Tag Remarking Port DSCP DSCP Based QoS DSCP Translation DSCP Classification QCL Status Storm Control gt Single IP Easy Port Mirroring UPnP Cannuwions Parameters description Port Members Port Members 5 12 13 14 15 v v mM v v Key Parameters Action Parameters Tag Any VID Class o DPL Default DSCP Defaut iv DMAC Type Any v Check the checkbox button in case you what to make any port member of the QCL entry By default all ports will be checked Key Parameters VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Key configuration are discribed as below Tag Value of Tag field can be Any Untag or Tag VID Valid value of VLAN ID can be any value in the 161 162 range 1 4094 or Any user can enter either a specific value or arange of VIDs PCP Priority Code Point Valid value PCP are specific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
131. MP IGMP Snooping is used to establish the multicast groups to forward the multicast packet to the member ports and in nature avoids wasting the bandwidth while IP multicast packets are running over the network This is because a switch that does not support IGMP or IGMP Snooping can not tell the multicast packet from the broadcast packet so it can only treat them all as the broadcast packet Without IGMP Snooping the multicast packet forwarding function is plain and nothing is different from broadcast packet Function name IGMP Snooping General Setup Function description The function is used to set the basic IGMP snooping on the switch which connects to a router closer to the root of the tree This interface is the upstream interface The router on the upstream interface should be running IGMP Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 TR PIP TTT FF Auto Logout Of Overview System Global Configuration Snooping Enabled O x a Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding Enabled atic Trun paee gt LACP IGMP SSM Range 232 0 0 0 1 8 gt Spanning Tree Proxy Enabled Y IGMP Snooping VLAN General Setup Port Group Filtering x Status o unlimited Y Groups Information IPv4 SSM Information MLD Snooping gt MVR unlimited gt LLDP unlimited a nar wate IGMP Snooping Configuration Port Related Configuration unlimited o o unlimited v
132. MP state operation Default Enable Engine ID SNMPv3 engine ID syntax 0 9 a f A F min 5 octet max 32 octet fifth octet can t input 00 IF change the Engine ID that will clear all original user After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration 2 2 19 SNMP General Setup Function name General Setup Function description This function is used to configure general settings for SNMP A SNMP manager must pass the authentication by identifying both community names then it can access the MIB information of the target device So both parties must have the same community name 52 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Dray Tek a Ce Ce kh A rYrirrrrrvi i EC VigorSwitch P2261 CIRL SS Auto Logout Of Overview A SNMP Configuration gt System Information Get Community public Information Set Community private a Device Name CPU Load NTP amp Time Configuration gt Account gt IP gt Port gt Loop Protection Trap Event Severity Y SNMP System Communities Users ee Parameter Description Get Community Indicate the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c If SNMP version is SNMPv3 the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communitie
133. MPLE Switch eee Port Mode Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 10 Disabled Switch eee aA AN OF WN FR Ne Switch eee urgent queue 3 5 3 5 enable Switch eee show Urgent Queues none none 3 5 3 5 3 5 none none none none none VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Event Commands of CLI Group Configure trap event severity level Show SYNTAX Group lt group name gt lt port list gt Parameter lt group name gt Trap event group name lt 0 7 gt Severity level lt 0 gt Emergency system is unusable lt 1 gt Alert action must be taken immediately lt 2 gt Critical critical conditions lt 3 gt Error error conditions lt 4 gt Warning warning conditions lt 5 gt Notice normal but significant condition lt 6 gt Informational informational messages lt 7 gt Debug debug level messages EXAMPLE Switch dhcp snooping clear statistics 1 Switch dhcp snooping Show trap event configuration SYNTAX Show EXAMPLE Switch event show Group Name ACL ACL_Log Access_Mgmt Auth_Failed Cold_Start Config_Info Firmware_Upgrade mport_Export Link_Status Login Logout gmt_IP_Change odule_Change AS Passwd_Change Port_Security Thermal_Protect VLAN Warm_Start Switch event Severity Level Critical Debug Info Warning Warning Info Info Info Warning Inf
134. Mon2 TX PWR none SMTP General Setup Mons RX PWR hone sFlow Agent Configuration Security Maintenance Parameter description Connector Type Display the connector type for instance UTP SC ST LC and so on Fiber Type Display the fiber mode for instance Multi Mode Single Mode Tx Central Wavelength Display the fiber optical transmitting central wavelength for instance 850nm 1310nm 1550nm and so on Bit Rate Display the maximum baud rate of the fiber module supported for instance 10M 100M 1G and so on Vendor OUI Display the Manufacturer s OUI code which is assigned by TEEE Vendor Name Vendor P N Display the company name of the module manufacturer Display the product name of the naming by module manufacturer Vendor Revision Display the module revision Vendor Serial Number Show the serial number assigned by the manufacturer Date Code Show the date this SFP module was made Temperature Show the current temperature of SFP module VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Vcc Show the working DC voltage of SFP module Mon 1 Bias Show the Bias current of SFP module Mon2 TX PWR Show the transmit power of SFP module Mon3 RX PWR Show the receiver power of SFP module 2 2 14 Port EEE EEE is a power saving option that reduces the power usage when there is very low traffic utilization or no traffic EEE works by powering down circu
135. N ID Indicates the Voice VLAN ID It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal each port PVID It is a conflict in configuration if the value equals management VID MVR VID PVID etc The allowed range is 1 to 4095 Aging Time Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning aging time The VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide allowed range is 10 to 10000000 seconds It is used when security mode or auto detect mode is enabled In other cases it will be based on hardware aging time The actual aging time will be situated between the age_time 2 age_time interval Traffic Class Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class All traffic on the Voice VLAN will apply this class Port Configuration Port Switch port number Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN port mode When the port mode isn t equal disabled we must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filtering Possible port modes are Disabled Disjoin from Voice VLAN Auto Enable auto detect mode It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached to the specific port and configures the Voice VLAN members automatically Forced Force join to Voice VLAN Security Indicates the Voice VLAN port security mode When the function is enabled all non telephonic MAC addresses in the Voice VLAN will be blocked for 10 seconds Possible port modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation
136. No Disabled Unlimited VID State Querier RV QI QRI LLQI URI T Disabled Disabled Port Filtering Groups al o Filtering Group 2 o Filtering Group 3 o Filtering Group 4 o Filtering Group 5 o Filtering Group 6 o Filtering Group 7 o Filtering Group 8 o Filtering Group 9A o Filtering Group 10A No Filtering Group Switch igmp show groups 1 Switch igmp Switch igmp show ssm 1 Switch igmp Switch igmp show status Querier Rx Tx Rx Rx Rx VID Status Query Query v1 Join v2 Join Switch igmp Switch igmp show version 1 Switch igmp snooping Set IGMP Snooping Mode SYNTAX Snooping lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter disable Disable the Global IGMP Snooping enable Enable the Global IGMP Snooping EXAMPLE Switch igmp snooping disable Switch igmp state Enable Disable per VLAN IGMP Snooping Mode SYNTAX 280 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Snooping lt vlan list gt lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter lt vlan list gt VLAN list available value is from 1 to 4094 format 1 3 5 disable Disable per VLAN IGMP Snooping enable Enable per VLAN IGMP Snooping EXAMPLE Switch igmp state 1 disable Switch igmp Throttling Set per port Throttling uri SYNTAX Snooping lt port list gt lt 0 0 gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 lt 0 10 gt Set Port Group Limit numberm Range 0 10 O unlimited EXAMPLE S
137. No Link Condition ceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeseaaeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeeeeeesaas 236 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Vii viii VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction In this user s manual it will not only tell you how to install and connect your network system but configure and monitor the 24 2 Gigabit L2 plus Switch through the built in CLI and web by RS 232 serial interface and Ethernet ports step by step Many explanations in detail of hardware and software functions are shown as well as the examples of the operation for web based interface and command line interface CLI 1 1 Overview The 24 2 port Gigabit L2 Managed Switch is a standard switch that meets all IEEE 802 3 u x z Gigabit Fast Ethernet specifications The switch included 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps TP 20 Port for TP 4 Port for Combo and 2 Port Dual SFP Fiber management Ethernet switch The switch can be managed through RS 232 serial port via directly connection or through Ethernet port using CLI or Web based management unit associated with SNMP agent With the SNMP agent the network administrator can logon the switch to monitor configure and control each port s activity in a friendly way The overall network management is enhanced and the network efficiency is also improved to accommodate high bandwidth applications In addition the switch features comprehensive and useful function such as ACL IP MAC Binding DHCP Opt
138. OOD 22 22 Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row QI Qn There are several QoS queues per port QO is the lowest priority queue Rx Tx The number of received and transmitted packets per queue Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button Clear The simple counts will be reset to zero when user use VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide mouse to click on Clear button 45 46 2 2 13 Port SFP Information Function name SFP Information Function description The section describes that switch could display the SFP module detail information which you connect it to the switch The information includes Connector type Fiber type wavelength baud rate and Vendor OUI etc Auto Logout Off ov SFP Information for Port 21 Port21 Auto refresh Refresh Overview i Connector Type none System Information Fiber Type none NTP amp Time Configuration Tx Central Wavelength none Account Bit Rate none gt IP Vendor OUI none vPort Vendor Name none Soneraa Vendor PN none Traffic Overview _ Detailed Statistics Vendor Revision nona QoS Statistics Vendor Serial Number none Date Code hone EEE Temperature none Loop Protection Vec none Trap Event Severity Mon1 Bias none nant
139. P Based QoS QoS Egress Port Shapers disabled disabled di i i disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disab disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabl i i disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabl i i disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabl i disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabl i disabl disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabl i disabl disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabl disabl disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabl i disabl disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disab disabl disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabl disabl disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disab disabled disabl disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disab disabled disabl disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabl disabled disabl disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabl disabled disabl disabled disabled disabled a le es IS IB IS eo o m om ten e feo no e Parameters description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the shapers Shapers Q0 Qn Shows disabled or actual queue shaper rate e g 800 Mbps Port Shows disabled or actual port shaper rate e
140. P Port 21 24 Green Lit Amb hen TP cton With aleve LINK ACT Amber Lit Amber when TP connection with remote device is 100M Blinks when any traffic is present Lit Green when the connection with remote device SFP Port 25 26 Green oe PEA EE TEE E ENTE LINK ACT Amber Lit Amber when the connection with remote devic is 100M Blinks when any traffic is present VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 13 Connector Explanation RESET Used to restart the device to default settings CONSOLE Used to perform telnet command control LAN P1 P24 Giga Ethernet Port SFP 21 26 SFP Fiber Port User Interfaces on the Rear Panel One socket on the rear panel is for AC power input 1 5 Hardware Installation At the beginning please do first gt Wear a grounding device to avoid the damage from electrostatic discharge gt Be sure you have inserted the power cord to power source 1 5 1 Connecting the SFP Fiber Transceiver to the Chassis The optional SFP modules are hot swappable so you can plug or unplug it before or after powering on 1 Verify that the SFP module is the right model and conforms to the chassis 2 Slide the module along the slot Also be sure that the module is properly seated against the slot socket connector 3 Install the media cable for network connection 4 Repeat the above steps as needed for each module to be installed into slot s 5 Have the power ON after the above procedures are d
141. Parameter disable Disable HTTPS mode operation enable Enable HTTPS mode operation EXAMPLE Switch https mode disable Switch https Configure the HTTPS redirect mode SYNTAX Redirect lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter disable Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation enable Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation EXAMPLE Switch https redirect disable Switch https Show HTTPS configuration SYNTAX Show EXAMPLE Switch https show HTTPS Mode Enabled HTTPS Redirect Mode Enabled Switch https VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide IGMP Commands of CLI fast leave leave proxy Set per port Fast Leave SYNTAX fast leave lt port list gt K disable gt lt enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 disable Disable Fast Leave enable Enable Fast Leave EXAMPLE Switch igmp fast leave 1 disable Switch igmp Set IGMP Leave Proxy Mode SYNTAX Mode lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter disable Disable IGMP Leave Proxy enable Enable IGMP Leave Proxy EXAMPLE Switch igmp leave proxy disable Switch igmp Lmqi Set per VLAN Last Member Query Interval SYNTAX Mode lt port list gt trusted Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 trusted Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message untrusted Configures the po
142. Path Cost Priority CIST Aggr Auto 128 MST Port Path Cost Priority CIST 1 Auto 128 CIST 2 Auto 128 CISIT 3 Auto 128 CIST 4 Auto 128 CIST 5 Auto 128 CIST 6 Auto 128 CIST 7 Auto 128 CIST 8 Auto 128 CIST 9 Auto 128 CIST 10 Auto 128 Switch mstp Syntax show lt pconf gt Parameter lt pconf gt To show the STP Port configuration EXAMPLE Switch mstp show pconf Port Mode AdminEdge AutoEdge restrRole restrTcn bpduGuard Point2point Aggr Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Port Mode AdminEdge AutoEdge restrRole restrTcn bpduGuard Point2point 1 Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto 2 Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto 3 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Auto 4 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Auto 5 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Auto VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 327 Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto 9 Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto 10 Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto Switch mstp co a oa Syntax show lt priority gt Parameter lt priority gt To show the bridge instance priority EXAMPLE Switch mstp show priority MSTI Bridge Priority GIST 240 MST
143. QCL The QoS class assigned to a frame is used throughout the device for providing queuing scheduling and congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was configured for that specific QoS class The switch support advanced memory control mechanisms providing excellent performance of all QoS classes under any traffic scenario including jumbo frame A super priority queue with dedicated memory and strict highest priority will be in the arbitration The ingress super priority queue allows traffic recognized as CPU traffic to be received and queued for transmission to the CPU even when all the QoS class queues are congested Function name QoS Port Classification Function description The function is to configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switch ports VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of x Overview rom nS pS gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN gt GARP gt GVRP Y QoS Port Classification Port Policing Port Scheduler Port Shaping Port Tag Remarking Port DSCP DSCP Based QoS Parameters description Port QoS Ingress Port Classification Port QoS class DP level 0 Disabled 0 v Disabled lov Disabled 0 x Disabled ov Disabled lov Disabled LO m Disabled jo Disabled ov Disabled 0 v isable 0 mM Disabled
144. R gt LLDP Y PoE General Setup Status Power Delay Auto Checking Schedule Filtering Data Base General Setup Dynamic MAC Table Parameters description PoE Scheduling Pot 1 2 a 4 s 6 7 8 o 1o 11 12 13 14 15 1 status x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Port 1 Status Disable v C Enable Start Time HH MM Duration Time HH MM How Often Weekdays Sun Mon Tue Port Specify the Port number to apply such function Status Enable Disable this function Start Date Set the starting date for such schedule profile End Date Set the ending date for such schedule profile Start Time Set the starting time for such schedule profile Duration Time Set the duration time for such schedule profile How Often VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Specify the frequency of the schedule profile 125 2 3 39 Filtering Data Base General Setup Filtering Data Base gathers many functions including MAC Table Information Static MAC Learning which cannot be categorized to some function type Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrato
145. RP Statistics Function name GARP Statistics Function description The function is used to display port statistics of GARP for all switch ports Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off Overview Auto refresh O gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN Y GARP General Setup gt GVRP gt Qos gt Single IP Easy Port Mirroring UPnP Security Maintenance Parameters description Port The Port column shows the list of all ports for which per port GARP statistics are shown Peer MAC Peer MAC is MAC address of the neighbour Switch from with GARP frame is received Failed Count Explain Failed count here Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button 148 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 55 GVRP General Setup GVRP is an application based on Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP mainly used to automatically and dynamically maintain the group membership information of the VLANs The GVRP offers the function providing the VLAN registration service through a GARP application It makes use of GARP Information Declaration GID to maintain the ports associated with their attr
146. SCP for QoS class and DPL map There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation 1 Translate DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to any of 0 63 DSCP values 2 Classify Click to enable Classification at Ingress side Egress There are following configurable parameters for Egress side 1 Remap DPO Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 2 Remap DP1 Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 158 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 3 64 QoS DSCP Classification Function name QoS DSCP Classification Function description The function is used to configure and allows you to map DSCP value to a QoS Class and DPL value Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off Overview Port Classification Port Policing Port Scheduler Port Shaping Port Tag Remarking Port DSCP DSCP Based QoS DSCP Translation QoS Control List QCL Status Storm Control gt Single IP Easy Port Mirroring UPnP Cancevi n Parameters description QoS Class DSCP Classification QoS Class DPL DSCP 0 BE 0 BE 0 BE 0 BE HANA 0 1 0 1 0 o 1 0 BE 0 0 BE E 0 1 0 1 4 0 BE 0 BE 0 BE 0 BE
147. Server Status Overview IPAddress Status 0 0 0 0 1813 Disabled 0 0 0 0 1813 Disabled 0 0 0 0 1813 Disabled 0 0 0 0 1813 Disabled 0 0 0 0 1813 Disabled n 1 o Ino e IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server Status The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Access accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button 209 210 Function name AAA RADIUS Details Function description 2 4 20 AAA RADIUS Details The function shows you a detailed statistics of the RADIUS Authentication and Accounting servers Th
148. Severity level Alert Sender alarmsender Return Path administor01 Email Adress alarmowner Email Adress 2 Email Adress a Ww Email Adress ao Email Adress Email Adress 6 Switch smtp Server To configure the email server description Syntax server lt server description gt Parameter 350 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide lt server description gt Up to 47 characters describing email server EXAMPLE Switch smtp server alarmserver Switch smtp show Email Adress 2 Email Adress 3 Email Adress 4 Email Adress 5 Email Adress 6 Switch smtp Mail Server alarmserver User Name Password Severity level Alert Sender alarmsender Return Path administor0l Email Adress alarmowner Show To show the email server configuration and information Syntax show Parameter none EXAMPLE Mail Server User Name Password Severity level Sender Return Path Email Adress Email Adress 2 Ww Email Adress Email Adress ao Email Adress eD Email Adress Switch smtp Switch smtp show alarmserver Alert alarmsender administor0l 192 168 20 22 alarmserver Username To configure email user name Syntax username lt username account gt lt password gt Parameter lt username account gt Up to 47 characters describing user name lt password gt Up to 47 characters describing password EXAMPLE Sw
149. Slave Switch The parameter lets you know how many slave devices connect to the SIP group Model Name Display the model name of the Slave Switch The parameter lets you to know what kind device join to this SIP group MAC Address VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Display the Ethernet MAC address of the Slave Switch 167 The parameter lets you to know what device s MAC address and join to this SIP group Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh 2 3 70 Easy Port Function name Easy Port Function description Click to refresh the page immediately The function is to provide a convenient way to save and share common configurations You can use it to enable features and settings based on the location of a switch in the network and for mass configuration deployments across the network You could easy to implement included Voice IP phone Wireless Access Point and IP Camera etc Others you can leverage configuration to run a converged voice video and data network considering quality of service QoS bandwidth latency and high performance Dray Tek VigorSwitch G2260 Auto Logout Of _ i Overview gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN gt Voice VLAN gt GARP gt GVRP gt Qos Y Single IP General Setup Information Mirroring UPnP Secur
150. Snooping Port Group Filtering c ccccccceceeeeeenee eens eeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeteaeeneneeees 88 2 3 16 IGMP Snooping Status cccceecceceeeeeeeeeeceeeee cee eeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeseeaesseaeeseeeeesaeeesaeeeeeeeee 90 2 3 17 IGMP Snooping Groups Information cccecccececeeeeeneeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeeeeeaeeesaeeeeneeee 91 2 3 18 IGMP Snooping IPv4 SSM Information cccccccceeeeene eens eeceaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeees 92 2 3 19 MLD Snooping General Setup ccceecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeceeeceaeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeneeee 93 2 3 20 MLD Snooping VLAN General Setup cceccccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeceaeeesaeeeeeeeecaeeesaeeeeeeeees 95 2 3 21 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering 0 ceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee cae eesaaeeeeeeeesaeeesaeeeeeeeee 97 2 3 22 MLD Snooping Status iniintindi iiaeia iaiia ida i iai da aidia 98 2 3 23 MLD Snooping Groups Information cccceeececeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeneeee 99 2 3 24 MLD Snooping IPv6 SSM Information cccccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeseaaeeeenees 100 2 3 25 MVR General Setup ceescececececeneeeesaeeeeneeeceaeeeeaaeseneecaeeesaaeeeeaaeeeeaeeesaaeeseaaessenees 101 2 3 26 MVR Group Information cccccceeeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeaeeeeaaeeeeneeseaeeesaaeeeeaaeeseaeeesaeeesaeeeenees 102 2 0 20MVR StatiStles inian aiii aae iia a iala ia e aE ian eas 103 2 3 28 LLDP LLDP General
151. Switch thermal priority temp To configure the temperature at which the ports shall be shut down Show 366 Syntax priority temp lt port priority gt lt temperature gt Parameter lt port priority gt To set the port priority available value is from 0 to 3 lt temperature gt The temperature at which the ports with the corresponding priority will be turned off the available value is from 0 to 255 EXAMPLE Switch thermal priority temp 3 55 Switch thermal To show the thermal protection information Syntax show Parameter none EXAMPLE Switch thermal show Priority Temperature 0 255 C 1 255 C 2 255 C 3 55 Port Priority Chip Temperature 1 0 SIG 2 0 55 C 3 3 55 C VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 4 3 55 5 3 55 6 0 55 7 0 55 8 0 55 9 0 55 10 0 55 Switch thermal qaQgaagaqaaaa VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 367 TIME of CLI Daylight Delete 368 To indicates the Daylight Savings operation Syntax daylight lt disable enable gt lt Time Set Offset gt lt By dates Recurring gt lt Day that DST stars gt lt time that DST starts gt lt Day that DST ends gt lt time that DST ends gt Parameter lt disable gt Disable Daylight Savings operation lt enable gt Enable Daylight Savings operation lt By dates gt Manually enter day and time that DST starts and ends lt Recurring gt DST occurs on the same date ever
152. TENANCE xcs sta E ded ca gate E E E asune deny aneuedie sa E E 223 2 0 31 Restart DEVICE maeta a ee e e danse Ee nw eeeiet A R a 223 2 5 2 Firmware Firmware Upgrade sssssssssssiesssrnsssirrnsttnnsatinnnsttnnnntnnnnantennantnnnnanen nanten nnt 224 2 5 3 Firmware Firmware Selection ccccesceceeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeessaeeeeneeeeenes 225 2 5 4 Save Restore Factory DefaultS ccccceececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeesaaeeseeeesaeeseaaeeeenees 226 2 5 5 Save Restore Save Start ccccccceccececseceeneeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeneeseeeeesaaeeseneeseeeeseaeeeeeaeeeenees 227 2 5 6 Save Restore Save USE c ccceecceceeeeceeneeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeneeseeaeeesaaeeseaeeseeeesaeeeeaeseenees 228 2 5 7 Save Restore Restore USEM ccccccccececeeeeeeeeceeeeeaaeceeneeceaeeeseaeeesaeeseeeeesaeeesaeeeenees 229 2 5 8 Export Import Export Contig ccccccceseeeeeeeeeeceneeeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeecaaeeseeeeeseeeeesaeeeeaeeeenees 230 2 5 9 Export Import Import Config ccccccceesseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeceeeesaaeeeseneeseeeesaeeseaeeeenees 231 2 5 410 Diagnostics PINI sores reer r eE A cde hegedy net oestece sotaci denne disused oes E Ee 232 2 0 1 1 DiagnOStiCS PINGG Areara a E A EEE EEE ates doeay aeanda gees Mead ieesadh es 233 2 50 12 Diagnostics Vor PHY renies iesit aer EAE EEEE EEEE ETSA dd sts 234 Chapter 3 Trouble SHOOtiNg mcris nienn aaa ienesa anrai eiaha 236 3 1 Resolving
153. User s Guide 285 IPV6 Commands of CLI autoconfig Setup Configure IPv6 autoconfig mode SYNTAX Autoconfig lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter disable Disable autoconfig mode enable Enable autoconfig mode EXAMPLE Switch ipv6 autoconfig disable Switch ipv6 Set the IPv6 address SYNTAX Setup lt ipv6 address gt Parameter lt ipv6 address gt Gateway IPv6 address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 lt l 128 gt IPv6 prefix EXAMPLE Switch ipv6 setup 192 168 1 41 1 Switch ipv6 show Show ipv6 information 286 SYNTAX Show EXAMPLE Switch ipv6 show IPv6 Autoconfig Mode Disabled IPv6 Link Local Address fe80 6082 cdb9 19ab c0e2 IPv6 Address 2 192 168 1 41 IPv6 Prefix eee IPv6 Router IPv6 SNTP Server IPv6 VLAN ID 10 Switch ipv6 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide LACP Commands of CLI clear Clear command SYNTAX clear lt statistics gt Parameter statistics Clear LACP statistics EXAMPLE Switch lacp clear statistics Switch lacp Key Configur
154. VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off J oe Access Management Statistics Auto refresh System Interface Received Packets Allowed Packets Discarded Packets Configuration gt ACL SNMP gt IP Source Guard TELNET gt ARP Inspection SSH gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay gt NAS gt AAA gt Port Security Y Access Management General Setup SSH HTTPS Auntie Baattin an ai Parameters description Interface The interface type through which the remote host can access the switch Received Packets Number of received packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled Allowed Packets Number of allowed packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled Discarded Packets Number of discarded packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 219 Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button Clear The simple counts will be reset to zero when user use mouse to click on Clear button 2 4 26 SSH Function name SSH Function description The function uses SSH Secure SHell to securely access the Switch SSH is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication Dray Tek
155. a Por L Managed Swich Assign a reasonable IP address For example IP 192 168 1 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 254 Managing VigorSwitch P2261 through Ethernet Port Before you communicate with the switch you have to finish the configuration of the IP address or to know the IP address of the switch Then follow the procedures listed below 1 Set up a physical path between the configured the switch and a PC by a qualified UTP Cat 5 cable with RJ 45 connector Note If PC directly connects to the switch you have to setup the same subnet mask between them But subnet mask may be different for the PC in the remote site 2 Run web browser and follow the menu Please refer to Chapter 2 Dray Tek M Username admin Password eeeee 20 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 1 5 6 IP Address Assignment For IP address configuration there are three parameters needed to be filled in They are IP address Subnet Mask Default Gateway and DNS IP address The address of the network device in the network is used for internetworking communication Its address structure looks is shown below It is classful because it is split into predefined address classes or categories Each class has its own network range between the network identifier and host identifier in the 32 bits address Each IP address comprises two parts network identifier address and host identifier address The former i
156. a frame is received on the port the port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled The default value is Disabled State Specify the port state of this port The allowed values are Enabled To reopen ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module Disabled To close ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module The default value is Enabled Counter Counts the number of frames that match this ACE Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button Clear The simple counts will be reset to zero when user use mouse to click on Clear button After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 173 2 4 2 ACL Rate Limiters Function name ACL Rate Limiters Function description The function is used to configure the switch s ACL Rate Limiter parameters The Rate Limiter Level from 1 to 16 that allow user to set rate limiter value and units with pps or kbps Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout of Overview ca System Rate Limiter ID _ Configuration Y ACL Ports Access Control List ACL Status gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay gt NAS gt AAA gt Port Security gt Access Management
157. active voice and or video services The network policy attributes advertised are 1 Layer 2 VLAN ID IEEE 802 1Q 2003 2 Layer 2 priority value IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 Layer 3 Diffserv code point DSCP value IETF RFC 2474 This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port The application types specifically addressed are 1 Voice 2 Guest Voice 3 Softphone Voice 4 Video Conferencing 5 Streaming Video 6 Control Signalling conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization and different policies per application type LLDP MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port each corresponding to a different application type Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration It should be noted that LLDP MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN Delete Click to delete the policy Policy ID ID for the policy This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the police that shall be mapped to the specific ports Appli
158. ad packets split into categories based on their respective frame sizes Receive and Transmit Queue Counters The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue RX 64 Bytes Number of 64 byte frames in good and bad packets received RX 65 127 Bytes Number of 65 127 byte frames in good and bad packets received RX 128 255 Bytes Number of 128 255 byte frames in good and bad packets received RX 256 511 Bytes Number of 256 511 byte frames in good and bad packets received RX 512 1023 Bytes Number of 512 1023 byte frames in good and bad packets received RX 1024 1522 Bytes Number of 1024 1522 byte frames in good and bad packets received RX 1527 Bytes Number of 1527 byte frames in good and bad packets received Receive Error Counters Rx Drops The number of frame dropped due to lack of received buffers or egress congestion Rx CRC Alignment The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors Rx Undersize The number of short 1 frames received with valid CRC Rx Oversize The number of long 2 frames received with valid CRC Rx Fragments The number of short 1 frame received with invalid CRC Rx Jabber The number of long 2 frames received with invalid CRC Rx Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes Long
159. ade up of the ACEs defined on this switch Each row describes the ACE that is defined The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list The reserved ACEs used for internal protocol cannot be edited or deleted the order sequence cannot be changed an the priority is highest DrayTek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off Overview System Configuration Refresh Ingress Port Bitmask Type Policy Frame Rate Port Limiter Redirect VACL Ports Rate Limiters Access Controrcis 4 ACL Status gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay gt NAS gt AAA gt Port Security gt Access Management ann Parameters description Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any ingress port Policy The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port Policy Bitmask Indicates the policy number and bitmask of the ACE Frame Type VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames 175 ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 f
160. agged 5 3 Untagged 6 1 All 7 1 All 8 1 All 9 1 All 10 1 All Switch vlan Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Switch vlan show port status combined Untag Untag Ingress Filter Tx Tag This This Untag All Untag All Untag All Untag Untag Untag Untag Untag This This This This This UVID Port Type UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware PrP RPP PB UnAware Conflict tag group To configure tag based VLAN group Syntax tag group lt VLAN ID gt lt VLAN Name gt lt port list gt VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 379 Parameter lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID available value is from 1 to 4094 lt VLAN Name gt Up to 32 characters describing VLAN name lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 EXAMPLE Switch vlan tag group 4 tagvlan4 6 7 Switch vlan show vlan combined VID VLAN Name User Ports 1 default Combined 1 14 2 Combined 3 5 4 tagvlan4 Combined 6 7 Switch vlan show vlan VID VLAN Name User Ports i default Static 1 14 4 tagvlan4 Static 6 7 Switch vlan Tpid To configure the TPID used for Custom S ports This is a global setting for all the Custom S ports Syntax tpid lt TPID value gt Parameter lt TPID value gt TPID value available value is from 0x600 to Oxffff EXAMPLE Switch v
161. aggregation Only one group ID is valid per port Port Members Each switch port is listed for each group ID Select a radio button to include a port in an aggregation or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation By default no ports belong to any aggregation group Only full duplex ports can join an aggregation and ports must be in the same speed in each group After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 71 2 3 2 Aggregation LACP General Setup Ports using Link Aggregation Control Protocol according to IEEE 802 3ad specification as their trunking method can choose their unique LACP GroupID to form a logic trunked port The benefit of using LACP is that a port makes an agreement with its peer port before it becomes a ready member of a trunk group also called aggregator LACP is safer than the other trunking method static trunk Function name Aggregation LACP General Setup Function description The function allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations and possibly change them as well An LACP trunk group with more than one ready member port is a real trunked group An LACP trunk group with only one or less than one ready member port is not a real trunked group Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview System a
162. al Neighbours Entries Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to the Dropped entry table being full Total Neighbours Entries Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live Aged Out expiring LLDP Statistics Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted Tx Frames The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port Rx Frames The number of LLDP frames received on the port Rx Errors The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error 120 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Frames Discarded If an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table has run full the LLDP frame is counted and discarded This situation is known as Too Many Neighbours in the LLDP standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from the table when a given port s link is down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out TLVs Discarded Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded TLVs Unrecognized The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value Org Discarded The number of organizationally received TLVs Age Outs Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid age
163. allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Possible security models are any Any security model accepted v 1lv2clusm 59 60 vl Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy Read View Name The name of the MIB view defines the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Write View Name The name of the MIB view defines the MIB objects for which this request may potentially set new values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Add new access Click it to add a new profile SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration Security Read View Write View Delete Group Name Model Security Level kma Nana First_Group any xjl NoAuth NoPriv None None After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 2 25 SNMP Trap
164. alue added functions by installing firmware upgrades VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview a System wie Upload Configuration Security Firmware Update Restart Device Y Firmware Firmware Selection gt Save Restore gt Export import gt Diagnostics Click Browser to select firmware in you device and click Upload Warning While the firmware is being updated web access appears to be defunct The front LED flashes Green Off with a frequency of 10 Hz while the firmware update is in progress Do not restart or power off the device at this time or the switch may fail to function afterwards 224 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 5 3 Firmware Firmware Selection Function name Firmware Firmware Selection Function description Due to the switch supports Dual image for firmware redundancy purpose You can select what firmware image for your device start firmware or operating firmware This page provides information about the active and alternate backup firmware images in the device and allows you to revert to the alternate image Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of v race Software Image Selection Overview al System Active Image Configuration Image managed Security Version P2261 standalone v1 45 Date 2012 09 17715 52 54 08 00 Restart Device Y Firmware Alternate Image Firmware Upgrade Image managed bk Version P2261 standalone v1 4
165. alue is from 1 to 4094 format 1 3 5 lt 0 31744 gt Range 0 31744 tenths of sec Default 100 tenths of sec EXAMPLE Switch mld lmqi 1 0 Switch mld Set MLD Proxy Mode SYNTAX policy lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter disable Disable MLD Proxy enable Enable MLD Proxy EXAMPLE Switch mld proxy disable Switch mld Set the per VLAN Query Interval SYNTAX qi lt vlan list gt lt 1 255 gt lt 1 255 gt Parameter lt vlan list gt VLAN list available value is from 1 to 4094 format 1 3 5 lt 1 255 gt Range 1 255 sec Default 125 sec lt 1 255 gt Range 1 255 sec Default 125 sec EXAMPLE Switch mld qi 1 1 Switch mld Set the per VLAN Query Response Interval VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide querier router rv SYNTAX qri lt vlan list gt lt 0 31744 gt Parameter lt vlan list gt VLAN list available value is from 1 to 4094 format 1 3 5 lt 0 31744 gt Range 0 31744 tenths of sec Default 100 tenths of sec EXAMPLE Switch mld qri 1 0 Switch mld Enable Disable the per VLAN MLD Querier SYNTAX querier lt vlan list gt lt disable gt Parameter lt vlan list gt VLAN list available value is from 1 to 4094 format 1 3 5 disable Disable the per VLAN MLD Querier enable Enable the per VLAN MLD Querier EXAMPLE Switch mld querier 1 disable Switch mld Set Router Port SYNTAX router lt port list gt lt disab
166. alue is trusted QoS Class QosS Class value can be any of 0 7 DPL Drop Precedence Level 0 3 After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 157 2 3 63 QoS DSCP Translation Function name QoS DSCP Translation Function description The function is used to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation settings for all switches DSCP translation can be done in Ingress or Egress Auto Logout Of Overview Port Classification Port Policing Port Scheduler Port Shaping Port Tag Remarking Port DSCP DSCP Based QoS DSCP Classification QoS Control List QCL Status Storm Control gt Single IP Easy Port Mirroring UPnP Cnniiwion Parameters description DSCP DSCP Translation Ingress Translate Classify Remap DPO Remap DP1 7 v id a x 0 BE 0 BE 0 BE Mi J v 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 18 CS E 9 9 10 AF11 10 AF11 v CS1 8 CS1 _ 9 10 AF11 10 AF11 e ES 7 E EEE ee ALK oon CI Oo v v v v v v v v v v v v 11 11 11 v 11 v Maximum number of supported DSCP value is 64 and valid DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 Ingress Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the D
167. ame System Description Location Contact Device Name System Uptime Current Time BIOS Version Firmware Version Hardware Mechanical Version Series Number Host IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Host MAC Address Console Baudrate RAM Size Flash Size CPU Load 100ms 1s 10s Bridge FDB Size Transmit Queue Switch system location Taiwan Taipei PSGS 2314d 12 advance managed switch Taiwan Taipei administrator PSGS 2314J 07 41 20 2011 08 03 16 50 21 v1 00 v0 87 v1 00 v1 00 TIM0123456789 19216811 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 00 01 c1 00 00 00 115200 64 16 1 2 8192 MAC addresses 8 queues per port Maximum Frame Size 9600 Switch system Name To configure device name or alias Syntax VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 363 Show 364 name lt system name gt Parameter lt system name gt Up to 255 characters describing device name EXAMPLE Switch system name sales departmen Switch system show Model Name System Description Location Contact Device Name System Uptime Current Time BIOS Version Firmware Version Hardware Mechanical Version Series Number Host IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Host MAC Address Console Baudrate RAM Size Flash Size CPU Load 100ms 1s 10s Bridge FDB Size Transmit Queue Maximum Frame Size Switch system PSGS 23147 12 advance managed switch Taiwan Taipei administrator
168. ame and password in order to login and access authentication The default username and password are both admin For the first time to use please enter the default username and password then click the lt Login gt button The login process now is completed In this login menu you have to input the complete username and password respectively the switch will not give you a shortcut to username automatically This looks inconvenient but safer In the switch it supports a simple user management function allowing only one administrator to configure the system at the same time If there are two or more users using administrator s identity the switch will allow the only one who logins first to configure the system The rest of users even with administrator s identity can only monitor the system For those who have no administrator s identity can only monitor the system There are only a maximum of three users able to login simultaneously in the switch To optimize the display effect we recommend you use Microsoft IE 6 0 above Netscape V7 1 above or FireFox V1 00 above and have the resolution 1024x768 The switch supported neutral web browser interface Note When you login the switch WEB CLI to manager you must type the Username and password first Note The default IP of the switch 192 168 1 226 Note When you login P2261 switch Web UI management you can use both IPv4 and IPv6 login for management VigorSwitch P2
169. ameter lt disable gt disable BPDU Guard for Edge ports lt enable gt enable BPDU Guard for Edge ports EXAMPLE Switch mstp bpduguard enable Switch mstp migrate check To set the STP mCheck Migration Check variable for ports Syntax migrate check lt port list gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 EXAMPLE Switch mstp migrate check 3 5 Switch mstp VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide msti vlan To map Vlan ID s to an MSTI p AutoEdge Syntax msti valn lt add delete gt lt instance no gt lt VLAN ID gt Parameter lt add gt To add a VLAN to a MSTI lt delete gt To clear MSTP MSTI VLAN mapping configuration lt instance no gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTH 1 lt VLAN ID gt The VLAN ID available value is from 1 to 4096 EXAMPLE available value is from 0 to 7 Switch mstp msti vlan add 0 2 Switch mstp To set the STP autoEdge port parameter Syntax p AutoEdge lt port list gt lt disable enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt disable gt Disable MSTP autoEdges lt enable gt Enable MSTP autoEdge EXAMPLE Switch mstp p AutoEdge 3 5 enable Switch mstp p bpduGuard To set the bpduGuard port parameter Syntax p bpduGuard lt port list gt lt disable enable gt Parameter lt port list g
170. anaged Media Converter p3 Ss Fiber Optic S a eee eee eee digo NTS eah Copper Twisted pair Links DA DB Fiber Optic Links It is a system wide basic reference connection diagram This diagram demonstrates how the switch connects with other network devices and hosts VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 25 26 gt Peer to peer application is used in two remote offices gt Office Network Connection VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Chapter 2 Operation of Web based Management This chapter instructs you how to configure and manage the switch through the web user interface it supports to access and manage the switch With this facility you can easily access and monitor through any one port of the switch all the status of the switch including MIBs status each port activity Spanning tree status port aggregation status multicast traffic VLAN and priority status even illegal access record and so on The default values of the managed switch are listed in the table below IP Address 192 168 1 226 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 EPET Neen 0 0 0 0 Username admin Password admin After the managed switch has been finished configuration in the CLI via the switch s serial interface you can browse it For example type http 192 168 1 1 in the address row in a browser it will show the following screen see Figure below and ask you inputting usern
171. and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services 4 Guest Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media 5 Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops 6 Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services 7 Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type 8 Video Signaling for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Policy Policy indicates that an Endpoint Device wants to explicitly advertise that the policy is required by the device Can be either Defined or Unknown Unknown The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown Defined The network policy is defined TAG TAG is indicative of whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Can be Tagged or Untagged Untagged The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does
172. ap and the purpose is to map the DSCP and DP level to a new DSCP value SYNTAX dscp remap lt dscp list gt lt dpl list gt lt 0 63 gt Parameter lt dscp list gt DSCP list format 1 3 5 7 lt dpl list gt Drop precedence level list available value is from 0 to 1 lt 0 63 gt Egress remapped DSCP EXAMPLE Switch qos dscp remap 1 1 0 Switch qos dscp translation Configure global ingress DSCP translation table If port DSCP translation is enabled dscp trust 342 translation table is used to translate incoming frame s DSCP value and translated value is used to map QoS class and DP level SYNTAX dscp translation lt dscp list gt lt 0 63 gt Parameter lt dscp list gt DSCP list format 1 3 5 7 lt 0 63 gt Translated DSCP EXAMPLE Switch qos dscp translation 1 0 Switch qos Configure trusted DSCP value which is used for QoS classification The DSCP value to be checked for trust is either translated value if DSCP translation is enabled for the ingress port or incoming frame DSCP value if translation is disabled for the port Trusted DSCP value is only used for QoS classification SYNTAX dscp trust lt dscp list gt lt disable gt Parameter lt dscp list gt DSCP list format 1 3 5 7 disable Set DSCP as untrusted DSCP enable Set DSCP as trusted DSCP EXAMPLE VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Switch qos dscp trust 1 disable Switch qos port classify Q
173. aracter and underscore _ are not allowed Add new entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is added to the table Frame Type Value and the Group Name can be configured as needed The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 142 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 3 50 VLAN Protocol based VLAN Group to VLAN Function name VLAN Protocol based VLAN Group to VLAN Function description The function is used to map an already configured Group Name to a VLAN for the selected item DrayTek VigorSwitch P2261 E anan ma Auto Logout Of Overview PEME Port Members gt PoE Group gt Filtering Data Base Delete Name 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 114 12 13 14 15 16 1 Y VLAN i j No Group entries i j VLAN Membership Switch Status Port Status gt Private VLANs gt MAC based VLAN Protocol based VLAN Protocol to Group gt Voice VLAN gt GARP gt GVRP gt Qos Group Name to VLAN mapping Table Auto refresh Refresh Parameters description Delete Check this box to delete the entry Group Name A valid Group Name is a string of at most 16 characters which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9
174. as for identified the email property Syntax mail address lt Email address index gt lt mail address description gt Parameter lt Email address index gt Email address index the available value is from to 6 lt mail address description gt Up to 47 characters describing mail address EXAMPLE Switch smtp mail address 1 alarmowner Switch smtp show Mail Server User Name Password Severity level Alert Sender Return Path Email Adress alarmowner Email Adress 2 Ww Email Adress NS Email Adress Email Adress an ul Email Adress Switch smtp VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 349 return path To configure the email return path description Syntax return path lt return path gt Parameter lt return path gt Up to 47 characters describing return path EXAMPLE Switch smtp return path administor0l Switch smtp show Mail Server User Name Password Severity level Alert Sender Return Path administor01 Email Adress alarmowner Email Adress 2 Ww Email Adress a Email Adress Email Adress no U Email Adress Switch smtp sender To configure the email sender identified the alarm mail sender Syntax sender lt sender description gt Parameter lt sender description gt Up to 47 characters describing sender EXAMPLE Switch smtp sender alarmsender Switch smtp show ail Server User Name Password
175. ast initialized Auto refresh VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen 83 84 Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button 2 3 12 Spanning Tree Port Statistics After you complete the STP configuration you could to let the switch display the STP Statistics Function name Spanning Tree Port Statistics Function description The function is used to ask switch to display the STP Statistics detail counters of bridge ports in the currently selected switch Dray Tek Crrrr rT Cece Operrreriererer j VigorSwitch P2261 z z Er Auto Logout Of ae Auto refresh Overview System Received Discarded MSTP RSTP STP TCN Unknown Illegal Y Aggregation Static Trunk gt LACP Y Spanning Tree Bridge Settings MSTI Mapping MSTI Priorities CIST Ports MSTI Ports Bridge Status Port Status gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping a naum Parameters description Port The switch port number of the logical STP port MSTP The number of MSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port RSTP The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port STP The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port TCN The number of legacy Topology Change Notification BPDU s re
176. atform is mapped to the LLDP System Description field Both the CDP and LLDP support system capabilities but the CDP capabilities cover capabilities that are not part of the LLDP These capabilities are shown as others in the LLDP neighbours table If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received from neighbour devices If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are terminated by the switch Note When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP information isn t removed immediately but gets when the hold time is exceeded Port Descr VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Optional TLV When checked the port description is 105 106 included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Name Optional TLV When checked the system name is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Descr Optional TLV When checked the system description is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Capa Optional TLV When checked the system capability is included in LLDP information transmitted Memt Addr Optional TLV When checked the management address is included in LLDP information transmitted After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 29 LLDP LLDP Neighbours Function name LLDP LLDP Neighbours Function description The function is used to display a status overview for al
177. ation TACACS Use a remote TACACS server for authentication Fallback Enable fallback to local authentication by checking this box If none of the configured authentication servers are alive the local user database is used for authentication This is only possible if the Authentication Method is set to a value other than none or local After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 222 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 5 Maintenance This section describes all of the switch Maintenance configuration tasks to enhance the performance of local network including Restart Device Firmware upgrade Save Restore Import Export and Diagnostics 2 5 1 Restart Device Function name Restart Device Function description The function is used to restart switch for any maintenance needs Any configuration files or scripts that you saved in the switch should still be available afterwards VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of eee a Restart Device System Configuration Are you sure you want to perform a Restart Security gt Firmware gt Save Restore gt Export import Diagnostics Click Yes to restart the device VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 223 2 5 2 Firmware Firmware Upgrade Function name Firmware Firmware Upgrade Function description The function is used to upgrade the Firmware The Switch can be enhanced with more v
178. ation The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 169 170 2 3 71 Mirroring You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the target port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner Function name Mirroring Function description The function is used to monitor the traffic of the network For example we assume that Port A and Port B are Monitoring Port and Monitored Port respectively thus the traffic received by Port B will be copied to Port A for monitoring Pre b occe L DrayTek lt eres VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off i Mirror Configuration Overview Port to mirror to Disabled gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping gt MVR Mode _ gt LLDP E y gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN gt GARP GVRP gt Qos gt Single IP Easy Port V UPnP Security Maintenance Parameters description Port to mirror to Disabled v Disabled v Disabled Enabled Rx only Tx only__ Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled v Nieshlad w O o Nyon wN Port to mirror also known as the mirror port Frames from ports that have either source rx or destination tx mirroring enabled are mirrored on this port Disabled disables mirroring Port The logical port for the
179. ation Rx 65 127 Bytes 429 Tx 65 127 Bytes 418 EEE Rx 128 255 Bytes 397 Tx 128 255 Bytes 658 Loop Protection Rx 256 511 Bytes 2768 Tx 256 511 Bytes 624 Trap Event Severity Rx 512 1023 Bytes 501 Tx 512 1023 Bytes 28 SNMP Syslog SMTP General Setup Rx 1527 Bytes 0 Tx 1527 Bytes 0 sFlow Agent Receive Queue Counters Transmit Queue Counters Configuration Rx Q0 6792 Tx Q0 0 Security a Rx01 Tx01 o Maintenance Rx Q2 Tx Q2 0 Rx 03 Tx 03 0 0 0 0 5 Rx 1024 1526 Bytes 0 Tx 1024 1526 Bytes 595 Rx 04 Tx 04 Rx 05 Tx 05 Rx 06 Tx 06 Rx 07 Tx 07 2455 SSS SSS SEE Parameter description Receive Total and Transmit Total Rx and Tx Packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets Rx and Tx Octets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes Includes FCS but excludes framing bits Rx and Tx Unicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad unicast packets Rx and Tx Multicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad multicast packets VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 44 Rx and Tx Broadcast The number of received and transmitted good and bad broadcast packets Rx and Tx Pause A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation Receive and Transmit Size Counters The number of received and transmitted good and b
180. automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button Clear The simple counts will be reset to zero when user use mouse to click on Clear button 2 3 41 VLAN VLAN Membership To assign a specific VLAN for management purpose the management VLAN is used to establish an IP connection to the switch from a workstation connected to a port in the VLAN This connection supports a VSM SNMP and Telnet session By default the active management VLAN is VLAN 1 but you can designate any VLAN as the management VLAN using the Management VLAN window Only one management VLAN can be active at a time When you specify a new management VLAN your HTTP connection to the old management VLAN is lost For this reason you should have a connection between your management station and a port in the new management VLAN or connect to the new management VLAN through a multi VLAN route Function name VLAN VLAN Membership Function description VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide The function is used for adding and deleting VLANs as well as adding and deleting port members of each VLAN Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of B Overview ayy eyauen Static Trunk gt LACP gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base Y VLAN VLAN Memb Ports Switch Status Port Sta
181. aximum Reauthentication Count 2 Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Frame Seen Disabled VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 243 AAA of CLI acc radius 244 To configure the RADIUS accounting server parameter Syntax acc radius lt index gt lt enable disable gt lt ip hostname gt lt 0 65535 gt lt Line gt Parameter lt index gt The RADIUS accounting Server index The available value is from to 5 lt disable enable gt To enable or disable the RADIUS accounting service lt ip hostname gt The RADIUS accounting server IP address or hostname lt 0 65535 gt The RADIUS accounting server UDP port If the port is set to 0 zero then the default port 1813 is used lt LINE gt Secret shared with external accounting server The Available value is up to 29 characters long EXAMPLE Switch aaa acc radius 1 enable 192 168 2 22 65535 radius Switch aaa show config Server Timeout 15 seconds Server Dead Time 300 seconds TACACS Authorization and Accounting Configuration Authorization Disable Fallback to Local Authorization Disable Accounting Disable RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration Server Mode IP Address or Host Name Port Secret RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration Server Mode IP Address or Host Name Port Secret L Disabled 1812 2 Disabled 1812 3 Disabled 1812 4 Disabled 1812 5 Disabled 1812 RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration Server Mode IP Address or Host Name Por
182. ble Frames received on the port are not logged enable Frames received on the port are stored in the system log EXAMPLE Switch acl mirror 1 disable Switch acl This command move ACE configuration between two index SYNTAX Move lt 1 256 gt lt 0 256 gt Parameter lt 1 256 gt ACE ID must be exist lt 0 256 gt If the next ACE ID is non zero the ACE will be Placed before this ACE in the list If the next ACE ID is zero the ACE will be placed last in the list EXAMPLE Switch acl move 1 0 Switch acl This command set acl port policy on switch SYNTAX policy lt port list gt lt S gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 5 lt 1 8 gt Policy number VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide port rate ratelimiter show EXAMPLE Switch acl policy 11 Switch acl This command set acl port policy on switch SYNTAX port rate lt port list gt lt 8 gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 5 disable Disable rate limit lt 1 16 gt Rate limiter ID EXAMPLE Switch acl port rate 1 1 Switch acl This command access control rule with rate limiter on switch SYNTAX ratelimiter lt 6 gt lt kbps gt lt 0 10000 gt Parameter lt 1 16 gt Rate limiter ID kbps Kbits per second pps Packets per second lt 0 10000 gt Rate in 100Kbps EXAMPLE Switch acl rate lim
183. bled Disabled OUI Disabled Disabled OUI Forced Enabled Both Forced Enabled Both Forced Enabled Both Disabled Disabled OUI Disabled Disabled OUI Disabled Disabled OUI Disabled Disabled OUI Switch voice vlan wo ort nan fF WN FP Syntax show lt oui gt Parameter lt oui gt Show OUI address EXAMPLE Switch voice vlan show oui No Telephony OUI Description z 00 01 E Siemens AG phones 2 00 03 6B Cisco phones 3 00 OF E2 H3C phones 4 00 60 B9 Philips and NEC AG phones 5 00 D0 1E Pingtel phones 6 00 E0 75 Polycom phones 7 00 E0 BB 3Com phones 8 0A 1B 2C telephonel Switch voice vlan VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide
184. cation Type Intended use of the application types VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 1 Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and 111 112 other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications 2 Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy 3 Guest Voice support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services 4 Guest Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy 5 Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN When a
185. cccccceeeseceeceeeeseeeseaeseeaaeeaaeeesaaesseaaesgeeeesneeesaaeseeneeeenaees 132 2 3 44 VLAN Port Status ecccceccecesceeceeeeaeeeeeaeeesaaeseeaaesaaeeeseaeeseaaesseaaesseneeseaeeseeaaeseenees 133 2 3 45 VLAN Private VLANs Private VLAN Membership ccceeeesseeeeeeeeteeeeeenaeeeeeeaee 135 2 3 46 VLAN Private VLANs Port ISOlation eee eeeceeeeeenneeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeteaeeeeneaaes 137 2 3 47 VLAN MAC based VLAN General Setup 0 ccccccsceceeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeeeeaeeeneees 138 2 3 48 VLAN MAC based VLAN StatuS ccccceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeceneeeeaeeesaaeeseaeeesaeeeeaaeeeenees 140 2 3 49 VLAN Protocol based VLAN Protocol Group 0 cceecceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeteeeseaeeneneees 141 2 3 50 VLAN Protocol based VLAN Group to VLAN c ceceeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeseaeeneeeees 143 2 3 51 Voice VLAN General Setup 00 cccceeeesceceeeeeceeeeeaaeseeneeceaeeeeaaeeseaaeeseaeeesaaeeseaaeesnees 144 2 3 52 Voice VLAN QUI liri a aa a E aa a Eaa a aa aaea aa aaas 146 2 3 53 GARP General Setup 2 2 eccccceecceeeeeceesceceneeeceaeeeenaeseeneeceaeeesaaeesgeneeeeeeessaeseeaaeesenees 146 2 39 04 GARP Stall SCS a snore ais a E E a E a a 148 2 3 55 GVRP General Setup 0 2 eeccccceccceeececeeneeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeneeceaeeesaaeessaneeseeeeesaeseeaaeesnees 149 2 3 56 QOS Port Classification nararanasan anaa aa ea A a LEAS 150 2 3 57 QOS Port Poli
186. ccount System Date 2011 01 01 02 12 30 ER E System Uptime Od 02 12 30 gt Port BIOS Version v1 00 gt Loop Protection Firmware Version v1 45 2012 09 17 TrapEvent Seventy Hardware Mechanical gt SNMP Warsion v1 01 v1 01 aog Series Code 033A08000007 L Sn Host IP Address 10 28 60 21 BN ii Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 SMTP General Setup Gateway IP Address 10 28 60 254 gt sFlow Agent 4 Host MAC Address 00 50 7f f0 c0 49 E n Caneale Raudrata 4146900 It shows the basic information of the clicked port With this you ll see the information about the port status traffic status and bandwidth rating for egress and ingress respectively On the left top corner there is a pull down list for Auto Logout For the sake of security we provide auto logout function to protect you from illegal user as you are leaving If you do not choose any selection in Auto Logout list it means you turn on the Auto Logout function and the system will be logged out automatically when no action on the device 3 minutes later If OFF is chosen the screen will keep as it is Default is ON On the left side the main menu tree for web is listed in the page They are hierarchical menu Open the function folder a sub menu will be shown The functions of each folder are described in its corresponded section respectively When clicking it the function is performed The following list is the full function tree for web user interface VigorSwitch P
187. ce can read None is reserved for Empty Range 1 32 characters ASCII characters 33 126 only lt write_view name gt he scope for a specified instance can write None is reserved for Empty Range 1 32 characters ASCII characters 33 126 only EXAMPLE Switch snmp access rw 0 1 view view Switch snmp To configure SNMP community the command adds the SNMP community mapping to security name entry Syntax community lt community gt lt user name gt lt ip address gt lt ip mask gt Parameter lt community gt Specifies the community strings which allow access to the SNMP agent Range 1 32 characters ASCII characters 33 126 only lt user name gt Specifies the username strings the community will be mapping to user_name which allow access to the SNMP agent Range 1 32 characters ASCII characters 33 126 only lt ip address gt Specifies the source address of an SNMP client lt ip mask gt Specifies the address mask for the SNMP client EXAMPLE Switch snmp community comm admin 192 168 20 22 255 255 255 0 Switch snmp Delete To delete the SNMP command Syntax delete lt access community group trap user view gt lt table index gt Parameter VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 353 lt access gt Delete snmpv3 access entry lt community gt Delete community entry lt group gt Delete snmpv3 groups entry lt trap gt Delete trap entry lt user
188. ceived transmitted on the port Discarded Unknown The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port Discarded Illegal The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button Clear The simple counts will be reset to zero when user use mouse to click on Clear button 2 3 13 IGMP Snooping General Setup A switch supported IGMP Snooping with the functions of query report and leave a type of packet exchanged between IP Multicast Router Switch and IP Multicast Host can update the information of the Multicast table when a member port joins or leaves an IP Multicast Destination Address With this function once a switch receives an IP multicast packet it will forward the packet to the members who joined in a specified IP multicast group before The packets will be discarded by the IGMP Snooping if the user transmits multicast packets to the multicast group that had not been built up in advance IGMP mode enables the switch to issue IGMP function that you enable IGMP proxy or snooping on the switch which connects to a router closer to the root of the tree This interface is the upstream interface The router on the upstream interface should be running IG
189. ceived within the subinterval the request is transmitted again This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to 3 times before it is considered to be dead Dead Time The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already 206 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide determined as dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured TACACS Authorization and Accounting Configuration Authorization Every CLI commands will be authorized by TACACS server when enable The authorization table on the TACACS server is able to configure which CLI command can pass successfully For example TACACS server is set to accept STP command but deny VLAN command The server will block the command related to STP which entered by user but it can allow VLAN command to configure successfully when user enter VLAN command Fallback to Local Authorization Enable to allow the user who typed wrong account or password to login successfully when the user account is on the local authorization list of the local switch For example when user entered the wrong account or password TACACS server will refer to the accou
190. ch snmp show user SNMPv3 Users Table Index User Name Security Level Auth Priv 1 user AuthNoPriv MD5 None Number of entries 1 Switch snmp View To configure SNMP views the command adds an SNMPv3 view entry Syntax view lt view name gt lt view type gt lt oid subtree gt Parameter lt view name gt The name of the SNMP view Range 1 32 characters ASCII characters 33 126 only lt view type gt Indicates if the object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree is included or excluded from the SNMP view name 112 1 gt included 2 gt excluded lt oid subtree gt Object identifiers of branches within the MIB tree EXAMPLE VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 357 Switch snmp view view 1 1 Switch snmp NOTE The view oid subtree first character must be a period Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string using an asterisk Length 1 128 358 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide SSH of CLI Mode Show To configure the SSH mode Syntax mode lt disable enable gt Parameter lt disable gt Disable SSH mode operation lt enable gt Enable SSH mode operation EXAMPLE Switch ssh mode enable Switch ssh show SSH Mode Enabled Switch ssh To show the SSH configuration Syntax show Parameter none EXAMPLE Switch ssh show SSH Mode Enabled Switch ssh VigorSwitch P2261 User s Gu
191. ck way to globally enable disable Guest VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN When unchecked the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled on all ports 195 196 Guest VLAN ID This is the value that a port s Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 4095 Max Reauth Count The number of times the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 255 Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN it will first check if this option is enabled or disabled If disabled unchecked default the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the life time of the port If enabled checked the switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Port Configuration
192. ck ssh disable Switch auth method Delete ARP inspection static entry Show SYNTAX delete lt console gt lt ssh gt lt telnet gt lt web gt Parameter lt local gt lt none gt lt radius gt lt tacacs gt console Settings for console ssh Settings for ssh telnet Settings for telnet web Settings for web local Use local authentication none Authentication disabled radius Use remote RADIUS authentication tacacs Use remote TACACS authentication lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 lt ip address gt IP address allowed for doing ARP request lt mac address gt MAC address format 0a 1b 2c 3d 4e 5f EXAMPLE Switch auth method ssh local Switch auth Show Authentication configuration SYNTAX Show EXAMPLE Switch auth show VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 261 Client Authentication Method Local Authentication Fallback console local Disabled telnet local Disabled ssh local Disabled web local Disabled10B Disabled 262 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Config File Commands of CLI export To run the export function SYNTAX export lt ip address gt lt WORD gt Parameter ip address The TFTP server ip address lt WORD gt Configuration file name EXAMPLE Switch config file export 192 168 1 100 testfile Switch config file import To run the import start function SYNTAX import lt ip a
193. click the Add new user button and enter the user information then check Apply Max Group Number 10 _ Overview Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Privacy gt System Information Level Protocol Password Protocol Password Information Device Name Add new user CPU Load NTP amp Time Configuration gt Account gt IP gt Port gt Loop Protection Trap Event Severity Y SNMP System General Setup Communities Users v Parameter Description Delete Click it to delete the selected user setting User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means it must first be ensured that the value is set correctly Authentication Protocol Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to Possible authentication protocols are None No authentication protocol MDS An optional flag to indicate that this user uses MD5 authentication protocol SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user uses SHA Vig
194. configuration named above This must be an integer between 0 and 65535 MSTI Mapping MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped VLANs Mapped The list of VLANs mapped to the MSTI The VLANs must be separated with comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI An unused MSTI should just be left empty I e not having any VLANs After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 7 Spanning Tree MSTI Priorities When you implement a Spanning Tree protocol on the switch for the bridge instance the CIST is the default instance which is always active For controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier Function name Spanning Tree MSTI Priorities Function description The function is used to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well DrayTek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview System Y Aggregation Static Trunk gt LACP Spanning Tree Bridge Settings MSTI Mapping CIST Ports MSTI Ports Bridge Status Port Status Port Statistics gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping Parameters description 78
195. cp snooping clear statistics 1 Switch dhcp snooping mode Delete dhcp snooping entry port mode show 266 SYNTAX Mode lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter disable Disable DHCP snooping mode enable Enable DHCP snooping mode When enable DHCP snooping mode operation the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports EXAMPLE Switch dhcp snooping mode disable Switch dhcp snooping configure DHCP snooping port mode SYNTAX Mode lt port list gt lt trusted gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 trusted Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message untrusted Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message EXAMPLE Switch dhcp snooping port mode 1 trusted Switch dhcp snooping Show DHCP snooping information SYNTAX show lt config gt lt statistics gt Parameter config Show DHCP snooping configuration statistics Show DHCP snooping statistics EXAMPLE Switch dhcp snooping show config VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide DHCP Snooping Mode Disabled Port Port Mode trusted untrusted untrusted untrusted untrusted untrusted untrusted oo u nN OF WY BF untrusted untrusted S 5 fo D untrusted Ne w untrusted 10B untrusted Switch dhcp snooping Switch dhcp snooping s
196. cted function 1000Mbps SFP Fiber transceiver is used for high speed connection expansion the following are optional SFP types compatible for the switch 1000Mbps LC MM SFP Fiber transceiver 1000Mbps LC SM 10km SFP Fiber transceiver 1000Mbps LC SM 30km SFP Fiber transceiver VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 1000Mbps LC SM 50km SFP Fiber transceiver 1000Mbps BiDi LC type 1 SM 20km SFP Fiber WDM transceiver 1000Mbps BiDi LC type 2 SM 20km SFP Fiber WDM transceiver 1000Mbps LC SM 10km SFP Fiber transceiver with DDM Front View of 1000Base SX LX LC SFP Fiber Transceiver Front View of 1000Base LX BiDi LC SFP Fiber Transceiver 1 4 LED Indicators and Connectors Before you use the Vigor device please get acquainted with the LED indicators and connectors first There are 24 TP Fast Ethernet ports and 2 slots for optional removable modules on the front panel of the switch LED display area locating on the front panel contains a ACT Power LED and 26 ports working status of the switch LED Explanation LED Color Explanation POWER Green Lit when 3 3V power is coming up TP Port 1 24 o Lit when connection with remote device is good RJ45 LEFT Green Blinks when any traffic i pan LINK ACT inks when any traffic is present TP Port 1 24 ae RJ45 RIGHT Green Lit Green when PoE device is up Off when PoE device is down For PoE model Lit Green when TP connection with remote device is 1000M SF
197. cy with this ACE choose this value Two field for entering an policy value and bitmask appears Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 177 protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP IPv6 The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled Port Redirect Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames
198. d Hybrid link is used for more flexible application Hybrid If the tag of tagged frame is as the same as PVID the tag of the frame will be removed The frame become an untagged frame and transmitted Any other tagged frame whose tag value is different from PVID is transmitted directly Trunk all tagged frames with any tag value are transmitted Access The tag of any tagged frame will be removed to become an untagged frame These untagged frames will be transmitted PVID After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Configures the VLAN identifier for the port The allowed values are 1 through 4095 The default value is 1 Note The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID 131 132 2 3 43 VLAN Switch Status Function name VLAN Switch Status Function description The function is used to gather the information of all VLAN status and report it by the order of Static NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Combined Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of J i a Static Trunk Start from VLAN p with 20 entries per page Lis lt _ gt gt gt LACP gt Spanning Tree VLAN 7 7 gt IGMP Snooping ID 3 4 51 6 9 10 141 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 ee 1 MiMi gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base Y VLAN VLAN Membership Ports Switch Status
199. d No Disabled Unlimited 2 Disabled No Disabled Unlimited 3 Disabled No Disabled Unlimited 4 Disabled No Disabled Unlimited 5 Disabled No Disabled Unlimited 6 Disabled No Disabled Unlimited jj Disabled No Disabled Unlimited 8 Disabled No Disabled Unlimited 9A Disabled No Disabled Unlimited 10A Disabled No Disabled Unlimited 9B Disabled No Disabled Unlimited 10B Disabled No Disabled Unlimited VID State Querier RV QI QRI LLOI URI 1 Disabled Disabled VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide snooping state throttling uri Switch mld Switch mld show status 1 Querier Rx Tx Rx Rx Rx VID Status Query Query V1 Report V2 Report V1 Done Switch mld Switch mld show version 1 Switch mld Set MLD Snooping Mode SYNTAX snooping lt disable gt Parameter disable Disable the Global MLD Snooping enable Enable the Global MLD Snooping EXAMPLE Switch mld snooping disable Switch mld Enable Disable the per VLAN MLD Snooping SYNTAX state lt vlan list gt lt 0 31744 gt Parameter lt vlan list gt VLAN list available value is from 1 to 4094 format 1 3 5 disable Disable the per VLAN MLD Snooping enable Enable the per VLAN MLD Snooping EXAMPLE Switch mld state 1 disable Switch mld Set per port Throttling SYNTAX Throttling lt port list gt lt 0 10 gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 lt 0 10 gt Set Port Group Limit
200. d Path Cost Priority _ Restricted v Non Edge fg CIST Normal Port Configuration STP Path Cost Admin Auto Restricted Role TC j 3 7 x E Auto x J Non Edge w Auto 4 Non Edge Auto lt i Non Edge Port The switch port number of the logical STP port STP Enabled Controls whether STP is enabled on this switch port Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favour of higher path cost ports Valid values are in 79 the range 1 to 200000000 Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above Admin Edge Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as set or cleared The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized Auto Edge Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU s are received on the por
201. d max_age lt forward_dely 1 2 EXAMPLE Switch mstp maxage 40 Switch mstp To set STP BPDU MaxHops parameter Syntax MaxHops lt 6 40 gt Parameter lt 6 40 gt STP BPDU MaxHops 6 40 EXAMPLE Switch mstp maxhops 40 Switch mstp To clear the selected port statistics Syntax statistics lt clear gt Parameter lt clear gt Clear the selected port statistics EXAMPLE Switch mstp statistics clear Port Rx MSTP Tx MSTP Rx RSTP Tx RSTP Rx STP Tx STP Rx TCN TX TCN Rx Ill Rx Unk Switch mstp To set the STP Transmit Hold Count Syntax Txhold lt 0 gt Parameter lt 1 10 gt STP Transmit Hold Count 1 10 EXAMPLE Switch mstp Txhold 10 Switch mstp To set the force version with STP RSTP MSTP Syntax VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide bpduFilter bpduGuard version lt mstp rstp stp gt Parameter lt mstp gt Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol lt rstp gt Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol lt stp gt Spanning Tree Protocol EXAMPLE Switch mstp version mstp Switch mstp To set edge port BPDU filtering Syntax bpduFilter lt disable enable gt Parameter lt disable gt disable BPDU Filtering for Edge ports lt enable gt enable BPDU Filtering for Edge ports EXAMPLE Switch mstp bpdufilter enable Switch mstp To set edge port BPDU Guard Syntax bpduGuard lt disable enable gt Par
202. d to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not in the same subnet domain VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Relay Information Mode Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP relay information mode operation When DHCP relay information mode operation is enabled the agent inserts specific information option 82 into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and removes it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client It only works when DHCP relay operation mode is enabled Disabled Disable DHCP relay information mode operation Relay Information Policy Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy When DHCP relay information mode operation is enabled if agent receives a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information it will enforce the policy And it only works under DHCP if relay information operation mode is enabled Possible policies are Replace Replace the original relay information when a DHCP message that already contains it is received Keep Keep the original relay information when a DHCP message that already contains it is received Drop Drop the package when a DHCP message that already contains relay information is received After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 191 1
203. ddress gt lt WORD gt Parameter ip address The TFTP server ip address lt WORD gt Configuration file name EXAMPLE Switch config file import 192 168 1 100 testfile Switch config file VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 263 DHCP Relay Commands of CLI clear mode Clear DHCP relay statistics SYNTAX clear lt statistics gt Parameter statistics Clear DHCP relay statistics EXAMPLE Switch dhcp relay clear statistics Switch dhcp relay Delete dhcp snooping entry SYNTAX mode lt enable gt lt disable gt Parameter disable Disable DHCP relay mode enable Enable DHCP snooping mode When enable DHCP relay mode operation the agent forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t flood for security considered EXAMPLE Switch dhcp relay mode disable Switch dhcp relay relay option Configure DHCP relay agent information option server 264 SYNTAX relay option lt enable gt lt disable gt Parameter disable Disable DHCP relay mode enable Enable DHCP snooping mode When enable DHCP relay mode operation the agent forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t flood for security considered EXAMPLE Switch dhcp relay relay option disable Switch d
204. de lt port list gt lt auto disable force gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt auto gt Enable auto detect mode It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached on the specific port and configure the Voice VLAN members automatically lt disable gt Disjoin from Voice VLAN lt force gt Forced join to Voice VLAN EXAMPLE Switch voice vlan port mode 3 5 force Switch voice vlan NOTE If you didn t enable the LLDP or LLDP MED protocol on your switch then please set the port mode with force mode To configure Voice VLAN port security mode Syntax security lt port list gt lt disable enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt disable gt Disjoin from Voice VLAN lt enable gt Enable Voice VLAN security mode When the function is enabled all non telephone MAC address in Voice VLAN will be blocked 10 seconds EXAMPLE Switch voice vlan security 3 5 enable Switch voice vlan Show To show the Voice VLAN configuration and information Syntax show lt config gt Parameter lt config gt Show Voice VLAN configuration EXAMPLE Switch voice vlan show config Voice VLAN Mode Enabled Voice VLAN VLAN ID 22 Voice VLAN Age Time seconds 2000 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Voice VLAN Traffic Class 2 7 Port Mode Security Discovery Protocol Disa
205. de Postal zip code Example 2791 Building Building structure Example Low Library Apartment Unit Apartment suite Example Apt 42 Floor Floor Example 4 Room no Room number Example 450F Place type Place type Example Office Postal community name Postal community name Example Leonia P O Box Post office box P O BOX Example 12345 Additional code Additional code Example 1320300003 Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service e g E911 and others such as defined by TIA or NENA Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk based PSAP This format consists of a numerical digit string corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Policies Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific real time network policy requirements such as inter
206. deo flows because voice and video usually maintains a steady rate of traffic Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout of w Overview TTS gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN gt GARP gt GVRP Y QoS Port Classification Ponpon Port Scheduler Port Shaping Port Tag Remarking Port DSCP DSCP Based QoS ers description Port QoS Ingress Port Policers Port Mode Rate The port number for which the configuration below applies Mode To evoke which Port you need to enable the QoS Ingress Port Policers function Controls whether the policer is enabled on this switch port Rate Controls the rate for the policer The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps or fps and it is restricted to 1 1000 when the Unit is Mbps or kfps Unit Select the unit of rate including kbps Mbps fps and kfps The default is kbps Flow Control Check it to enable or disable flow control on port After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 152 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 3 58 QoS Port Scheduler Function name QoS Port Scheduler Function description The function is used to provide an ove
207. dinates Location Latitude Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or South of the equator Longitude Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the prime meridian Altitude Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within 32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to select between two altitude types floors or meters Meters Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified Floors Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different floor to floor dimensions An altitude 0 0 is meaningful even outside a building and represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude Inside a building 0 0 represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance Map Datum The Map Datum is used for the coordinates given in these options WGS84 Geographical 3D World Geodesic System 1984 CRS Code 4327 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich NAD83 NAVD88 North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 NAVD88 This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land not near tidal wat
208. e Views Function description This function is used to configure SNMPv3 view The Entry index key includes OID Subtree and View Name To create a new view account please click the Add new view button and enter the view information then click Apply Max Group Number 28 Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of x Overview E NTP amp Time Configuration gt Account gt IP gt Port gt Loop Protection Trap Event Severity Y SNMP System General Setup Communities Users Groups i Access Trap gt Syslog Parameter Description EEIEIEE wjlrrrrrrirrrrrri i EC SNMPv3 Views Configuration Delete View Name View Type OID Subtree Add new view Apply J Delete Click it to delete the selected user setting View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 View Type Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to Possible view types are included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded In general if a view entry s view type is excluded there should be another view entry existing with view type as included and it s OID subtree should overstep the excluded view entry OID Subtree The OID defining the r
209. e 9B Disabled Auto Active 10B Disabled Auto Active y nN oO FP WN FB wo rR Do Pp D gt 10B Port O TGr oO F amp F WN H No D 10A Switch lacp Switch lacp 0 6 G16 Oa olo o C6 0 Switch lacp Mode Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Switch lacp show statistics coag o Ogo GO 6 1046 6 OO 6S OOO SO O S OS show status o an a 3S SS SO SHS S76 Port Rx Frames Tx Frames Rx Unknown Rx Illegal Key Aggr ID Partner System ID Partner Port VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 9B Disabled 10B Disabled Switch lacp VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 289 Limit control Commands of CLI action Configure the action involved with exceeding the limit SYNTAX Action lt port list gt both Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 Both Senda SNMP trap and shutdown the port none Do nothing shutdown Shutdown the port trap Send a SNMP trap EXAMPLE Switch limit control action 1 both Switch limit control aging Configure the aging mode and period SYNTAX aging lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter disable Disable aging enable Enable aging EXAMPLE Switch limit control aging disable Switch limit control limit Configure the max number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port SYNTAX limit lt port list gt lt 1 1024 gt Parameter
210. e ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 179 180 Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP IPv6 The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled Port Redirect Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are E
211. e customer service port type lt s port gt To set the port as the service port type lt unaware gt To set the port as the VLAN unaware port type EXAMPLE Switch vlan port type 3 5 s custom port Switch vlan show port config TPID for Custom S port 0x88a8 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 377 Pvid Show 378 Port PVID aA nA OF WN FP Ne 10 Switc TerPrPrPrPwWwWwWeR PB Frame Type All All Untagged Untagged Untagged All All All All All vlan Ingress Filter Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Egress Rule Hybric Hybric Access Access Access Hybric Hybric Hybric Hybric Hybric Port Type UnAware UnAware S Custom Port S Custom Port S Custom Port UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware To configure the Port VLAN ID Syntax pvid lt port list gt lt VLAN ID gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID available value is from 1 to 4094 0x88a8 Ingress Filter Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled EXAMPLE Switch vlan pvid 3 5 3 Switch vlan show port config TPID for Custom S port Port PVID Frame Type 1 1 All 2 1 All 3 3 Untagged 4 3 Untagged 5 3 Untagged 6 1 All 7 1 All 8 1 All 9 1 All 10 1 All Switch vlan Egress Rule H
212. e ee LrS5200 RAM Size 64 Flash Size 2 16 CPU Load 100ms 1s 10s 0 6 3 Bridge FDB Size 8192 MAC addresses Transmit Queue 8 queues per port aximum Frame Size 9600 Switch system To configure system description that descripts the device property Syntax description lt system description gt Parameter lt system description gt Up to 255 characters describing system information EXAMPLE Switch system description 12 advance managed switch Switch system show Model Name PSGS 23147 System Description 12 advance managed switch Location Contact administrator VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Device Name System Uptime Current Time BIOS Version Firmware Version Hardware Mechanical Version Series Number Host IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Host MAC Address Console Baudrate RAM Size Flash Size CPU Load 100ms 1s 10s Bridge FDB Size Transmit Queue Maximum Frame Size Switch system PSGS 2314J 07 37 30 2011 08 03 16 46 31 v1 00 v0 87 v1l 00 v1 00 TIM0123456789 192 168 1 1 259525942559 0 0 0 0 0 00 01 c1 00 00 00 115200 64 16 0 2 3 8192 MAC addresses 8 queues per port 9600 Location To configure the system location Syntax location lt system location gt Parameter lt system location gt Up to 256 characters describing system location EXAMPLE Switch system show Model N
213. e packet when excessive collision restart Retransmit the packet regardless of the number of collisions EXAMPLE Switch port excessive collision 1 discard Switch port Configure flow operation SYNTAX flow control lt number gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 disable Disable flow control operation VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide max frame port state enable Enable flow control operation EXAMPLE Switch port flow control 1 disable Switch port Configure maximum receive frame size SYNTAX max frame lt port list gt lt 1518 9600 gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 lt 1518 9600 gt Maximum receive frame size in bytes EXAMPLE Switch port max frame 1 1518 Switch port Configure port state operation SYNTAX port state lt port list gt lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 disable Disable port state operation enable Enable port state operation EXAMPLE Switch port port state 1 disable Switch port power saving Configure power saving operation SYNTAX power saving lt port list gt lt actiphy gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 actiphy Enable ActiPHY power control disable Disable power saving dynamic
214. e simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh 2 3 44 VLAN Port Status Function name VLAN Port Status Function description The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button The function gathers the information of all VLAN status and reports it by the order of Static NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Combined Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off Overview Static Trunk gt LACP gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base VLAN VLAN Membership Ports Switch Status gt Private VLANs gt MAC based VLAN Parameters description VLAN USER VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide v VLAN Port Status for Static user Static Port Ingress Filtering UnAware Disabled UnAware Disabled UnAware Disabled UnAware Disabled UnAware Disabled UnAware Disabled UnAware Disabled UnAware Disabled UnAware Disabled UnAware Disabled UnAware Disabled UnAware Disabled UnAware Disabled UnAware Disabled UnAware Disabled Port PVID Untag_all Untag_al Untag_al Untag_al Untag_al Untag_al Untag_all Untag_al Untag_all Untag_al Untag_all Untag_al Untag_al Untag_al ae gt es gt ee gt ee Se Se See VLAN User module uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure V
215. e statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 RADIUS Authentication Client MIB There are seven counters for receive packets and four counters for transmit packets DrayTek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout or x Overview System amp Configuration gt ACL gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay gt NAS Y AAA General Setup RADIUS Overview RADIUS D Port Security gt Access Management SSH nurrnea Parameters description RADIUS Authentication Statistics RADIUS Authentication Statis Sener 1 v Auto refresh Refresh Clear Receive Packets Access Accepts Transmit Packets Access Requests Access Rejects Access Retransmissions Access Challenges Pending Requests Malformed Access Responses Timeouts Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped ther Info IP Address 0 0 0 0 1812 State Disabled Round Trip Time Oms RADIUS Accounting Statistics for Server 1 Receive Packets Transmit Packets v Use the server selection box to switch between the backend servers to show details for Access Accepts The number of RADIUS Access Accept packets valid or invalid received from the server Access Rejects The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets valid or invalid received from the server Access Challenges The number of RADIUS Access Challenge packets valid or invalid rece
216. e the LACP key SYNTAX Setup lt port list gt lt 1 65535 gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 lt 1 65535 gt LACP key auto The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by the physical link speed 1OMb 1 100Mb 2 1Gb 3 EXAMPLE Switch lacp key 1 12 Switch lacp mode Configure the LACP mode SYNTAX mode lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 disable Disable LACP protocol enable Enable LACP protocol EXAMPLE Switch lacp mode 1 disable Switch lacp role Configure the LACP mode SYNTAX role lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 active Initiate LACP negotiation and transmit LACP packets each second passive Listen for LACP packets EXAMPLE Switch lacp role 1 active Switch lacp Show Show LACP information VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 287 288 SYNTAX Show Parameter config Show LACP configuration statistics Show LACP statistics status Show LACP status EXAMPLE Switch lacp show config Port Mode Key Role 1 Disabled 12 Active 2 Disabled Auto Active 3 Disabled Auto Active 4 Disabled Auto Active 5 Disabled Auto Active 6 Disabled Auto Active 7 Disabled Auto Active 8 Disabled Auto Active 9A Disabled Auto Active 10A Disabled Auto Activ
217. e the port scheduler mode weight Configure the port scheduler weight VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 343 port shaper qce 344 lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 strict Strict priority scheduler mode weighted Weighted scheduler mode EXAMPLE Switch qos port scheduler mode 1 strict Switch qos port shaper SYNTAX port shaper lt mode gt lt port list gt lt disable gt Parameter mode Configure the port shaper mode rate Configure the port shaper rate lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 disable Disable port shaper enable Enable port shaper EXAMPLE Switch qos port shaper mode 1 disable Switch qos Add or modify QoS control entry SYNTAX Qce lt 1 256 gt lt 0 256 gt lt port list gt any Parameter lt 1 256 gt If the QCE ID parameter lt qce_id gt is specified and an entry with this QCE ID already exists the QCE will be modified Otherwise a new QCE will be added lt 0 256 gt If the next QCE ID is non zero the QCE will be placed before this QCE in the list If the next QCE ID is zero lt port list gt Port member for QCE any Only Ethernet Type frames can match this QCE etype Only Ethernet Type frames can match this QCE ipv4 Only IPv4 frames can match this QCE ipv6 Only IPv6 frames can match this QCE lic Only LLC frames can match this QCE snap Only SNAP frames can match this QCE auto lo
218. ea network Every port can access each other A w If VLAN is enabled and configured each node in the network that can communicate each other directly is bounded in the same VLAN area Here VLAN area is defined by what VLAN you are using The switch supports both port based VLAN and tag based VLAN They are different in practical deployment especially in physical location The following diagram shows how it works and what the difference they are VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 17 Case 2 Port based VLAN 1 The same VLAN members could not be in different switches Every VLAN members could not access VLAN members each other The switch manager has to assign different names for each VLAN groups at one switch Case 3 Port based VLAN 2 VLANI1 members could not access VLAN2 VLAN3 and VLAN4 members VLAN2 members could not access VLAN1 and VLAN3 members but they could access VLAN4 members VLAN3 members could not access VLANI VLAN2 and VLAN4 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide VLAN4 members could not access VLANI and VLAN3 members but they could VLAN2 members Case 4 The same VLAN members can be at different switches with the same VID access VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 1 5 5 Configuring the Management Agent of Switch VigorSwitch For example IP 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 254 DrayTek orSwitch G2260 2442 Gig
219. econds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 15 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering With this feature you can filter multicast joins on a per port basis by configuring IP multicast profiles and associating them with individual switch ports An IGMP profile can contain one or more multicast groups and specifies whether access to the group is permitted or denied If an IGMP profile denying access to a multicast group is applied to a switch port the IGMP join report requesting the stream of IP multicast traffic is dropped and the port is not allowed to receive IP multicast traffic from that group If the filtering action permits access to the multicast group the IGMP report from the port is forwarded for normal processing IGMP filtering controls only IGMP membership join reports and has no relationship to the function that directs the forwarding of IP multicast traffic Function name IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Function description The function is used to set the IGMP Port Group Filtering With the IGMP filtering feature a user can exert this type of control In some network Application environments as like the metropolitan or multiple dwelling unit MDU installations an user might want t
220. ed 0 0 1 Disabled 1 0 2 Enabled 0 0 3 Enabled 0 0 4 Enabled 0 0 5 Enabled 0 0 6 Enabled 0 0 7 Enabled 0 0 346 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 11 12 OUN A co 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Switch qos ooo Oo cS OR T ae eS Se es a ee gt gt a ea a a ee ee ee ee Ee ee OS SSE ooo m C8 CO OOO OS SOO SO OOS OS SOO GS SO SO CO S OO OG oO SC So Oo SO SO SO SO So So So Oo oO oO So So Oo So GS SoS Se SO storm VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Configure storm rate control 347 SYNTAX storm lt broadcast gt lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter broadcast broadcast storm control multicast multicast storm control unicast unicast storm control disable Disable broadcast storm control enable Enable broadcast storm control EXAMPLE Switch qos
221. ed Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 7 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 8 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 168 9 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 10 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 11 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 12 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 L3 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 14 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 Rate Limiter Rate 1 1 PPS 2 1 PPS 3 1 PPS 4 1 PPS delete This command delete the ACE Access Control Entry configuration on the switch SYNTAX delete lt 1 256 gt Parameter lt 1 256 gt ACE ID must be exist EXAMPLE Switch acl delete 1 Switch acl Switch acl show acl config VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 253 list mirror move policy 254 Number of ACEs 0 This command display ACL list SYNTAX list lt port list gt disable enable Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 5 disable Frames received on the port are not logged enable Frames received on the port are stored in the system log EXAMPLE Switch acl logging 1 disable Switch acl Configure ACL port default mirror operation SYNTAX list lt port list gt disable enable Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 5 disa
222. eeceeecaeeseaaeseeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeneeee 33 2 2 D ACCOUNT SEIS a iene Taa auia aasa ashe aana uaaa Aaaa Eana aaa a enaa aai eapi Meane ster ede 34 2 2 6 Account Privilege Level ccceccceceeeceeseceeneeceeeeeceaeeseeneeceaeeecaaeseeaaeseneeenaeeseeaaeseeneeeas 36 2 2 7 IP Configuration PV4 ec cecsececeeeceesneceeneeeneeeeceaeeeeaaaesaaeeecaaeseeaaesseeeeseaeeeeaaeeeseneeseeeesas 37 2 2 8 IP Configuration I PV6 ecscceceseceeseeceeseeeeeeeeseaeeeeaaeeeaeeecaaeseeaaeseeeeseaeeeeaaessseeeeseeeesas 39 2 2 9 Port General Setup eecccceecceceeeceeeeeeeeaceeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeseneeseaesseaaeseaeeesnaeeseaaeseeaaesseneeeaas 40 2 2 10 Port Traffic Overview 0 ceetceceeeeeceneeeeeaeeeeeeee seas eeeaaesaaeeeeaeeesaaeseseaeeseeeesaeeeeaaeeseneeees 42 2 2 11 Port Detailed Statisti S misura enairar eanan teke i a adat ria anai 43 2 22 12 Port QOS StaliStiCS siantan aa dhiswad eden ana ti Pie RATAAN Eaa aA aa a EEES 45 2 213 Port SFP Infomation anaia aaa ideena anaa aKa aeaa n iana E AE AEEA ARAE Ed ani 46 PAP Ne oa EEE an a a aa aS 47 2 2 15 Loop Protection General Setup csccceecceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeseaeeseeeeesaeeesaeeneneeees 48 2 2 16 Loop Protection Status ccceccceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaeeseeeeesaaeeseaeeseeeeeseaeeetaeeseeeeees 49 2 2 17 Trap Event Severity e ionann a aiara eia aaa a i aaiae a iiaia iaaa 50 ZOO SNMP SYSTSIM a aaa a a a a A a aaa 51 2 2 19 SNMP G
223. eeees 72 2 3 3 Aggregation LACP System Status ccccccecceceeeeeeneeceeeeeeaeeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeneeee 73 2 3 4 Aggregation LACP Port Status amp Statistics 0 0 ccceccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeaeeeeeeeees 74 2 3 5 Spanning Tree Bridge SettingS ccccecsceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeceeeeeceaeeeseaeeseeeeesaeeetaeeeeeeeee 75 2 3 6 Spanning Tree MSTI Mapping ccceesceceeeceeeneeeeaeeeeeeeceeeesaaaeeseaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeneeeeee 77 2 3 7 Spanning Tree MSTI Priorities cc cceeseeeececeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeeeesaeeeseaeeneneeee 78 2 3 8 Spanning Tree CIST Ports cecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeee cee eeeeaeeeeneeseeeeceaeeeeaaeseceeeescaeeesaeeeeneeee 79 2 3 9 Spanning Tree MSTI Ports cccccecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeecaaesesaaeseeeeeeeaesesaeeeeneeees 81 2 3 10 Spanning Tree Bridge Status ccceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeeseaeeeseneeseeeesaeeesaeeeeneeees 82 2 3 11 Spanning Tree Port Status c cc ecceeeeeeeeeeeeceneeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseaeeseeeeecaeeesaeeneneeee 83 2 3 12 Spanning Tree Port Statistics ececeseceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeseeeeeseeeeesaeeesaeeseneeees 84 2 3 13 IGMP Snooping General Setup 0 cccceecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeecaaeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeee 85 2 3 14 IGMP Snooping VLAN General Se tup ccccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeesaaeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeneneeees 87 2 3 15 IGMP
224. een the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds Port The switch port number of the logical LLDP port Mode Select LLDP mode Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information but LLDP information from neighbour units is analyzed Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbours but will send out LLDP information Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information and will drop LLDP information received from neighbours Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information and will analyze LLDP information received from neighbours CDP Aware Select CDP awareness The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames The switch doesn t transmit CDP frames CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port is enabled Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbours table are decoded All other TLVs are discarded Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded CDP frames are not shown in the LLDP statistics CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbours table as shown below CDP TLV Device ID is mapped to the LLDP Chassis ID field CDP TLV Address is mapped to the LLDP Management Address field The CDP address TLV can contain multiple addresses but only the first address is shown in the LLDP neighbours table CDP TLV Port ID is mapped to the LLDP Port ID field CDP TLV Version and Pl
225. eesenes 192 2 4 15 NAS General Setup cc eeseececececeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaesneneeceaeeecaaaesseneeeeaeeesaaesseaaeenenees 193 2 4 16 NAS Switch Status ccc aaia aai iania ii E A ieai 203 241 7ANAS POr Status pi aaia aa ea a e a a Aa a aa 205 2 4 18 AAA General Setup ccceesceceeeeeceneeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaesaneeceaeeeeaaaesseneesneeesaesesaaeenenees 206 2 4 19 AAA RADIUS Overview 0 ceeccceccceccceceeneeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeaeeecaaeseeaaeseeneeseaeeesaaeeseneeesaees 209 2 4 20 AAA RADIUS Details 00 00 00 eeecceccceccceeeeneeeeeneeeceaeeeenaeseneecaeeeeaaeseeaaeeseeeeesaaeseeaaeesenees 210 2 4 21 Port Security Limit Control cccceccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaaeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeseeaaeeeenees 212 2 4 22 Port Security Switch Status 00 cceeeesceceeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeaeseeeeeseeeeseaeeesaeeeenees 214 2 4 23 Port Security Port Status 00 eccccccceeese cece cece eeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeseeeeeseeeesaeeeseaeeeeaees 216 2 4 24 Access Management General Setup cccccccceseeceeneeceeeeeeeaeeesaaeseceeeseaeeeeeeeeenees 218 2 4 25 Access Management StatisticS 0 cecccececceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeesaaeeseneeeeeeeseaeeesaeeeenees 219 AO OPS dca vied satetesee SS E A cca haceey sauce taeda taney E EE 220 ZA TAT PS eevee tessa a e ayes Re Tel ets avast avs eres 221 24 28 Auth Method siini ai iid a ee Man aie Mais need Saas weed Seite aaa i eee 222 2 0 MAIN
226. efault no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Add new entry Click it to add a new MAC based VLAN entry An empty row is added to the table and the MAC based VLAN entry can be configured as needed Any unicast MAC address can be configured for the MAC based VLAN entry No broadcast or multicast MAC addresses are allowed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The MAC based VLAN entry is enabled on the selected stack switch unit when you click on Save A MAC based VLAN without any port members on any stack unit will be deleted when you click Apply The button can be used to undo the addition of new MAC based VLANs Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 139 2 3 48 VLAN MAC based VLAN Status Function name VLAN MAC based VLAN Status Function description The function is used to show MAC based VLAN entries configured by various MAC based VLAN users Note NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server Auto Logout Off Overview PLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base Y VLAN VLAN Membership Ports Switch Status Port Status gt Private VLANs MAC based VLAN Genera
227. eived V2 Reports V3 Reports Received The number of Received V3 Reports V2 Leaves Received The number of Received V2 Leaves Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button Clear The simple counts will be reset to zero when user use mouse to click on Clear button VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 3 23 MLD Snooping Groups Information Function name MLD Snooping Groups Information Function description The function describes how a user could set the MLD Snooping Groups Information The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest MLD Group Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The will use the last entry of the cur
228. eneral Setup eccceescecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeeeeeeecaaeseeaaesgeneeeeaeeseaeeeeeneeees 52 2 2 20 SNMP Communities s eesseeesseeseeeseessnessnessnnesnaesnnorrnnetnnesnnesnnennoennootnsctnscennoennsennenn 53 2 2 2 PON SUSE Sa a a aa a aeaa 55 2 222 SONME GOU DS a a a a Aaaa bad a E a loath 57 222S SNM VES aa a a a aa raaa 58 2224 SNMP A ESS a aa a a aaa Abd aaa a 59 2222 SNMP aD a a a a aa aa 61 2 2 26 System Log General Setup ssseesssessseesseesseessntssntrinntnnetnnetnnetnnstrnnennnennnnnnsennsennnenn 63 2 2 26 System Log LOG iiaii ieai ieee eae ie ee 64 2 2 28 System Log Detailed LOG cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeceeaeeesaaeeseaeeseeeeesaeeesaeeeeneeees 65 2 2 29 SMTP General Setup ccceeccecessceeenceceecceeeseeeseaeeeeaaesaaaesnaaesseaeeseeaaessaneeesaeseeaaeseeneeees 66 2 2 30 sFlow Agent ColleCtor ceeccccecececeneceeneeeeeneeeceaeeeeaaeseeneeseaeeecaaeseeaaesseneeeneeseaeeseeneeee 67 2 2 31 sFlow Agent Sampler ceccccecececeeeceeneeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeneeeeeeeecaaeesseaeesseeesaeseeaaeeseneeees 68 239 GOMMOUPAUOM sc scat hae a trast aa Sooeeh aaee a a Gaa Neer attend baal 70 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide v vi 2 3 1 Aggregation Static Trunk ceccceceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeecaaeeeeaaeeseeeeseaeeesaeeeeneeee 70 2 3 2 Aggregation LACP General Setup ccccceceeeceeseeeeeneeceeeeeceaeeeseaeeeeeeeecaeeesaeenen
229. ent Range 1 32 characters ASCII characters 33 126 only lt security model gt The user security model 11213 1 is v1 2 is v2c 3 is usm lt group name gt The name of the SNMP group Range 1 32 characters ASCII characters 33 126 only VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Mode Show EXAMPLE Switch snmp set group user 3 regroup Switch snmp NOTE gt gt An SNMPv3 group sets the access policy for its assigned users restricting them to specific read and write views as defined by the access entry You can use the pre defined default groups or create a new group and the views authorized for that group Note that the views assigned to a group must be specified with the view entry a vl Up to 2 group names can be configured ai V2 Upto 2 group names can be configured a usm Up to 10 group names can be configured To enable or disable the SNMP mode Syntax mode lt disable enable gt Parameter lt disable gt Disable SNMP mode lt enable gt Enable SNMP mode EXAMPLE Switch snmp mode enable Switch snmp To show the SNMP configuration or detail information Syntax show lt access community group mode trap user view gt Parameter lt access gt Show snmpv3 access entry lt community gt Show snmpv3 community entry lt group gt Show snmpv3 groups entry lt mode gt Show snmp configuration lt trap gt Show
230. er The switch supports valid configurable day light saving time is 5 5 step one hour The zero for this parameter means it need not have to adjust current time equivalent to in act daylight saving You don t have to set the starting ending date as well If you set daylight saving to be non zero you have to set the starting ending date as well otherwise the daylight saving function will not be activated Default for Daylight Saving 0 The following parameters are configurable for the function Daylight Saving and described in detail Day Light Saving Start This is used to set when to start performing the day light saving time Month Range is 1 12 Default 1 Day Range is 1 31 Default 1 Hour Range is 0 23 Default 0 Day Light Saving End This is used to set when to stop performing the daylight saving time Month Range is 1 12 Default 1 Day Range is 1 31 Default 1 Hour Range is 0 23 Default 0 NTP Configuration 2 2 5 Account Users NTP is Network Time Protocol and is used to sync the network time based Greenwich Mean Time GMT If use the NTP mode and select a built in NTP time server or manually specify an user defined NTP server as well as Time Zone the switch will sync the time in a short after pressing lt Apply gt button Though it synchronizes the time automatically NTP does not update the time periodically without user s processing Time Zone is an offset time of
231. er which would use Datum NAD83 MLLW NAD83 MLLW North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water MLLW This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on water sea ocean Civic Address Location VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 109 110 IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information Civic Address LCI Country code The two letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters Example DK DE or US State National subdivisions state canton region province prefecture County County parish gun Japan district City City township shi Japan Example Copenhagen City district City division borough city district ward chou Japan Block Neighbourhood Neighbourhood block Street Street Example Poppelvej Leading street direction Leading street direction Example N Trailing street suffix Trailing street suffix Example SW Street suffix Street suffix Example Ave Platz House no House number Example 21 House no suffix House number suffix Example A 1 2 Landmark Landmark or vanity address Example Columbia University Additional location info Additional location info Example South Wing Name Name residence and office occupant Example Flemming Jahn Zip co
232. eration 10 half Force speed duplex to 10 half operation 100 full Force speed duplex to 100 full operation 100 half Force speed duplex to 100 half operation 1000 full Force speed duplex to 1000 full operation auto Enable auto speed duplex configuration EXAMPLE Switch port speed duplex 1 10 full Switch port VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Port Security Commands of CLI show Show port security status SYNTAX civic Parameter port Show MAC addresses learned by port security switch Show port security switch status EXAMPLE Switch port security show port 1 MAC Address VID State Time of Addition Age Hold Time lt none gt Switch port security Switch port security show switch Users L Limit Control 8 802 1X D DHCP Snooping V Voice VLAN Port Users State MAC Count 1 Disabled 0 2 Disabled 0 3 Disabled 0 4 Disabled 0 5 Disabled 0 6 Disabled 0 7 Disabled 0 8 Disabled 0 9A Disabled 0 10A Disabled 0 9B Disabled 0 10B Disabled 0 Switch port security Privilege Commands of CLI group Configure a privilege level group SYNTAX Group lt group name gt Parameter lt group name gt privilege group name EXAMPLE Switch privilege group V2 338 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Show Switch privilege Show privilege configuration SYNTAX show EXAMPLE Switch pr
233. es Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed LLC Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames SMAC Displays the OUI field of Source MAC address i e first three octet byte of MAC address DMAC Specify the type of Destination MAC addresses for incoming frame Possible values are Any All types of Destination MAC addresses are allowed Unicast Only Unicast MAC addresses are allowed Multicast Only Multicast MAC addresses are allowed 160 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Broadcast Only Broadcast MAC addresses are allowed The default value is Any VID Indicates VLAN ID either a specific VID or range of VIDs VID can be in the range 1 4095 or Any PCP It means Priority Code Point Valid value of PCP are specific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or Any DEI It means Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0 1 or Any Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS Class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Drop Precedence
234. es Web registration is preferred You can register your Vigor device via http www draytek com Due to the continuous evolution of DrayTek technology all devices will be regularly upgraded Please consult the DrayTek web site for more information on newest firmware tools and documents http www draytek com VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide iii European Community Declarations Manufacturer DrayTek Corp Address No 26 Fu Shing Road HuKou Township HsinChu Industrial Park Hsin Chu County Taiwan 303 Product VigorSwitch Series Device The product conforms to the requirements of Electro Magnetic Compatibility EMC Directive 2004 108 EC by complying with the requirements set forth in EN55022 Class A and EN55024 Class A The product conforms to the requirements of Low Voltage LVD Directive 2006 95 EC by complying with the requirements set forth in EN6095 1 Regulatory Information Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference w
235. es to configure the Port s alias or any descriptions for the Port Identity It provides user to write down an alphanumeric string describing the full name and version identification for the system s hardware type software version and networking application Link 40 The current link state is displayed graphically Green indicates the link is up and red that it is down VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Speed Current Provides the current link speed of the port Type Set the speed and duplex of the port In speed if the media is 1Gbps fiber it is always 1000Mbps and the duplex is full only If the media is TP the Speed Duplex is comprised of the combination of speed mode 10 100 1000Mbps and duplex mode full duplex and half duplex The following table summarized the function the media supports Auto v Disabled Auto 10Mbps HDX 10Mbps FDX 100Mbps HDX 100Mbps FDX 1Gbps FDX In Auto mode no default value In Forced mode default value depends on your setting Flow Control When Auto Speed is selected on a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used The Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed and the Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Ne
236. ete Click it to delete the selected community setting Community Display the community access string User Name Display a string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to Source IP Display the SNMP access source IP address Source Mask Display the source address mask Add new community Click it to add a new community SNMPv1 v2 Communities to Security Configuration Delete Community User Name Source Mask 0000 Add new community Apply Community Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The community string will be treated as security name and map a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string User Name The length of User Name string is restricted to 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Source IP Indicates the SNMP access source address A particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet when combined with source mask Source Mask Indicates the SNMP access source address mask After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 2 21 SNMP Users Function name Users Function description This function is used to configure SNMPv3 user The Entry index key is User Name To create a new User Name account please
237. evices may include but are not limited to IP Communication Controllers other communication related servers or any device requiring basic services as defined in TIA 1057 Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration device location network policy power management and inventory management LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II The LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II definition is applicable to all endpoint products that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated with a particular end user Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class Class I and are extended to include aspects related to media streaming Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to Voice Media Gateways Conference Bridges Media Servers and similar Discovery services defined in this class include media type specific network layer policy discovery LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class IM VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide The LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class II definition is applicable to all endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP media Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class I and Media Endpoint Class II classes and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices Example product categories expec
238. f GMT You have to select the time zone first and then perform time sync via NTP because the switch will combine this time zone offset and updated NTP time to come out the local time otherwise you will not able to get the correct time The switch supports configurable time zone from 12 to 13 step 1 hour Default Time zone 8 Hrs In this function only administrator can create modify or delete the username and password Administrator can modify other guest identities password without confirming the password but it is 34 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide necessary to modify the administrator equivalent identity Guest equivalent identity can modify his password only Please note that you must confirm administrator guest identity in the field of Authorization in advance before configuring the username and password Only one administrator is allowed to exist and unable to be deleted In addition up to 4 guest accounts can be created The default setting for user account is Username Password Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview Cl admin admin Users Configuration gt System Information NTP amp Time Configuration Account Privilege Level gt IP gt Port gt Loop Protection Trap Event Severity gt SNMP gt Syslog SMTP General Setup gt sFlow Agent Configuration Security User Name Privilege Level admin 15 Maintenance Parameter descri
239. fault compatibility value is IGMP Auto RV Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a link The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 QI Query Interval The Query Interval variable denotes the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 255 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 87 88 QRI Query Response Interval The Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds LLQI Last Listener Query Interval The Last Listener Query Interval is the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address Specific Queries sent in response to Version 1 Multicast Listener Done messages It is also the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address and Source Specific Query messages The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last listener query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second URI Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a node s initial report of interest in a multicast address The allowed range is 0 to 31744 s
240. ff Switch vcl show protocol vlan Switch vcl Syntax delete lt protocol vlan gt lt snap gt lt oui address gt lt protocol ID gt Parameter lt protocol vlan gt Delete protocol based VLAN lt snap gt Delete protocol based VLAN SNAP protocol to group mapping lt oui address gt OUI address format 00 40 c7 lt protocol ID gt Protocol ID is the Ethernet type field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP EXAMPLE Switch vcl protocol vlan protocol snap 00 40 c7 0x0000 snapvlanOol Switch vcl show protocol vlan Protocol Type Protocol Value Group Name SNAP OUI 00 40 c7 PID 0x0 snapvlan0l Switch vcl delete protocol vlan protocol snap 00 40 c7 0x0000 Switch vcl show protocol vlan Switch vcl To configure MAC based VLAN membership Syntax mac vlan lt mac address gt lt vlan ID gt lt port list gt Parameter lt mac address gt MAC address format Oa 1b 2c 3d 4e 5f lt vlan ID gt VLAN ID available value is from 1 to 4094 lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 EXAMPLE Switch vcl mac vlan 0a 1b 2c 3d 4e 5f 5 9 10 Switch vcl show mac vlan MAC Address VID Ports Oa lb 2c 3d 4e 5f 5 9 10 Switch vcl protocol vlan To configure protocol based VLAN 372 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Syntax protocol vlan lt protocol gt lt ethernet gt lt ether type gt lt protocol based vlan name gt Parame
241. figuration on Computer C 2 The uplink connection function fails to work gt The connection ports on another must be connection ports Please check if connection ports are used on that Managed Switch gt Please check the uplink setup of the Managed Switch to verify the uplink function is enabled 3 The console interface cannot appear on the console port connection gt The COM port default parameters are Baud Rate 115200 Data Bits 8 Parity Bits None Stop Bit A Flow Control None Please check the COM port property in the terminal program And if the parameters are changed please set the COM configuration to the new setting VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide gt Check the RS 232 cable is connected well on the console port of the Managed Switch and COM port of PC gt Check if the COM of the PC is enabled 4 How to configure the Managed Switch The Hyperterm is the terminal program in Win95 98 NT Users can also use any other terminal programs in Linux Unix to configure the Managed Switch Please refer to the user guide of that terminal program But the COM port parameters baud rate data bits parity bits flow control must be the same as the setting of the console port of the Managed Switch VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 237 238 This page is left blank VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Telnet Command Reference This chapter also gives you a general description for accessing telnet and describes
242. figure the 802 1X mode SYNTAX mode lt disable gt lt ensable gt Parameter disable Disable access management mode operation enable Enable access management mode operation EXAMPLE Switch 802 1X mode enable Switch 802 1X showShow 802 1X information 250 SYNTAX show lt config gt lt statistics gt Parameter config Show access management configuration statistics Show access management statistics EXAMPLE witch access show config Access Management Mode Enabled W WEB HTTPS S SNMP T TELNET SSH Index Start IP Address UDP Port Switch access show statistics End IP Address Client Receive Allow Discard HTTP 0 0 0 HTTPS 0 0 0 SNMP 0 0 0 TELNET 0 0 0 SSH 0 0 0 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Account Commands of CLI add Add or modify user account SYNTAX add guest lt 15 gt lt word gt Parameter lt 1 15 gt User privilege level lt WORD gt Up to 32 characters to identify the user name EXAMPLE Switch account add 1 12 Switch account show User Name Privilege Level admin 15 12 i Switch account delete To create a new operator user When you create a new operator user you must type in password and confirm password SYNTAX delete lt WORD gt Parameter Up to 32 characters to identify the user name EXAMPLE Switch account delete 12 Switch account show User Name Privilege Level Switch account
243. for User Name Privacy Password The length of Privacy Password is restricted to 8 32 After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 2 26 System Log General Setup Function name System Log General Setup Function description The Syslog is a standard for logging program messages It allows separation of the software that generates messages from the system that stores them and the software that reports and analyzes them It can be used as well a generalized informational analysis and debugging messages It is supported by a wide variety of devices and receivers across multiple platforms VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Ove PONESE NTP amp Time Configuration gt Account gt IP gt Port gt Loop Protection Trap Event Severity gt SNMP Syslog seneral Setup Log Detailed Log SMTP General Setup gt sFlow Agent Configuration SPS TS 2 eS FF System Log Configuration Server Mode Disabled Server Address 1 Server Address 2 Syslog Level Info Security Maintenance Parameters description Server Mode Indicates the server mode operation When the mode operation is enabled the syslog message will send out to syslog server The syslog protocol is based on UDP communication and received on UDP port 514 and the syslog server will not send acknowledgment
244. from 10 10 132 20 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide icmp_seq 0 time Oms icmp_seq 1 time Oms icmp_seq 2 time Oms icmp_seq 3 time Oms icmp_seq 4 time Oms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad 2 5 12 Diagnostics VeriPHY Function name Diagnostics VeriPHY Function description The function is used for running the VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Press to run the diagnostics This will take approximately 5 seconds If all ports are selected this can take approximately 15 seconds When completed the page refreshes automatically and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table Note that VeriPHY is only accurate for cables of length 7 140 meters 10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running VeriPHY Therefore running VeriPHY on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview System Configuration Security Restart Device gt Firmware gt Save Restore gt Export import Y Diagnostics Ping Pings Parameters description VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics __ Cable Status PairB LengthB 1 SwHwOantnannhun Port The port where you are requesting VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Cable Status Port Port number Pair The status of the cable pair Length The length in meters of the cable pair After finished the above settings click Start to pe
245. g 800 Mbps 154 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 3 60 QoS Tag Remarking Function name QoS Tag Remarking Function description The function is used to provide user to get an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for all switch ports Others ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Y Overview Seep gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN gt GARP gt GVRP Y QoS Port Classification Port Policing E Port Scheduler Port Shaping Port DSCP DSCP Based QoS v assified assified assified assified lassified assified assified assified assified IS ko 100 N Im o e w N e assified assified assified assified assified lassified v EbRSE I ei e A A a A a len le l Parameters description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure tag remarking Mode Shows the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values Default Use default PCP DEI values Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 155 2 3 61 QoS DSCP Function name QoS DSCP Function description The function is used to set the QoS Port DSCP configuration for the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settin
246. g Tree Bridge Status Function description The function is used to provide a status overview of all STP bridge instances The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge instance where the column displays the following information Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of STP Bridges Auto refresh Refresh Overview g Refresh System 2 Root Topology Bridge ID Topology Change ID Port Cost Flag Last Y Aggregation Static Trunk gt LACP Spanning Tree Bridge Settings MSTI Mapping MSTI Priorities CIST Ports MSTI Ports Port Status Port Statistics gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping Ee Re a E Gost bast 50 00 50 00 CIST 00 50 7F F0 C0 49 00 50 7F F0 C0 49 i Parameters description MSTI The Bridge Instance This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status Bridge ID The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance Root ID The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge 82 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Root Port The switch port currently assigned the root port role Root Cost Root Path Cost For the Root Bridge it is zero For all other Bridges it is the sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge Topology Flag The current state of the Topology Change Flag of this Bridge instance Topology Change Last The time since last Topology Change occurred 2 3 11 Spa
247. gned name for this managed node By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character And the first or last character must not be a minus sign The allowed string length is 0 to 255 System Location The physical location of this node e g telephone closet 3rd floor The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration 2 2 3 System Information CPU Load Function name CPU Load Function description This page displays the CPU load using an SVG graph Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Slk a a a a i al Auto Logout Off CPU Load Auto refresh V 100ms 57 lsec 24 10sec 26 all numbers running average Overview E gt System Information Information Device Name CPU Coad NTP amp Time Configuration gt Account gt IP gt Port gt Loop Protection Trap Event Severity gt SNMP gt Syslog SMTP General Setup gt sFlow Agent Configuration Security Maintenance The load is measured as averaged over the last 100ms 1sec and 10 seconds intervals The last 120 samples are graphed and the
248. gotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed Maximum Frame Size This module offers 1518 9600 Bytes length to make the long packet Excessive Collision Mode There are two modes to choose when excessive collision happened in half duplex condition as below Discard The Discard mode determines whether the MAC drop frames after an excessive collision has occurred If yes a frame is dropped after excessive collision This is IEEE Standard 802 3 half duplex flow control operation Restart The Restart mode determines whether the MAC retransmits frames after an excessive collision has occurred If set a frame is not dropped after excessive collisions but the backoff sequence is restarted This is a violation of IEEE Standard 802 3 but is useful in non dropping half duplex flow control operation Power Control VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide The Usage column shows the current percentage of the power consumption per port The Configured column allows for changing the power savings mode parameters per port 41 Disabled All power savings mechanisms disabled ActiPHY Link down power savings enabled PerfectReach Link up power savings enabled Enabled Both link up and link down power savings enabled After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration 2 2 10 Port Traffic Overview
249. gout Configure time of inactivity before automatic logout class Action of QoS class for this QCE classified dscp Action of DSCP for this QCE dei Specify whether frames can hit the action according to DEI dmac Configure destination MAC address for this QCE dp Action of drop precedence level for this QCE VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide dport Configure destination UDP TCP port range for this ACE dscp Configure DSCP for this QCE end Finish QCE setting and return to QoS mode exit Exit from current mode fragment Specify the fragment offset settings for this QCE help Show available commands history Show a list of previously run commands ip protocol Configure IP protocol for this QCE logout Disconnect pcp Specify whether frames can hit the action according to PCP quit Disconnect restore Restore running configuration save Save running configuration show Show QCE sip onfigure source IP address for this QCE smac Configure source MAC address for this QCE sport Configure Source UDP TCP port range for this QCE tag Specify whether frames can hit the action according to the 802 1Q tagged vid Specify the VLAN ID filter for this QCE EXAMPLE Switch qos qce 1 1 1 any Switch qos qce any auto logout 10 Username queue shaper Queue shaper show SYNTAX queue shaper lt excess gt lt port list gt lt queue list gt disable Parameter excess Configure the port queue excess bandwidth mode mode Configure the port que
250. gs for all switch ports Auto Logout Of Ove Pein vnvvpny gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN gt GARP GVRP Y QoS Pot Classification Port Policing Port Scheduler Port Shaping Port Tag Remarking Port DSCP DSCP Based QoS Parameters description v QoS Port DSCP Configuration Port Ingress Egress Translate Classi ont oln e wns ZS f Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable _Rewrite Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable YR RS RR NR RIR Disable Disable ninntin E Dinni ENEE EENEN Port The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure DSCP ingress and egress settings Ingress In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for individual ports There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress 1 Translate Enable the Ingress Translation click the checkbox 2 Classify Classification for a port have 4 different values e Disable No Ingress DSCP Classification e DSCP 0 Classify if incoming or translated if enabled DSCP is 0 e Selected Classify only selected DSCP for whic
251. gt Parameter lt protocol gt Protocol based VLAN ethertype protocol to group mapping lt snap gt Protocol based VLAN SNAP protocol to group mapping VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 373 lt oui address gt OUI address format 00 40 c7 lt protocol ID gt Protocol ID is the Ethernet type field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP lt protocol based vlan name gt Up to 16 characters to describe protocol based VLAN group name EXAMPLE Switch vcl protocol vlan protocol snap 00 40 c7 0x0000 snapv1l01 Switch vcl show protocol vlan Protocol Type Protocol Value Group Name SNAP OUI 00 40 c7 PID 0x0 snapvl01 LLC DSAP 0x00 SSAP 0Oxff licv13 Ethernet ETYPE 0x600 ethevin3 Group Name VID Ports provla0d 3 PR Switch vcl Syntax protocol vlan lt vian gt lt protocol based vlan name gt lt vlan ID gt lt port list gt Parameter lt vlan gt Protocol based VLAN group to VLAN mapping lt protocol based vlan name gt Up to 16 characters to describe protocol based VLAN group name lt vlan ID gt VLAN ID available value is from 1 to 4094 lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 EXAMPLE Switch vcl protocol vlan vlan protvlal 5 7 10 Switch vcl show protocol vlan Protocol Type Protocol Value Group Name SNAP OUI 00 40 c7 PID 0x0 snapvl0l LLC DSAP 0x00 SSAP 0Oxff licv13 Ethernet ETYPE 0x600 ethevin3 Group Name VID Ports protvlal 5 7 10 provla0 3 7 10 Switch
252. gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 disable Disable Router Port enable Enable Router Port EXAMPLE Switch igmp router 1 disable Switch igmp Set per VLAN Robustness Variable SYNTAX Rv lt vlan list gt lt 1 255 gt Parameter lt vlan list gt VLAN list available value is from 1 to 4094 format 1 3 5 lt 1 255 gt Range 1 255 Default 2 EXAMPLE Switch igmp rv 1 2 Switch igmp Show IGMP Snooping information SYNTAX show lt config gt lt statistics gt Parameter config Show IGMP Snooping Configuration groups Entries in the IGMP Group Table ssm Entries in the IGMPv3 Information Table status Show IGMP Snooping status version Show IGMP Working Querier Host Version currently EXAMPLE Switch igmp show config IGMP Mode Disabled IGMP Flooding Control Enabled IGMP Leave Proxy Disabled IGMP Proxy Disabled Port Router Dynamic Router Fast Leave Group Throttling Number L Disabled No Disabled Unlimited 2 Disabled No Disabled Unlimited 3 Disabled No Disabled Unlimited 4 Disabled No Disabled Unlimited 5 Disabled No Disabled Unlimited VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 279 6 Disabled No Disabled Unlimited 7 Disabled No Disabled Unlimited 8 Disabled No Disabled Unlimited 9A Disabled No Disabled Unlimited 10A Disabled No Disabled Unlimited 9B Disabled No Disabled Unlimited 10B Disabled
253. gt Account gt IP gt Port gt Loop Protection Trap Event Severity Y SNMP System General Setup Communities Users Groups Views Access gt Syslog Parameters description Trap Version v Trap Host Configuration v3 m Server IP 0 0 0 0 UDP Port 162 Community Security Name Trap Version Severity Level Alet w Security Level Auth NoPriv SHA D Authentication Protocol Authentication Password Privacy Protocol Privacy Password Apply You may choose v1 v2c or v3 trap Server IP Type the SNMP Host IP address UDP Port Type the port number Default 162 Community Security Name The length of Community Security Name string is restricted to 1 32 Severity Level Indicates what kind of message will send to Security Level Possible modes are Info Send information warnings and errors Warning Send warnings and errors Error Send errors Security Level There are three kinds of choices NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy Authentication Protocol You can choose MD5 or SHA for authentication Authentication Password The length of MD5 Authentication Password is restricted to 8 32 The length of SHA Authentication Password is restricted to 8 40 Privacy Protocol You can set DES encryption
254. h classification is enabled as specified in DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP e All Classify all DSCP Egress Port Egress Rewriting can be one of the following 156 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Disable v Enable Remap DP Unaware Remap DP Aware 1 Disable No Egress rewrite Enable Rewrite enable without remapped 3 Remap DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 62 QoS DSCP Based QoS Function name QoS DSCP Based QoS Function description The function is used to configure the DSCP Based QoS mode for the basic QoS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switches Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off Overview gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN gt GARP gt GVRP Y QoS Port Classification Port Policing Port Scheduler Port Shaping Port Tag Remarking Port DSCP DSCP Based QoS Parameters description o MEIE olol sl elfe KRE o lt o lt o lt o lt 10 AF11 O 11 o lt o lt gt gt DSCP Maximum number of support ed DSCP values are 64 Trust Click to check if the DSCP v
255. hcp relay Configure DHCP relay server SYNTAX server lt ip address gt Parameter lt ip address gt DHCP server IP address EXAMPLE Switch dhcp relay server 192 168 1 100 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide show Show DHCP relay information SYNTAX set entry lt config gt lt statistics gt Parameter config Show DHCP relay configuration statistics Show DHCP relay statistics set entry lt vid gt vid range from to 4094 EXAMPLE Switch dhcp relay show config DHCP Relay Mode Disabled DHCP Relay Server 192 168 1 100 DHCP Relay Information Mode Disabled DHCP Relay Information Policy Replace Switch dhcp relay show statistics Server Statistics Transmit to Server d 0 Transmit Error Receive from Server 4 0 Receive Missing Agent Option Receive Missing Circuit ID 0 Receive Missing Remote ID Receive Bad Circuit ID 0 Receive Bad Remote ID Client Statistics Transmit to Client 0 Transmit Error 0 Receive from Client 0 Receive Agent Option 0 Replace Agent Option 0 Keep Agent Option 0 Drop Agent Option 0 S witch dhcp relay VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 265 DHCP SNOOPING Commands of CLI clear Clear DHCP snooping statistics SYNTAX Clear lt statistics gt lt port list gt Parameter statistics Clear DHCP snooping statistics lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 EXAMPLE Switch dh
256. he type of frame to look for incoming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 0xFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed LLC Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS Class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Drop Precedence Level if a frame matches the QCE VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column Conflict Displays QCE status It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not available in that case it shows conflict status as Yes otherwise it is always No Please note that conflict can be resolved by releasing the resource required by the QCE and pressing Refresh button Auto refresh Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Resolve Conflict Click to release the resources required to add QCL entry incase conflict status fo
257. her Limit Control is enabled on this port Both this and the Global Mode must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect Notice that other modules may still use the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port Limit The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port This number cannot exceed 1024 If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The stackswitch is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security enabled port Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses Action VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide If Limit is reached the switch can take one of the following actions None Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action Trap If Limit 1 MAC addresses are seen on the port send an SNMP trap If Aging is disabled only one SNMP trap will be sent but with Aging enabled new SNMP traps will be sent every time the limit gets exceeded Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port shut down the port This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port and no new address will be learned Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port by disconnecti
258. his sub netted network and is considered a physical network in an autonomous network So it owns a network IP address which may looks like 168 1 2 0 With the subnet mask a bigger network can be cut into small pieces of network If we want to have more than two independent networks in a worknet a partition to the network must be performed In this case subnet mask must be applied VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 23 For different network applications the subnet mask may look like 255 255 255 240 This means it is a small network accommodating a maximum of 15 nodes in the network Default gateway For the routed packet if the destination is not in the routing table all the traffic is put into the device with the designated IP address known as default router Basically it is a routing policy The gateway setting is used for Trap Events Host only in the switch For assigning an IP address to the switch you just have to check what the IP address of the network will be connected with the switch Use the same network address and append your host address to it Dray Tek VigorSwitch G2260 Auto Logout 10Min v g aitak IP Configuration Overview E3 2 Configured Current gt System Information n lien v Information ae ee Device Name IP Address 192 168 1 226 192 168 28 16 CPU Load IP Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 eee N IP Gateway 0 0 0 0 192 168 28 254 gt Account vF WANI
259. how statistics 1 Port 1 Statistics Receive Packets Transmit Packets Rx Discover 0 Tx Discover 0 Rx Offer 0 Tx Offer 0 Rx Request 0 Tx Request Rx Decline 0 Tx Decline Rx ACK 0O Tx ACK Rx NAK 0 Tx NAK Rx Release 0 Tx Release 0 Rx Inform 0 Tx Inform 0 Rx Lease Query 0 Tx Lease Query 0 Rx Lease Unassigned 0 Tx Lease Unassigned 0 Rx Lease Unknown 0 Tx Lease Unknown 0 Rx Lease Active 0 Tx Lease Active 0 Switch dhcp snooping VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 267 Diagnostic Commands of CLI ping a host or gateway SYNTAX clear lt ip hostname gt lt 60 1400 gt Parameter lt ip hostname gt Hostname or IP address lt 60 1400 gt Size of ICMP echo packet EXAMPLE Uses the ICMP protocol s mandatory ECHO_REQUEST datagram to elicit an ICMP ECHO_RESPONSE from Switch diagnostic ping 192 168 1 6 60 PING server 192 168 1 6 recvfrom Operation timed out ping host or gateway SYNTAX Ping6 lt ip hostname gt lt 60 1400 gt Parameter lt ip hostname gt Hostname or IP address lt 60 1400 gt Size of ICMP echo packet EXAMPLE Uses the ICMP protocol s mandatory ECHO_REQUEST datagramto elicit an ICMP ECHO_RESPONSE from a PING6 server 44ed d80 e816 fc80 sendto Switch diagnostic ping 192 168 1 1 60 veriphy Run cable diagnostics SYNTAX veriphy lt port list gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 EXAMPLE Switch diagnostic ver
260. ibute database and GARP Information Propagation GIP to communicate among switches and end stations With GID information and GIP GVRP state machine maintain the contents of Dynamic VLAN Registration Entries for each VLAN and propagate these information to other GVRP aware devices to setup and update their knowledge database the set of VLANs associated with currently active members and through which ports these members can be reached Function name Aggregation Static Trunk Function description The function is used to configure the basic GVRP Configuration settings for all switch ports Auto Logout Off Global Configuration Auto refresh Overview A ene piig gt MLD Snooping GVRP Mode Disable v gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Fase Dabs base Port GVRP Mode GVRP rrole Join Tx Count Leave Tx Count Port Configuration 1 gt VLAN r ti Disable v Disable v 0 0 gt GARP Y GVRP Disable Disable General Setup Disable x Disable v 2mos Disable V Disable gt Single IP rs Easy Port Mirroring Disable v Disable Disable v Disable UPnP Disable Disable v Security Maintenance Disable v Disable Parameters description Global Configuration GVRP Mode GVRP Mode is a global setting to enable the GVRP globally select Enable from menu and to disable GVRP globally select Disable In stacking this config
261. icates the access management mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable access management mode operation Disabled Disable access management mode operation Delete Check to delete the entry Start IP address Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry End IP address Indicates the end IP address for the access management entry HTTP HTTPS Indicates that the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS interface if the host IP address matches the IP address range provided in the entry SNMP Indicates that the host can access the switch from SNMP interface if the host IP address matches the IP address range provided in the entry TELNET SSH Indicates that the host can access the switch from TELNETY YSSH interface if the host IP address matches the IP address range provided in the entry Add new entry 218 Create a new entry VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Access Management Configuration Mode Disabled Delete p gt Start Address _End iPAddrass 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 4 25 Access Management Statistics Function name Access Management Statistics Function description The function shows you a detailed statistics of the Access Management including HTTP HTTPS SSH TELNET and SSH Dray Tek
262. ics Static Trunk gt LACP z gt v1 v2 p VLAN Querier Host Querier Queries Queries Papaning tee ID Version Version Status Transmitted Received Repoits Reports Y IGMP Snooping Received Received General Setup VLAN General Setup 4 Port Group Filtering 1 Status Groups Information IPv4 SSM Information gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN Router Port Parameters description VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry Querier Version Working Querier Version currently Host Version Working Host Version currently Querier Status Shows the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE Queries Transmitted The number of Transmitted Queries Queries Received The number of Received Queries V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide V3 Reports Received The number of Received V3 Reports V2 Leaves Received The number of Received V2 Leaves Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button Clear The simple counts will be reset to zero when user use mouse to click on Clear button After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings w
263. ide 359 SYSLOG of CLI Clear To clear the syslog entry Syntax clear Parameter none EXAMPLE Switch syslog clear Switch syslog Level To configure the syslog level Syntax level lt syslog severity level gt Parameter lt syslog severity level gt To configure the Syslog severity level the available value is from 0 to 7 lt 0 gt Emergency system is unusable lt 1 gt Alert action must be taken immediately lt 2 gt Critical critical conditions lt 3 gt Error error conditions lt 4 gt Warning warning conditions lt 5 gt Notice normal but significant condition lt 6 gt Informational informational messages lt 7 gt Debug debug level messages EXAMPLE Switch syslog level 7 Switch syslog show config Mode Enabled Address 192 168 20 33 Level Debug Switch syslog Mode To configure syslog mode with enable or disable Syntax mode lt disable enable gt Parameter lt disable gt Disable syslog mode 360 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Server lt enable gt Enable syslog mode EXAMPLE Switch syslog mode enable Switch syslog show config Mode Enabled Address 192 168 20 33 Level Debug Switch syslog To configure the syslog server IP address Syntax server lt ip hostname gt Parameter lt ip hostname gt Syslog server IP address or host name EXAMPLE Switch syslog server
264. ill not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the use is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different form that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device may accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 1 INTOGUCHION iiiiccccintecniwencuiccdencaantsenduacsdesceacadancucsddensedceverduandsandwadddendeiadsencwadeusaada 9 TOV EMVICW A E costs t ce Sopcast TA nas dean cert ened co tht evade es eetergala epee tase 9 t2 Featurest n fannie ee ian Aen ian T dae A 11 13 Packing Eist ict sita veg Avail a Bee Ris evel Meee veil 12 1 4 LED Indicators and Connectors cccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeesaaeeeeeeeseaeeesaaeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeneeeeeaes 13 1 5 Hardware Installation 0 0 aa er ean eya a A Saia T ARAARA TEENAA T An NARR 14 1 5 1 Connecting the SFP
265. ill take effect 2 3 17 IGMP Snooping Groups Information Function name IGMP Snooping Groups Information Function description After you complete to set the IGMP Snooping function then you could let the switch to display the IGMP Snooping Group Information Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on this page The IGMP Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP Group Table The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of pee IGMP Snooping Groups Information Auto refresh Refresh Overview v AYyreyauurr Static Trunk gt LACP gt Spanning Tree Y IGMP Snooping General Setup VLAN General Setup Port Group Filtering Status IPv4 SSM Information gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN Start from VLAN f1 and group address 224 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page Lis lt _ VLAN ID Groups 1 No more entries Parameters description VLAN ID VLAN
266. in the VLAN RV Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a link The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 QI Query Interval The Query Interval variable denotes the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 255 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds QRI Query Response Interval The Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds LLQI Last Listener Query Interval The Last Listener Query Interval is the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address Specific Queries sent in response to Version 1 Multicast Listener Done messages It is also the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address and Source Specific Query messages The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last listener query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second URI Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a node s initial report of interest in a multicast address The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second
267. ing General Setup VLAN General Setup Port Group Filtering Status Groups Information gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN No more entries Parameters description VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group Group Group address of the group displayed Port Switch port number Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button 2 3 19 MLD Snooping General Setup Curiously enough a network node that acts as a source of IPv6 multicast traffic is only an indirect participant in MLD snooping it just provides multicast traffic and MLD doesn t interact with it Note however that in an application like desktop conferencing a network node may act as both a source and an MLD host but MLD interacts with that node only in its role as an MLD host A source node creates multicast traffic by sending packets to a multicast address In IPv6 addresses with the first eight bits set that is FF as the first two
268. ing UPnP Single IP Configuration Parameters description Mode The parameter lets you disable the SIP function or set the device become a Master role or Slave role Possible modes VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide are Disable Disable operation of Single IP Management Master Enable Single IP Management and to be a Master Switch The role is root User connects to the Master and can control the Slaves in the same SIP group Slave Enable Single IP Management and to be a Slave Switch The role is slave User connects to the switch what is a slave via Master management GUI Group Name The parameter lets you set the name of the Single IP group The available value up to 64 characters describing group name After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 69 Single IP Information Function name Single IP Information Function description The function is to display the Single IP information what you set on the switch Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout 0 x Overview rm gt IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN gt GARP gt GVRP gt Qos Y Single IP General Setup Easy Port Mirroring UPnP Parameters description Index a Auto refresh _ MAC Address No Single IP information found The ID of the active
269. ion 82 QoS Quality of Service Spanning Tree VLAN Port Trunking Bandwidth Control Port Security SNMP RMON IGMP Snooping capability via the intelligent software It is suitable for both metro LAN and office application In this switch Port 21 and Port 24 include two types of media TP and SFP Fiber LC BiDi LC this port supports 10 100 1000Mbps TP or 1000Mbps SFP Fiber with auto detected function 1000Mbps SFP Fiber transceiver is used for high speed connection expansion 1000Mbps LC Multi Mode SFP Fiber transceiver 1000Mbps LC 10km SFP Fiber transceiver 1000Mbps LC 30km SFP Fiber transceiver 1000Mbps LC 50km SFP Fiber transceiver 1000Mbps BiDi LC 20km 1550nm SFP Fiber WDM transceiver gt 1000Mbps BiDi LC 20km 1310nm SFP Fiber WDM transceiver 10 100 1000Mbps TP is a standard Ethernet port that meets all IEEE 802 3 u x z Gigabit Fast Ethernet specifications 1000Mbps SFP Fiber transceiver is a Gigabit Ethernet port that fully complies with all IEEE 802 3z and 1000Base SX LX standards 1000Mbps Single Fiber WDM BiDi transceiver is designed with an optic Wavelength Division Multiplexing WDM technology that transports bi directional full duplex signal over a single fiber simultaneously VV V WV For upgrading firmware please refer to the Section 2 5 2 for more details The switch will not stop operating while upgrading firmware and after that the configuration keeps unchanged Below shows key features
270. ion EEE Enabled 3 4 Account IP Port General Setup Traffic Overview Detailed Statistics QoS Statistics SFP Information Loop Protection Trap Event Severity SNMP Syslog SMTP General Setup sFlow Agent Configuration Security Maintenance Parameter description Port The switch port number of the logical EFE port VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 47 EEE Enabled Controls whether EEE is enabled for this switch port EEE Urgent Queues Queues set will activate transmission of frames as soon as any data is available Otherwise the queue will postpone the transmission until 3000 bytes are ready to be transmitted After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration 2 2 15 Loop Protection General Setup The loop protection is used to detect the presence of traffic When switch receives packet s looping detection frame MAC address the same as oneself from port show Loop detection happens The port will be locked when it received the looping detection frames If you want to resume the locked port please find out the looping path and take off the looping path then select the resume the locked port and click on Resume to turn on the locked ports Function name General Setup
271. iphy 1 Starting VeriPHY please wait Port Pair A Length Pair B Length Switch diagnostic 1 OK 255 OK 255 OK Length 268 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide EEE of CLI mode show To configure the port Energy Efficient Ethernet mode Syntax mode lt port list gt lt disable enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from to 14 format 1 3 5 lt disable gt Disable Energy Efficient Ethernet lt enable gt Enable Energy Efficient Ethernet Default Setting None EXAMPLE Switch eee mode 3 5 enable Switch eee To show the port EEE mode configuration status Syntax show Parameter None EXAMPLE Switch eee show Port Mode Urgent Queues 1 Disabled none 2 Disabled none 3 Enabled none 4 Enabled none 5 Enabled none 6 Disabled none 7 Disabled none 8 Disabled none Oo Disabled none 10 Disabled none Switch eee urgent queue To configure the port EEE urgent queue Syntax urgent queue lt port list gt lt queue list gt lt disable enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from to 14 format 1 3 5 lt queue list gt Queue list format 1 3 5 lt disable gt Queue will postpone the transmission until 3000 bytes are ready to be transmitted lt enable gt Queues set will activate transition of frames as soon as any data is available VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 269 270 EXA
272. ironment already then the switch will show Set leavetimer failed Show To show the GARP configuration Syntax show lt statistic gt lt port list gt Parameter lt statistic gt Show the basic GARP port statistics lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 EXAMPLE Switch garp show statistic 3 5 lt cr gt Switch garp show statistic 3 5 Port Peer MAC Failed Count Switch garp Switch garp NOTE If you didn t set the GARP environment already then the switch will show empty field value GVRP of CLI clear To clear the basic GVRP port statistics Syntax clear lt port list gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 EXAMPLE Switch gvrp clear 3 5 Switch gvrp NOTE If you set the GVRP on port then you could show the port GVRP statistics information or clear all record on port control To enable or disable GVRP globally Syntax control lt disable enable gt Parameter lt disable gt To disable GVRP function globally lt enable gt To enable GVRP function globally 274 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide mode rrole Show EXAMPLE Switch gvrp control enable Switch gvrp To enable or disable GVRP function on port Syntax mode lt port list gt lt disable enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 forma
273. is displayed for each private VLAN ID To include a port in a Private VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the Private VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Adding a New Private VLAN Click to add a new private VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the private VLAN can be configured as needed The allowed range for a private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range Any values outside this range are not accepted and a warning message appears Click Reset to discard the incorrect entry The Private VLAN is enabled when you click Apply The button can be used to undo the addition of new Private VLANS After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 136 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 3 46 VLAN Private VLANs Port Isolation Port Isolation provides for an apparatus and method to isolate ports on layer 2 switches on the same VLAN to restrict traffic flow The apparatus comprises a switch having said plurality of ports each port configured as a protected port or a non protected port An address table memory stores an address table having a destination address and port number pair A forwarding map generator generates a forwarding map which is responsive to a destination address of a data packet The method for isolating ports on a layer 2 switch comprises co
274. isabled Logging v Disabled v Disabled v Shute Disabl Disabl Disabled Disabled v Disabl Disabled I Disabled w Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Policy ID Select the policy to apply to this port The allowed values are 1 through 8 The default value is 1 Action Select whether forwarding is permitted Permit or denied Deny The default value is Permit Rate Limiter ID Select which rate limiter to apply on this port The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 16 The default value is Disabled Port Redirect Select which port frames are copied on The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number The default value is Disabled Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Logging Specify the logging operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames received on the port are not logged The default value is Disabled Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled If
275. ission priority of voice traffic and voice quality Function name Voice VLAN General Setup Function description The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN then the switch can classify and schedule network traffic It is recommended that there must be two VLANs on a port one for voice one for data Before connecting the IP device to the switch the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly It should be configured through its own GUI VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview LLDP a gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base Y VLAN VLAN Membership Ports Switch Status Port Status gt Private VLANs gt MAC based VLAN gt Protocol based VLAN Voice VLAN oul gt GARP gt GVRP gt Qos Parameters description Voice VLAN Configuration Mode Disabled x VLAN ID aooo oo e Aging Time 86400 seconds Traffic Class 7 High v Port Configuration Disabled Disabled v Disabled Disabled OUI Disabled Disabled OUI Disabled Disabled OUI Disabled Disabled Our Voice VLAN Configuration Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filtering Possible modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN mode operation VLA
276. itch smtp username admin admin Switch smtp show VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 351 352 Mail Server alarmserver User Name admin Password KKK KKK KK Severity level Alert Sender alarmsender Return Path administor0l Email Adress e TO22168 20 422 Email Adress 2 alarmserver Email Adress 3 Email Adress Email Adress 5 Email Adress 6 Switch smtp VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide SNMP of CLI Access To configure the SNMP access the command adds an SNMPv3 access entry Community Syntax access lt group name gt lt security model gt lt security level gt lt read_view name gt lt write_view name gt Parameter lt group name gt The name of the SNMP group Range 1 32 characters ASCII characters 33 126 only lt security model gt The user security model Range 0 to 3 Security Model 1 v1 2 v2c 3 usm O any lt security level gt The security level assigned to the group Range to 3 1 NoAuthNoPriv 2 AuthNoPriv 3 AuthP iv If security model is not usm the security_level value must be 1 NoAuthNoPriv lt 1 NoAuthNoPriv gt gt There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications lt 2 AuthNoPriv gt gt SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted lt 3 AuthPriv gt gt SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption lt read_view name gt The scope for a specified instan
277. iter 1 kbps 100 Switch acl This command show all access control entry setting on switch SYNTAX show Parameter acl config Show ACL configuration acl status Show ACL status port Show ACL port configuration rate limiter Show ACL rate limiter EXAMPLE Switch acl show acl config Number of ACEs 0 Switch acl show acl config Number of ACEs 0 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 255 Switch acl show port Rate Port Policy Action Limiter Port Copy Mirror Logging Shutdown Counter 1 Permit 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 2 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 3 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 4 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 5 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 6 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 7 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 8 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 9A 1 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 10A 1 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 9B 1 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 10B 1 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 Oo DOAN HD SFP WYN FE uU UU UO UO UO UO DO g U Wn PPS PPS PPS PPS PPS PPS PPS nA uF WN FP CO Aggregation Commands of CLI delete To Delete command SYNTAX delete Parameter grou
278. its when there is no traffic When a port gets data to be transmitted all circuits are powered up The time it takes to power up the circuits is named wakeup time The default wakeup time is 17 us for 1Gbit links and 30 us for other link speeds EEE devices must agree upon the value of the wakeup time in order to make sure that both the receiving and transmitting device has all circuits powered up when traffic is transmitted The devices can exchange information about the devices wakeup time using the LLDP protocol For maximizing the power saving the circuit isn t started at once transmit data are ready for a port but is instead queued until 3000 bytes of data are ready to be transmitted For not introducing a large delay in case that data less then 3000 bytes shall be transmitted data are always transmitted after 48 us giving a maximum latency of 48 us the wakeup time If desired it is possible to minimize the latency for specific frames by mapping the frames to a specific queue done with QOS and then mark the queue as an urgent queue When an urgent queue gets data to be transmitted the circuits will be powered up at once and the latency will be reduced to the wakeup time Function name EEE Function description The section allows the user to inspect and configure the current EEE port settings VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off Overview EEE Configuration System Information EEE Urgent Queues NTP amp Time Configurat
279. ity Maintenance Parameters description Port Members Port Members i 14 15 16 Rote Pare Access VLAN VLAN Mode Traffic Class Port Security Port Security Action Port Security Limit Spanning Tree Admin Edge Spanning Tree BPDU Guard Voice VLAN i Hybrid x 7 High Enable v Tap w A Enable Enable 1000 A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID To include a port in a Easy Port check the box as Remove or exclude the port from the VLAN make sure the box is unchecked as shown as By default no ports are members Role 168 The port role is based on the type of devices to be connected to the switch ports To scroll to select what kind device you want to connect and implement with the Easy Port setting VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide IP Phone IP Phone _JIP CAM T S WIFI AP Moda Access VLAN It is used to set the Access VLAN ID It means the switch port access VLAN ID AVID The allowed range is from 1 to 4095 VLAN Mode It is used to scroll to select the Port Egress Rule The allowed values are Hybrid Trunk or Access This parameter affects VLAN egress processing If Trunk is selected a VLAN tag with the classified VLAN ID is inserted in frames transmitted on the port This mode is normally used for ports connected to VLAN
280. ity on successfully authenticated MAC addresses SYNTAX agetime lt J 0 1000000 gt Parameter Time in seconds between checks for activity on a MAC address that succeeded authentication EXAMPLE Switch 802 1X agetime 10 Switch 802 1X clear Clear 802 1X statistics SYNTAX Clear lt port list gt Parameter Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 5 EXAMPLE Switch 802 1X clear 1 2 Switch 802 1X eapol timeout Configure the time between EAPOL retransmissions SYNTAX eapol timeout lt 65535 gt Parameter lt 1 65535 gt Time in seconds between EAPOL retransmissions EXAMPLE Switch 802 1X eapol timeout 5 Switch 802 1X 240 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide hold time Configure the time in seconds before a MAC address that lied authentication gets a new authentication chance SYNTAX hold time lt 10 1000000 gt Paramete lt 10 1000000 gt Hold time before MAC addresses that failed authentication expire EXAMPLE Switch 802 1X eapol timeout 5 Switch 802 1X mode Configure the 802 1X mode SYNTAX mode lt disable gt lt ensable gt Parameter Disable Globally disable 802 1X operation mode enable Globally enable 802 1X operation mode EXAMPLE Switch 802 1X mode enable Switch 802 1X show config ode Enabled Reauthentication Disabled Reauthentication Period 3600 EAPOL Timeout 30 Age Period 300 Hold Time 10 RAD
281. ived from the server Malformed Access Responses The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response packets received from the server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses Bad Authenticators The number of RADIUS Access Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes received from the server Unknown Types The number of RADIUS packets that were received VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide with unknown types from the server on the authentication port and dropped Packets Dropped The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason Access Requests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent to the server This does not include retransmissions Access Retransmissions The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted to the RADIUS authentication server Pending Requests The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an Access Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept Access Reject Access Challenge timeout or retransmission Timeouts The number of authentication timeouts to the server After a timeo
282. ivilege show Group Name Account Aggregation Diagnostics EEE Easyport GARP GVRP Ip IPMC_Snooping Maintenance Mirroring POE Ports Private_VLANs Qos SMTP SNMP Security Spanning_Tree System Trap_Event VCL VLANs Voice_VLAN Switch privilege Switch privilege Privilege Current Level L5 Privilege Level VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 339 PVLAN Commands of CLI delete port isolate private vlan show 340 Delete private VLAN group SYNTAX Delete lt private vlan gt lt 1 10 gt Parameter private vlan private VLAN KEYWORD lt 1 10 gt Private VLAN ID available value is from 1 to 10 EXAMPLE Switch pvlan delete private vlan 1 Switch pvlan Configure port isolation SYNTAX port isolate lt port list gt lt disable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 disable Disable port isolation enable Enable port isolation EXAMPLE Switch pvlan port isolate 1 disable Switch pvlan Configure private VLAN group SYNTAX private vlan lt 1 10 gt lt port list gt Parameter lt 1 10 gt Private VLAN ID available value is from 1 to 10 lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 EXAMPLE Switch pvlan private vlan 1 1 Switch pvlan Show private VLAN information SYNTAX Show Parameter port isolate Show port isolation informa
283. k Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide You can modify each QCE QoS Control Entry in the table using the following buttons Inserts anew QCE before the current row Edits the QCE Moves the QCE up the list O Moves the QCE down the list 6 Deletes the QCE The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the QCE listings 163 164 2 3 66 QoS QoS Status Function name QoS QoS Status Function description The function is used to configure and shows the QCL status by different QCL QoS Control List users Each row describes the QCE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific QCE QoS Control Entry is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview Port Classification Port Policing Port Scheduler Port Shaping Port Tag Remarking Port DSCP DOSCP Based QoS DSCP Translation DSCP Classification QoS Control List QCT Status Storm Control gt Single IP Easy Port Mirroring UPnP Cannio ters description Combined Bj l Resolve Conflict il Refresh Action Class DPL DSCP Conflict User QCE Frame Type Port No entries Select the QCL status from this drop down list User Indicates the QCL user QCE Indicates t
284. l LLDP neighbours The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbour is detected The columns hold the following information Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of EN LLDP Neighbour Information Auto refresh Refresh OVBIVIEW r Static Trunk A Local Chassis Remote System Port System System Managem gt iacp Cd PortID Name _ Description Capabilities Description _ Addres J No LLDP neighbour information found gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping gt MVR Vv LLDP LLDP General Setup DPN D LLDP MED General Setup LLDP MED Neighbours EEE Port Statistics gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN Parameters description Local Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbour s LLDP frames Remote Port ID The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbour port System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbour unit VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Port Description Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbour unit System Capabilities System Capabilities describes the neighbour unit s capabilities The possible capabilities are Other Repeater Bridge WLAN Access Point Router Telephone DOCSIS cable device Station only O ont nun A UU NY Reserved When a capability is e
285. l Setup gt Protocol based VLAN gt Voice VLAN gt GARP gt GVRP gt Qos Parameters description MAC based VLAN Membership Confi stetic _ v fomdsesSlit_Refresh i Port Members MAC VLAN Address ID 1 i lig 4 56 77 8 9 10 11 12 19 1a 15 16 17 18 No data exists for the user MAC Address Indicates the MAC address VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID Port Members Port members of the MAC based VLAN entry Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 140 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 3 49 VLAN Protocol based VLAN Protocol Group This section describe Protocol based VLAN The Switch support Protocol include Ethernet LLC SNAP Protocol and LLC The Logical Link Control LLC data communication protocol layer is the upper sub layer of the Data Link Layer which is itself layer 2 just above the Physical Layer in the seven layer OSI reference model It provides multiplexing mechanisms that make it possible for several network protocols IP IPX Decnet and Appletalk to coexist within a multipoint network and to be transported over the same network media and can also provide flow control and automatic repeat request ARQ e
286. l and the application layers on top of the protocol in order to achieve these related properties Initially a Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU Only after an LLDP MED Endpoint Device is detected will an LLDP MED capable Network Connectivity Device start to advertise LLDP MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port The LLDP MED application will temporarily speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a second when a new LLDP MED neighbour has been detected in order share LLDP MED information as fast as possible to new neighbours Because there is a risk of an LLDP frame being lost during transmission between neighbours it is recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the possibility of the neighbours receiving the LLDP frame With Fast start repeat count it is possible to specify the VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide number of times the fast start transmission would be repeated The recommended value is 4 times given that 4 LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted when an LLDP frame with new information is received It should be noted that LLDP MED and the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended to run on links between LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices and as such does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements including Network Connectivity Devices or other types of links Coor
287. lan tpid 0x600 Switch vlan show port status combined Port PVID Frame Type Ingress Filter Tx Tag UVID Port Type Conflict 1 1 All Disabled Untag This 1 UnAware No 2 1 All Disabled Untag This 1 UnAware No 3 1 All Disabled Untag All UnAware No 4 1 All Disabled Untag All UnAware No 5 1 All Disabled Untag All UnAware No 6 1 All Disabled Untag This 1 UnAware No 7 T All Disabled Untag This 1 UnAware No 8 1 All Disabled Untag This 1 UnAware No 9 1 All Disabled Untag This T UnAware No 10 Al A Disabled Untag This 1 UnAware No switch vlan 380 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide VOICE VLAN of CLI Config Delete Discovery To configure the Voice VLAN parameter Syntax config lt disable enable gt lt VLAN ID gt lt Secure aging time gt lt Voice VLAN traffic class gt Parameter lt disable gt Disable Voice VLAN mode operation lt enable gt Enable Voice VLAN mode operation lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID available value is from 1 to 4094 lt Secure aging time gt Voice VLAN secure aging time available value is from 10 to 1000000 lt Voice VLAN traffic class gt Voice VLAN traffic class all traffic on the Voice VLAN will apply this class available value is from O Low to 7 High EXAMPLE Switch voice vlan config enable 22 2000 7 Switch voice vlan To delete the Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process Syntax delete lt oui gt lt oui address gt Para
288. le gt Parameter Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 5 disable Disable Router Port enable Enable Router Port EXAMPLE Switch mld router 1 enable Switch mld set the per VLAN Robustness Variable SYNTAX rv lt vlan list gt lt 2 255 gt Parameter lt vlan list gt VLAN list available value is from 1 to 4094 format 1 3 5 lt 2 255 gt Range 2 255 Default 2 EXAMPLE Switch mld rv 1 2 Switch mld VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 313 314 show Show MLD Information SYNTAX Show Parameter config Show MLD Configuration groups Entries in the MLD Group Table ssm Entries in the MLDv2 Information Table status Show MLD Status version Show MLD Working Querier Host Version currently EXAMPLE Switch mld show config IGMP Mode Disabled IGMP Flooding Control Enabled IGMP Leave Proxy Disabled IGMP Proxy Disabled Port Filtering Groups Filtering Group Filtering Group Filtering Group Filtering Group Filtering Group Filtering Group Filtering Group Filtering Group aA nD Oo FF WN FP Oo O 0 0 0 20 O O 10 SB fo D Ze O Filtering Group Filtering Group Re Ww Zz ie Filtering Group 10B No Filtering Group Switch mld Switch m Switch m Switch m d ld show groups 1 Ld Ld show ssm 1 Port Router Dynamic Router Fast Leave Group Throttling Number 1 Enable
289. list gt lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 disable Globally disable ARP inspection mode enable Globally enable ARP inspection mode EXAMPLE VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 259 Show 260 Switch arp inspection port mode 1 disable Switch arp inspection Configure ARP inspection port mode SYNTAX Show lt config gt lt status gt Parameter config Show ARP inspection configuration status Show ARP inspection static and dynamic entry EXAMPLE Switch arp inspection show config ARP Inspection Mode Disabled Port Port Mode Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled led Disabled Disabled OO at ody On am G gt NF U0 P io D oO Disabled led 10A Disabled 9B Disabled 10B Disabled wo D is be io o o Switch arp inspection show status Type Port VLAN IP Address MAC Address lt none gt VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Auth Commands of CLI fallback Configure local authentication fallback SYNTAX add lt console gt lt ssh gt lt telnet gt lt web gt lt disable gt lt disable gt Parameter console Settings for console ssh Settings for ssh telnet Settings for telnet web Settings for web disable Disable local authentication if remote authentication fails enable Enable local authentication if remote authentication fails EXAMPLE Switch auth fallba
290. lling is disabled After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 Configuration 2 3 1 Aggregation Static Trunk The Aggregation Configuration is used to configure the settings of Link Aggregation You can bundle more than one port with the same speed full duplex and the same MAC to be a single logical port thus the logical port aggregates the bandwidth of these ports This means you can apply your current Ethernet equipments to build the bandwidth aggregation Function name Aggregation Static Trunk Function description Ports using Static Trunk as their trunk method can choose their unique Static GroupID to form a logic trunked port The benefit of using Static Trunk method is that a port can immediately become a member of a trunk group without any handshaking with its peer port This is also a disadvantage because the peer ports of your static trunk group may not know that they should be aggregate together to form a logic trunked port Using Static Trunk on both end of a link is strongly recommended Please also note that low speed links will stay in not ready state when using static trunk to aggregate with high speed links 70 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview System Y Aggregation gt LACP gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE g
291. lly authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Single 802 1X variant Single 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X In Single 802 1X at most one supplicant can get authenticated on the port at a time Normal EAPOL frames are used in the communication between the supplicant and the switch If more than one supplicant is connected to a port the one that comes first when the port s link comes up will be the first one considered If that supplicant doesn t provide valid credentials within a certain amount of time another supplicant will get a chance Once a supplicant is successfully authenticated only that supplicant will be allowed access This is the most secure of all the supported modes In this mode the Port Security module is used to secure a supplicant s MAC address once successfully authenticated Multi 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get Vigo
292. lly on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button 2 4 21 Port Security Limit Control Function name Port Security Limit Control Function description The function shows you how to configure the Port Security settings of the Switch You can use the Port Security feature to restrict input to an interface by limiting and identifying MAC addresses Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off Overview System Configuration gt ACL gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay gt NAS gt AAA Port Security Switch Status Port Status Access Management SSH Parameters description System Configuration rr Creer A Re ee te Port Security Limit Control Configuration System Configuration Mode Disabled w Aging Enabled 0 Aging Period seconds Port Configuration Port Mode Limit ___ State Re open v Disabled Disabled Disabled v Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled v Disabled Mode Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switchstack If globally disabled other modules may still use the underlying functionality but limit checks and corresponding actions are disabled Aging Enabled If checked secured MAC addresses a
293. lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 lt 1 1024 gt Max number of MAC addresses on selected port EXAMPLE Switch limit control limit 1 1 Switch limit control mode Configure the global limit control mode SYNTAX Mode lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter 290 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide port mode reopen disable Globally disable port security enable Globally enable port security EXAMPLE Switch limit control mode enable Switch limit control Configure the port mode SYNTAX port mode lt port list gt lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 disable Disable port security on selected port enable Enable port security on selected port EXAMPLE Switch limit control port mode 1 disable Switch limit control Reopen one or more ports whose limit is exceeded and shut down SYNTAX reopen lt port list gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 EXAMPLE Switch limit control reopen 1 Switch limit control show Show limit control configuration SYNTAX Show EXAMPLE Switch limit control show Mode Enabled Aging Disabled Age Period 3600 Port Mode Limit Action Disabled Disabled Disabled 1 1 Trap amp Shutdown 2 4 3 4 4 Disabled 4 None 5 4 6 4 7 4
294. ly as a DNS resolver to the client device on the network After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 2 8 IP Configuration IPv6 Function name IPv6 Function description Describe how to configure the switch managed IPv6 information The Configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration And the Current column is used to show the active IPv6 configuration Configure the switch managed IP information on this page The Configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview fe IPv6 Configuration gt System Information NTP amp Time Configuration gt Account VIP IPv4 gt Port gt Loop Protection Trap Event Severity gt SNMP gt Syslog SMTP General Setup gt sFlow Agent Configuration Security Maintenance Parameter description Auto Configuration Configured Current Auto Configuration c0a8 01e2 Link Local Address fe80002 0250 7 fi fefD c049 96 Address c0a8 01e2 Prefix 96 Gateway z Enable IPv6 auto configuration by checking this box If fails the configured IPv6 address is zero The router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few seconds the total time needed to complete auto configuration can be
295. ly to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 20 MLD Snooping VLAN General Setup Function name MLD Snooping VLAN General Setup Function description When MLD snooping is enabled on a VLAN the switch acts to minimize unnecessary multicast traffic If the switch receives multicast traffic destined for a given multicast address it forwards that traffic only to ports on the VLAN that have MLD hosts for that address It drops that traffic for ports on the VLAN that have no MLD hosts The will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout of Overview Static Trunk gt LACP gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping Y MLD Snooping General Setup Port Group Filtering Status Groups Information IPV6 SSM Information gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page C lt VLAN Snooping MLD ID Enabled Querier Compatibility RV 1 v 95 Parameters description VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry Snooping Enabled Enable the per VLAN MLD Snooping Only up to 64 VLANs can be selected MLD Querier Enable the IGMP Querier
296. m 1 to 10B format 1 3 disable Disable Fast Leave enable Enable Fast Leave EXAMPLE Switch mld fast leave 1 disable Switch mld The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered SYNTAX filtering Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 lt ip address gt IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 EXAMPLE Switch mld filtering 1 192 1 2 34 Switch mld Set MLD Flooding Mode SYNTAX Flooding Parameter disable Disable unregistered IPMCV6 traffic flooding enable Enable unregistered IPMCV6 traffic floodingq EXAMPLE Switch mld flooding disable Switch mld Set MLD Leave Proxy Mode SYNTAX leave proxy lt disable gt VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 311 Imgi proxy qi qri 312 Parameter disable Disable MLD Leave Proxy enable Enable MLD Leave Proxy EXAMPLE Switch mld leave proxy disable Switch mld Set the per VLAN Last Member Query Interval SYNTAX Lmgi lt vlan list gt lt 0 31744 gt Parameter lt vlan list gt VLAN list available v
297. meter lt oui gt Delete Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process lt oui address gt OUI address format Oa 1b 2c EXAMPLE Switch voice vlan delete oui Oa lb 2c ERROR Voice VLAN table entry not exist Switch voice vlan NOTE Ifyou didn t set Voice VLAN OUI already then the switch will show ERROR Voice VLAN table entry not exist Due to the reason then you need to create the Voice VLAN OUI entry first To configure the Voice VLAN discovery protocol Syntax discovery lt port list gt lt both Ildp oui gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt both gt Both OUI and LLDP lt lldp gt Detect telephony device by LLDP lt oui gt Detect telephony device by OUI address EXAMPLE Switch voice vlan discovery 3 5 both Switch voice vlan NOTE If your IP Phone without support LLDP protocol then please set the discovery protocol with both Oui To create Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide port mode Security Syntax oui lt oui address gt lt LINE gt Parameter lt oui address gt OUI address format 0a 1b 2c lt LINE gt Up to 32 characters describing OUI address EXAMPLE Switch voice vlan oui 0a 1b 2c telephonel Switch voice vlan To configure Voice VLAN port mode Syntax port mo
298. n EXAMPLE Switch mrp show config Port Join Time Leave Time Leave All Time Applicant Periodic 1 200 600 10000 Disable Diabled 2 200 600 10000 Disable Diabled 3 200 600 10000 Enable Enabled 4 200 600 0000 Enable Enabled 5 200 600 10000 Enable Enabled 6 200 600 10000 Disable Diabled 7 200 600 10000 Disable Diabled 8 200 600 10000 Disable Diabled 318 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 9 200 600 10000 Disable Diabled 10 200 600 10000 Disable Diabled Switch mrp Syntax show lt statistic gt lt port list gt Parameter lt statistic gt Show the basic MRP port statistics lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 EXAMPLE Switch mrp show statistic 3 5 Port Peer MAC Failed Count Switch mrp MSTP of CLI CName To set MSTP configuration name Syntax CName lt word gt Parameter lt word gt A text string up to 32 characters long EXAMPLE Switch mstp cName MSTPO1 Switch mstp FwdDelay To set the FewDelay parameter Syntax FwDelay lt 4 30 gt Parameter lt 4 30 gt MSTP forward delay 4 30 and max_age lt forward_delay 1 2 EXAMPLE Switch mstp fwdDelay 30 Switch mstp MaxAge To set the STP Maximum age time Syntax MaxAge lt 6 40 gt VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide MaxHops statistics Txhold version 320 Parameter lt 6 40 gt STP maximum age time 6 40 an
299. n It describes how to view the current port configuration and how to configure ports to non default settings including Linkup Linkdown Speed Current and Type Flow Control Current Rx Current Tx and Enabled Maximum Frame Size Excessive Collision Mode and Power Control Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview System Information NTP amp Time Configuration Account IP Port Traffic Overview Detailed Statistics QoS Statistics SFP Information EEE Loop Protection Trap Event Severity SNMP Syslog SMTP General Setup sFlow Agent Configuration Security Maintenance Parameter description Port DrayTek Port Configuration Port Description Frame Maximum Excessive Collision Speed Flow Control Enabled Discard Disable Discard Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Discard Discard Discard Discard Discard Disable Disable Disable Disable Discard Discard as Mi vi SS Discard Disable v b 4 v Discard Discard Disable Discard Disable Discard Disable e eR Le KK KKK KX KKK x K g x fey x fee Bee amp Bee x fe ee x gt This is the logical port number for this row Description It describ
300. n LACP System Status Function name Aggregation LACP System Status Function description The function describes that when you complete to set LACP function on the switch then it provides a status overview for all LACP instances Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto L tot ae aidia D LACP System Status Auto refresh Refresh System 2 Aggr ID Partner Partner Last Local System ID Key Changed Ports Y Aggregation No ports enabled or no existing partners Static Trunk LACP General Setup Port Status amp Statistics gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping gt MVR LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN a nann Parameters description Ager ID The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance For LLAG the id is shown as isid aggr id and for GLAGs as aggr id Partner System ID The system ID MAC address of the aggregation partner Partner Key The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID Last changed The time since this aggregation changed Local Ports Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch stack The format is Switch ID Port Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button After finished the above settings click
301. n Accounting server to provide access control to your network The AAA server can be a TACACS or RADIUS server to create and manage objects that contain settings for using AAA servers The function describes how to configure AAA setting of TACACS or RADIUS server VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of a Authentication Server Configuration Overview ae System A Common Server Configuration Configuration Timeout 15 seconds Pm ACL i Dead Time 300 seconds gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection TACAC S Authorization and Accounting Configuration gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay gt NAS sae is YAAA Accounting Disabled RADIUS Overview RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration RADIUS Details Enabled IP Address Hostname _ gt Port Security gt Access Management SSH Authorization Disabled x Fallback to Local Authorization Disabled v Parameters description Common Server Configuration Timeout The Timeout which can be set to a number between 3 and 3600 seconds is the maximum time to wait for a reply from a server If the server does not reply within this timeframe we will consider it to be dead and continue with the next enabled server if any RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol which is unreliable by design In order to cope with lost frames the timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of equal length If a reply is not re
302. n Base MIB is installed correctly on the managed devices The SNMP is a protocol that is used to govern the transfer of information between SNMP manager and agent and traverses the Object Identity OID of the management Information Base MIB described in the form of SMI syntax SNMP agent is running on the switch to response the request issued by SNMP manager Basically it is passive except issuing the trap information The switch supports a switch to turn on or off the SNMP agent If you set the field SNMP Enable SNMP agent will be started up All supported MIB OIDs including RMON MIB can be accessed via SNMP manager If the field SNMP is set Disable SNMP agent will be de activated the related Community Name Trap Host IP Address Trap and all MIB counters will be ignored Function name System Function description This function is used to enable SNMP settings VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 51 gt System Information Information Device Name CPU Load NTP amp Time Configuration gt Account gt IP gt Port gt Loop Protection Trap Event Severity Y SNMP System General Setup Communities eain Parameter Description SNMP State SNMP System Configuration SNMP State Enable Disable 800014550300507f0c049 Engine ID The term SNMP here The term SNMP here is used for the activation or de activation of SNMP Enable Enable SNMP state operation Disable Disable SN
303. n by Port No Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Each page shows up to 64 entries from the MLDv2 SSM Source Specific Multicast Information table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLDv 2 Information Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLDv2 Information Table Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off Overview o mgygreyga MLD SFM Information Auto refresh Refresh Static Trunk f Start from VLAN fi jand Group 00 with 20 entries gt Spanning Tree i VLAN ID Group Port Mode Source Address Type gt IGMP Snooping aS RSE p L yP Y MLD Snooping General Setup VLAN General Setup Port Group Filtering Status Groups Information ee VO SOM IMOFTAON m gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN Parameters description VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group Group Group address of the group displayed Port Switch port number Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 Type Indicates the Type
304. n is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form XX XX XX XX XX xx that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using the Port Security module Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over port based 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The advantage of MAC based a
305. nabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled CPU Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU CPU Once Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame Conflict Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE The specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 181 2 4 5 IP Source Guard General Setup Function name IP Source Guard General Setup Function description The function is used to configure the IP Source Guard detail parameters of the switch You could use the IP Source Guard configure to enable or disable with the Port of the switch Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview System he Configuration gt ACL Y IP Source Guard Static Table Dynamic Table 3 gt ARP Inspection gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay gt NAS gt AAA gt Port Security gt Access Management SSH nerna Parameters description IP Source Guard Configuration
306. nabled the capability is followed by If the capability is disabled the capability is followed by Management Address Management Address is the neighbour unit s address that is used for higher layer entities to assist discovery by the network management This could for instance hold the neighbour s IP address Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 30 LLDP LLDP MED General Setup Media Endpoint Discovery is an enhancement of LLDP known as LLDP MED that provides the following facilities Auto discovery of LAN policies such as VLAN Layer 2 Priority and Differentiated services Diffserv settings enabling plug and play networking Device location discovery to allow creation of location databases and in the case of Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Enhanced 911 services Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet PoE end points Inventory management allowing network administrators to track their network devices and determine their characteristics manufacturer software and hardware versions serial or asset number Function name LLDP LLDP MED General Setup Function description VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide
307. naware v Access Unaware Access oN omer WH y Unaware Access Ethertype for Custom This field specifies the ether type used for Custom S ports S ports This is a global setting for all the Custom S ports Port This is the logical port number of this row Port Type Port can be one of the following types Unaware Customer port C port Service port S port Custom Service port S custom port If Port Type is Unaware all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed Ingress Filtering Enable ingress filtering on a port by checking the box This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded By default ingress filtering is disabled no checkmark Frame Type Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged untagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on the port are discarded By default the field is set to All VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Egress Rule Determines what device the port connects to If the port connects to VLAN unaware devices such as terminal work station Access link should be used If the port connect to VLAN aware devices for example switch connect to switch Trunk link should be use
308. ndicates the network where the addressed host resides and the latter indicates the individual host in the network which the address of host refers to And the host identifier must be unique in the same LAN Here the term of IP address we used is version 4 known as IPv4 32 bits A Network identifier Host identifier With the classful addressing it divides IP address into three classes class A class B and class C The rest of IP addresses are for multicast and broadcast The bit length of the network prefix is the same as that of the subnet mask and is denoted as IP address X for example 192 168 1 0 24 Each class has its address range described below Class A Address is less than 126 255 255 255 There are a total of 126 networks can be defined because the address 0 0 0 0 is reserved for default route and 127 0 0 0 8 is reserved for loopback function Bit Ol T78 31 Hetwork address Host address Class B IP address range between 128 0 0 0 and 191 255 255 255 Each class B network has a 16 bit network prefix followed 16 bit host address There are 16 384 2 14 16 networks able to be defined with a maximum of 65534 2 16 2 hosts per network Bit O12 1516 31 i he Network address Host address Class C VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 21 IP address range between 192 0 0 0 and 223 255 255 255 Each class C network has a 24 bit network prefix followed 8 bit host address There are 2 097 152 2 21 24 networks able
309. nfiguring each of the ports on the layer 2 switch as a protected port or a non protected port A destination address on an data packet is matched with a physical address on said layer 2 switch and a forwarding map is generated for the data packet based upon the destination address on the data packet The data packet is then sent to the plurality of ports pursuant to the forwarding map generated based upon whether the ingress port was configured as a protected or non protected port Function name VLAN Private VLANs Port Isolation Function description The function is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN A port member of a VLAN can be isolated to other isolated ports on the same VLAN and Private VLAN Se Oe a a TT TEE TIT TS Auto Logout Of a 2 Port Isolation Configuration Overview PEED Port Number gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base Y VLAN VLAN Membership Ports Switch Status Port Status Private VLANs Private VLAN Membership gt MAC based VLAN gt Protocol based VLAN Voice VLAN gt GARP gt GVRP gt Qos Parameters description Port Members A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN When checked port isolation is enabled on that port When unchecked port isolation is disabled on that port By default port isolation is disabled on all ports Af
310. ng the cable the port will remain shut down There are three ways to re open the port 1 Boot the switch 2 Disable and re enable Limit Control on the port or the 213 214 switch 3 Click the Reopen button Trap amp Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port both the Trap and the Shutdown actions described above will be taken State This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control s point of view The state takes one of four values Disabled Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port Ready The limit is not yet reached This can be shown for all actions Limit Reached Indicates that the limit is reached on this port This state can only be shown if Action is set to None or Trap Shutdown Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module This state can only be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap amp Shutdown Re open Button If a port is shutdown by this module you may reopen it by clicking this button which will only be enabled if this is the case For other methods refer to Shutdown in the Action section Note that clicking the reopen button causes the page to be refreshed so non committed changes will be lost Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The se
311. ng tree 802 1w RSTP Supports multiple spanning tree 802 1s MSTP Supports 802 1X port security on a VLAN Supports IP MAC Port Binding for LAN security Supports user management and only first login administrator can configure the device The rest of users can only view the switch SNMP access can be disabled and prevent from illegal SNMP access Supports Ingress Non unicast and Egress Bandwidth rating management with a resolution of 1Mbps The trap event and alarm message can be transferred via e mail Supports diagnostics to let administrator knowing the hardware status Supports loop detection to protect the switch crash when the networking has looping issue HTTP and TFTP for firmware upgrade system log upload and configuration file import export Supports remote boot the device through user interface and SNMP Supports NTP network time synchronization and daylight saving Supports 120 event log records in the main memory and display on the local console 1 3 Packing List Before you start installing the switch verify that the package contains the following VigorSwitch P2261 AC Power Cord CD Console Cable Rubber feet Rack mount kit Please notify your sales representative immediately if any of the aforementioned items is missing or damaged Optional Modules In the switch Port 21 24 includes two types of media TP and SFP Fiber LC BiDi LC this port supports 10 100 1000Mbps TP or 1000Mbps SFP Fiber with auto dete
312. nning Tree Port Status After you complete the STP configuration you could to ask the switch display the STP Port Status Function name Spanning Tree Port Status Function description The function is used to ask the switch to display the STP CIST port status for physical ports of the currently selected switch Auto Logout O Overview System Y Aggregation Static Trunk gt LACP Spanning Tree Bridge Settings MSTI Mapping MSTI Priorities CIST Ports MSTI Ports Bridge Status Port Statistics gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping nam Parameters description STP Port Status Port CIST Role CIST State Uptime 1 Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Auto refresh Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding Port The switch port number of the logical STP port CIST Role The current STP port role of the CIST port The port role can be one of the following values Alternate Port Backup Port Root Port Designated Port Disabled CIST State The current STP port state of the CIST port The port state can be one of the following values Blocking Learning Forwarding Uptime The time since the bridge port was l
313. nt information on the local end of switch If the account is recorded on the local switch the user will be authorized to login with the privilege level set on the local switch Accounting Enable to record all the command users entered All the log data will be recorded on the server when enable For instance login time log out time IGMP setting VLAN setting etc RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration Enabled Enable the RADIUS Authentication Server by checking this box IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1812 is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server and the switch stack RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration Enabled Enable the RADIUS Accounting Server by checking this box IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Accounting Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server If VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1813 is used on 207 the RADIUS Accounting Server Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Acco
314. o Info Info Notice Info Info Info Info Info Warning VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 271 Firmware Commands of CLI upgrade Upgrade system firmware 272 SYNTAX firmware lt lt ipv6 address gt gt lt ip hostname gt lt WORD gt Parameter lt ipv6 address gt TFTP server ipv6 address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 cSff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 lt ip hostname gt TFTP server ip address or hostname lt WORD gt Firmware image file name EXAMPLE Switch firmware upgrade 192 168 1 100 2300 img Switch dhcp snooping VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide GARP of CLI applicant To enable disable applicant administrative control Syntax applicant lt port list gt lt non participant normal participant gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt non participant gt Set applicant administrative control to non participant lt normal participant gt Disable applicant administrative control to normal participant EXAMPLE Switch garp applicant 3 non participant Switch garp join
315. o control the multicast groups to which a user on a switch port can belong It allows the user to control the distribution of multicast services such as IP TV based on some type of subscription or service plan VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off Overview Static Trunk gt LACP gt Spanning Tree Y IGMP Snooping General Setup VLAN General Setup i 1 Status Groups Information IPv4 SSM Information gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Delete Port Filtering Groups 89 90 Parameters description Delete Click to delete the entry Port The logical port for the settings Filtering Groups The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered Add new Filtering Group Click to add a new filtering group After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 16 IGMP Snooping Status After you complete the IGMP Snooping configuration you could to let the switch display the IGMP Snooping Status Function name IGMP Snooping Status Function description The function is used to let the switch to display the IGMP Snooping detail status Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of 4 erview v ayy eyauvir a IGMP Snooping Status Auto refresh O Af Statist
316. oS Class The User Priority Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying the QoS Class in an Access Accept packet Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered and to be valid it must follow this rule e All 8 octets in the attribute s value must be identical and consist of ASCII characters in the range 0 3 which translates into the desired QoS Class in the range 0 3 RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide When RADIUS Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid the port s Port VLAN ID will be changed to this VLAN ID the port will be set to be a member of that VLAN ID and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware mode Once assigned all traffic arriving on the port will be classified and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN ID If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a VLAN ID or it s invalid or the 199 200 supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client m
317. oS ingress port classification SYNTAX port classify lt port list gt lt 0 7 gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 lt 0 7 gt QoS class for frames not classified in any other way There is a one to one mapping between QoS class queue and priority A QoS class of 0 zero has the lowest priority EXAMPLE Switch qos port classify class 1 0 Switch qos port dscp QoS port DSCP configuration SYNTAX port dscp lt classification gt lt port list gt lt all gt Parameter classification Configure DSCP classification based on QoS class and DP level This enables per port to map new DSCP value based on QoS class and DP level egress remark Configure the port DSCP remarking mode translation Configure DSCP ingress translation mode If translation is enabled for a port incoming frame DSCP value is translated and translated value is used for QoS classification lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 all Classify all DSCP disable Disable DSCP ingress classification selected Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as specified in DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP zero Classify DSCP if DSCP 0 EXAMPLE Switch qos port dscp classification 1 all Switch qos port scheduler QoS egress port schedulers SYNTAX port scheduler lt mode gt lt port list gt lt strict gt Parameter mode Configur
318. ode Disabled Translate dynamic to static Port Mode Configuration Port Mode _ v 1 Disabled v 2 Disabled 3 Disabled v 4 Disabled 5 Disabled 6 Disabled Sa Mode Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection Translate dynamic static Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries Port Mode Configuration Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 185 2 4 9 ARP Inspection Static Table Function name ARP Inspection Static Table Function description The function is used to configure the Static ARP Inspection Table parameters of the switch You could use the Static ARP Inspection Table configure to manage the ARP entries DrayTek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview System a Configuration gt ACL gt IP Source Guard Y ARP Inspection General Setup Dynamic Table gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay gt NAS gt AAA gt Port Security gt Access Management SSH nerne Parameters description Static ARP Inspection Table Delete Port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address Dele
319. odes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor VLANs VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID in an Access Accept packet The following criteria are used e The Tunnel Medium Type Tunnel Type and Tunnel Private Group ID attributes must all be present at least once in the Access Accept packet e The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value and fulfill the following requirements if Tag 0 is used the Tunnel Private Group ID does not need to include a Tag Value of Tunnel Medium Type must be set to IEEE 802 ordinal 6 Value of Tunnel Type must be set to VLAN ordinal 13 Value of Tunnel Private Group ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range 0 9 which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID Leading 0 s are discarded The final value must be in the range 1 4095 Guest VLAN Enabled When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below This option is only available for EAPOL based modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single
320. odules have decided to allow this MAC address to forward and aging is enabled the Port Security module will periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic If the age period measured in seconds expires and no frames have been seen the MAC address will be removed from the MAC table Otherwise a new age period will begin If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely a dash will be shown Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button 217 2 4 24 Access Management General Setup Function name Access Management General Setup Function description The function is used to configure access management table of the Switch including HTTP HTTPS SNMP and TELNET SSH You can manage the Switch over an Ethernet LAN or over the Internet Auto Logout Of Overview System Configuration gt ACL gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay gt NAS gt AAA gt Port Security Access Management Statistics SSH HTTPS n E E T T EN Parameters description Mode v Access Management Configuration Mode Disabled Delete Start IP Address End IP Address HTTP HTTPS SNMP TELNET SSH Ind
321. of IP multicast processing The switch supports IGMP version 1 and IGMP version 2 efficient use of network bandwidth and fast response time for channel changing IGMP version IGMPv1 is described in RFC1112 and IGMP version 2 IGMPv2 is described in RFC 2236 Hosts interact with the system through the exchange of IGMP messages Similarly when you configure IGMP proxy the system interacts with the router on its upstream interface through the exchange of IGMP messages However when acting as the proxy the system performs the host portion of the IGMP task on the upstream interface as follows gt When queried sends group membership reports to the group VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide When one of its hosts joins a multicast address group to which none of its other hosts belong sends unsolicited group membership reports to that group When the last of its hosts in a particular multicast group leaves the group sends an unsolicited leave group membership report to the all routers group 244 0 0 2 1 2 Features The VigorSwitch P2261 a standalone off the shelf switch provides the comprehensive features listed below for users to perform system network administration and efficiently and securely serve your network Hardware 20 10 100 1000Mbps Auto negotiation Gigabit Ethernet TP ports 4 10 100 1000Mbps Combo ports 2 100 1000Mbps Dual SFP Fiber media auto sense 1392KB on chip frame buffer Support jumbo frame up to 9600 bytes P
322. oice VLAN Port Status MAC Count Current Limit v o a Users State Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled ID In He w Im l User Module Legend User Module Name The full name of a module that may request Port Security services Abbr A one letter abbreviation of the user module This is used in the Users column in the port status table Port Status Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port Users Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled Port Security or not A means that the corresponding user module is not enabled whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter see Abbr has enabled port security State VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Shows the current state of the port It can take one of four values Disabled No user modules are currently using the Port Security service Ready The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module and is awaiting frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive Limit Reached The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should be taken in Shutdown The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limi
323. om the MAC table after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Configure aging time by entering a value here in seconds for example Age time seconds The allowed range is 10 to 1000000 seconds Disable the automatic aging of dynamic entries by checking the box of Disable automatic aging VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide MAC Table Learning Auto Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received If the learning mode for a given port is greyed out and another module is in control of the mode it cannot be changed by the user An example of such a module is the MAC Based Authentication under 802 1X Disable No learning is done Secure Only static MAC entries are learned all other frames are dropped Note Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure learning mode otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored by using another non secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface Static MAC Table Configuration Delete Click to delete the entry VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry MAC Address The MAC address of the entry Port Members Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry Adding a New Static Entry Click to add a new entry to the static MAC table Specify the VLAN ID MAC add
324. on Automatic Redirect Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation Automatically redirect web browser to HTTPS when HTTPS mode is enabled Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 221 2 4 28 Auth Method Function name Auth Method Function description The function is used to configure a user with authenticated when he logs into the switch via one of the management client interfaces Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of x Overview System Client Authentication Method Fallback Configuration console local telnet local gt ACL ssh local Authentication Method Configuration gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay Apply J gt NAS gt AAA gt Port Security gt Access Management SSH HTTPS Auth Method Maintenance web local Parameters description Client The management client for which the configuration below applies Authentication Method Authentication Method can be set to one of the following values none Authentication is disabled and login is not possible local Use the local user database on the switch stack for authentication RADIUS Use a remote RADIUS server for authentic
325. on ie SAN inioraaton Ore ear Pot Fast Laava Saree gt MVR gt LLDP O unlimited gt PoE 2 unlimited gt Filtering Data Base 3 Oo Oo unlimited gt VLAN v 4 unlimited v Parameters description MLD Snooping Configuration Snooping Enabled Enable the Global MLD Snooping Unregistered IPMCv6 Enable unregistered IPMCV6 traffic flooding Please note Flooding enabled that disabling unregistered IPMCvV6 traffic flooding may lead to failure of Neighbor Discovery MLD SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address Using IPv6 Address range Proxy Enabled Enable MLD Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side 94 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Port Related Configuration Port Switch port number Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port Fast Leave Enable the fast leave on the port Throttling Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong After finished the above settings click App
326. on x DHCP Client v Renew NTP amp Time Configuration gt Account IP Address 192 168 1 226 10 28 60 21 vIP PV SS IPV6 IP Gateway 0 0 0 0 _ 10 28 60 254 P Fort VLAN ID nS 1 gt Loop Protection Trap Event Severity DNS Server 0 0 0 0 8 8 8 8 gt SNMP gt Syslog IP DNS Proxy Configuration SMTP General Setup gt sFlow Agent DNS Proxy Configuration Security Apply Cancel Maintenance IP Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 Parameter description DHCP Client Enable the DHCP client by checking this box If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero DHCP will retry If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non zero DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS 38 lookup IP Address Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation IP Mask Provide the IP mask of this switch dotted decimal notation IP Gateway Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation SNTP Server Provide the IP address of the SNTP Server in dotted decimal notation DNS Server Provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation VLAN ID Provide the managed VLAN ID The allowed range is 1 to 4095 DNS Proxy When DNS proxy is enabled DUT will relay DNS requests to the current configured DNS server on DUT and rep
327. onal for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed policy tagged 2 6 63 guest voice New policy added with policy id 0 Switch lldpmed port policy To configure LLDP MED port policy Show 304 Syntax port policy lt port list gt lt policy ID gt lt disable enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt policy ID gt Policy ID available value is from 0 to 31 lt disable gt Disable the policy to a given port lt enable gt Enable the policy to a given port EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed port policy 3 5 2 enable Switch lldpmed To show LLDP MED information Syntax show lt config gt Parameter lt config gt Show LLDP MED configuration EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed show config VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Fast Start Repeast Count 2 Location Coordinates Latitude 20 0000 North Longitude 90 0000 West Altitude 25 0000 floor Map datum NAD83 NAVD88 Civic Address Location Country code tw National subdivison Taipei County City Taipei City district El Block Neighborhood block2 Street Nan Kang Road Street Dir north Trailling Street 2 Street Suffix 3 House No 2S House No Suffix line3 Landmark great Additional Location Info test Name PCO Zip gt 236 Building Manufac
328. one TP Port and Cable Installation In the switch TP port supports MDI MDI X auto crossover so both types of cable straight through Cable pin outs for RJ 45 jack 1 2 3 6 to 1 2 3 6 in 10 100M TP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 to 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 in Gigabit TP and crossed over Cable pin outs for RJ 45 jack 1 2 3 6 to 3 6 1 2 can be used It means you do not have to tell from them just plug it 1 Use Cat 5 grade RJ 45 TP cable to connect to a TP port of the switch and the other end is connected to a network aware device such as a workstation or a server 2 Repeat the above steps as needed for each RJ 45 port to be connected to a Gigabit 10 100 1000 TP device 3 Now you can start having the switch in operation VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Power On The switch supports 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz power supply The power supply will automatically convert the local AC power source to DC power It does not matter whether any connection plugged into the switch or not when power on even modules as well After the power is on all LED indicators will light up immediately and then all off except the power LED still keeps on This represents a reset of the system Firmware Loading After resetting the bootloader will load the firmware into the memory It will take about 30 seconds after that the switch will flash all the LED once and automatically performs self test and is in ready state 1 5 2 Installing Optional SFP Fibe
329. one such frame is received the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode If an EAPOL frame is received the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is disabled Port State The current state of the port It can undertake one of the following values Globally Disabled NAS is globally disabled Link Down NAS is globally enabled but there is no link on the port Authorized The port is in Force Authorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is authorized Unauthorized The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server X Auth Y Unauth The port is in a multi supplicant mode Currently X clients are authorized and Y are unauthorized Restart VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Two buttons are available for each row The buttons are only enabled when authentication is globally enabled and the port s Admin State is in an EAPOL based or MAC based mode Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect Reauthenticate Schedules a reauthentication whenever the quiet period of the port runs out EAPOL based authentication For MAC based authentication reauthentication will be attempted immediately The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on
330. oot of the subtree to add to the named view The allowed OID length is 1 to 128 The VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide allowed string content is digital number or asterisk Add new group Click it to add a new user SNMPv3 Views Configuration Delete ViewName View Type OID Subtree inctudea w Aadnew view Apply After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 2 24 SNMP Access Function name Access Function description This function is used to configure SNMPv3 accesses The Entry index key are Group Name Security Model and Security level To create a new access account please click the Add new access button and enter the access information then click Apply Max Group Number 14 VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview NTP amp Time Configuration Account gt IP gt Port gt Loop Protection Trap Event Severity Y SNMP System General Setup Communities Users Groups Views Access Trap gt Syslog Parameter Description Cr CEE Cy TETIPTT TTT SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration Delete Add new access Apply J Group Security Security Read View Write View Name Model Level Name Name Delete Click it to delete the selected user setting Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the
331. or each setting page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest VLAN Table match Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview v ayy eyauen F Static Trunk Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page gt LACP gt Spanning Tree VLAN Snooping IGMP Y IGMP Snooping Enabled Querier Getal Setup ra Se Port Group Filtering Status Groups Information IPv4 SSM Information gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN a IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration QRI LLQI 0 1 0 1 sec sec URI Parameters description VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry Snooping Enabled Enable the per VLAN IGMP Snooping IGMP Querier Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is IGMP Auto Forced IGMPv1 Forced IGMPv2 Forced IGMPv3 de
332. orSwitch P2261 User s Guide 55 56 authentication protocol The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly Authentication Password A string identifying the authentication password phrase For MDS authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 32 For SHA authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 40 The allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Privacy Protocol Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocols are None No privacy protocol DES An optional flag to indicate that this user uses DES authentication protocol Privacy Password A string identifying the privacy password phrase The allowed string length is 8 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Add new user Click it to add a new user SNMPv3 Users Configuration Delete User Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Privacy Name Level _ Protocol _ Password Protocol Password Auth Priv MDS Des Add new user J After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 2 22 SNMP Groups Function name Groups Function description This function is used to configure SNMPv3 group To create a new group acco
333. ort list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 5 force auth Port access is allowed force unauth Port access is not allowed mac based Switch authenticates on behalf of the client multi Multiple Host 802 1X Authentication port based Port based 802 1X Authentication single Single Host 802 1X Authentication EXAMPLE Switch 802 1X port radius vlan 1 force auth Switch 802 1X Configure the RADIUS assigned QoS moder SYNTAX radius qos lt disable gt lt ensable gt Parameter Disable Disable RADIUS assigned QoS enable Enable RADIUS assigned QoS VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide radius vlan EXAMPLE Switch 802 1X radius qos enable Switch 802 1X show con ode Disabled Reauthentication Disabled Reauthentication Period 3600 EAPOL Timeout 30 Age Period 300 Hold Time 10 RADIUS QoS Enabled RADIUS VLAN Disabled Guest VLAN Disabled Guest VLAN ID di aximum Reauthentication Count 2 Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Frame Seen Disabled Configure the RADIUS assigned vlan mode SYNTAX radius vlan lt disable gt lt ensable gt Parameter disable Disable RADIUS assigned vlan enable Enable RADIUS assigned vlan EXAMPLE Switch 802 1X radius vlan enable Switch 802 1X show con ode Disabled Reauthentication Disabled Reauthentication Period 3600 EAPOL Timeout 30 Age Period 300 Hold Time 10 RADIUS QoS Enabled RADIUS VLAN Disabled Guest VLAN Disabled Guest VLAN ID 1
334. ort mode To configure IP source guard port mode Syntax port mode lt port list gt lt disable enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt disable gt Disable IP source guard port mode lt enable gt Enable IP source guard port mode EXAMPLE Switch ip source guard port mode 3 5 enable Switch ip source guard show config IP Source Guard Mode Enabled Port Port Mode Dynamic Entry Limit 1 Disabled unlimited 2 Disabled unlimited 3 Enabled unlimited 4 Enabled unlimited 5 Enabled unlimited 284 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide show Switch ip source guard To show IP source guard information Syntax show lt binding table gt lt port list gt show lt config gt Parameter lt binding table gt Show IP MAC binding table lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt config gt Show IP source guard configuration EXAMPLE Switch ip source guard show binding table 3 5 Type Port VLAN IP Address MAC Address lt none gt Switch ip source guard show config IP Source Guard Mode Enabled Port Port Mode Dynamic Entry Limit 1 Disabled unlimited 2 Disabled unlimited 3 Enabled unlimited 4 Enabled unlimited 5 Enabled unlimited 6 Disabled unlimited 7 Disabled unlimited 8 Disabled unlimited 9 Disabled unlimited 10 Disabled unlimited Switch ip source guard VigorSwitch P2261
335. out time If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time the LLDP information is removed and the Age Out counter is incremented Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button Clear The simple counts will be reset to zero when user use mouse 2 3 34 PoE General Setup Function name PoE General Setup Function description to click on Clear button Power Over Ethernet is used to transmit electrical power to remote devices over standard Ethernet cable It could for example be used for powering IP telephones wireless LAN access points and other equipment where it would be difficult or expensive to connect the equipment to main power supply This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE port settings and show all PoE Supply W VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 121 Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout of Overview v MYYyreyganerr Static Trunk gt LACP Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP Y PoE Status Power Delay Auto Checking Schedule Filtering Data Base General Setup Dynamic MAC Table Parameters description Power Over Ethernet Configuration Primary Power Supply W Retry Time 60 v sec s Port PoE Mode Priority Maximum Power
336. p Delete link aggregation group 256 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Group mode EXAMPLE Switch aggregation delete group 2 Switch aggregation show Aggregation Mode Source MAC Disabled Destination MAC Disabled IP Address Disabled TCP UDP Port Disabled Configure the link aggregation group SYNTAX set return path lt 5 gt lt port list gt Parameter lt 1 5 gt Aggregation group id lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 EXAMPLE Switch aggregation group 2 5 7 Switch aggregation To set sender description SYNTAX set sender lt ip gt lt disable gt Parameter dmac Destination MAC address ip Source and destination IP address port Source and destination UDP TCP port smac Source MAC address disable Disable field in traffic distribution enable Enable field in traffic distribution sender Sender description EXAMPLE Switch aggregation mode ip disable Switch aggregation Switch aggregation show Aggregation Mode Source MAC Disabled Destination MAC Disabled IP Address Disabled TCP UDP Port Disabled Group ID Name Type Configured Ports Aggregated Ports 2 LLAG2 Static 5 7 None Switch aggregation VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 257 show 258 To set return path description SYNTAX show EXAMPLE Switch aggregation show Aggregation Mode Source MAC Enabled Des
337. p that will be filtered Add new Filtering Group Click to add a new filtering group VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 98 After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 22 MLD Snooping Status Function name MLD Snooping Status Function description The function is used to display the MLD Snooping Status and detail information Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout of m Overview Static Trunk gt LACP gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping Y MLD Snooping General Setup VLAN General Setup Port Group Filtering atus Groups Information IPv6 SSM Information gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN VLAN ID Querier Version Parameters description MLD Snooping Status Auto refresh Statistics vi v2 Reports Reports Received Received VLAN Querier Host Querier Queries Queries ID Version Version Status Transmitted Received Router Port Port Status The VLAN ID of the entry Working Querier Version currently Host Version Working Host Version currently Querier Status Shows the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE Queries Transmitted The number of Transmitted Queries Queries Received The number of Received Queries V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports V2 Reports Received The number of Rec
338. packets out of a specified number reading the first Max Hdr Size bytes and exporting the sampled datagram for analysis The attributes associated with the flow sampling VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide are sampler type sampling rate Sampler Type Configured sampler type on the port and could be any of the types None Rx Tx or All You can scroll to choice one for your sampler type By default The value is None Sampling Rate Configured sampling rate on the ports Max Hdr Size Configured size of the header of the sampled frame Counter Sampling Counter sampling performs periodic time based sampling or polling of counters associated with an interface enabled for sFlow Attribute associated with counter sampling is polling interval Polling Interval Configured polling interval for the counter sampling To edit the configuration for each sFlow Ports click the button to open the following page Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview Or o Cue NTP amp Time Configuration gt Account gt IP gt Port gt Loop Protection Trap Event Severity gt SNMP Y Syslog General Setup Log Detailed Log SMTP General Setup Y sFlow Agent Collector ampler Configuration Parameters description sFlow Ports rirrierreircrere CILLA LARC sFlow Sampler Configuration sFlow Port 1 sFlow Instance 1 Sampler Type None Sampling Rate Max Hdr Size
339. ption User Name Add new user The name identifying the user This is also a link to edit the user Privilege Level The privilege level of the user The allowed range is 1 to 15 If the privilege level value is 15 it can access all groups i e that is granted the fully control of the device But others value need to refer to each group privilege level User s privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the access of that group By default setting most groups privilege level 5 has the read only access and privilege level 10 has the read write access And the system maintenance software upload factory defaults and etc need user privilege level 15 Generally the privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account Add new user VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Create a new user account 35 Add User User Settings User Name Password Password again Privilege Level 1 v Apply Reset Cancel User Name The name identifying the user This is also a link to Add Edit User A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 The valid user name is a combination of letters numbers and underscores Password Type a password of the user The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and
340. r Transceivers to the switch If you have no modules please skip this section 1 5 3 Installing Chassis to a 19 Inch Wiring Closet Rail Caution Allow a proper spacing and proper air ventilation for the cooling fan at both sides of the chassis 1 Wear a grounding device for electrostatic discharge 2 Screw the mounting accessory to the front side of the switch 3 Place the Chassis into the 19 inch wiring closet rail and locate it at the proper position Then fix the Chassis by screwing it VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 15 1 5 4 Cabling Requirements To help ensure a successful installation and keep the network performance good please take a care on the cabling requirement Cables with worse specification will render the LAN to work poorly Cabling Requirements for TP Ports For Fast Ethernet TP network connection gt The grade of the cable must be Cat 5 or Cat 5e with a maximum length of 100 meters Gigabit Ethernet TP network connection gt The grade of the cable must be Cat 5 or Cat 5e with a maximum length of 100 meters Cat 5e is recommended Cabling Requirements for SFP Module It is more complex and comprehensive contrast to TP cabling in the fiber media Basically there are two categories of fiber multi mode MM and single mode SM The later is categorized into several classes by the distance it supports They are SX LX LHX XD and ZX From the viewpoint of connector
341. r any QCL entry is yes Refresh You can click them to refresh the QCL information by manual any changes made locally will be undone After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 67 QoS Storm Control Function name QoS Storm Control Function description The function is used to configure the Storm control for the switch There is a unicast storm rate control multicast storm rate control and a broadcast storm rate control These only affect flooded frames i e frames with a VLAN ID DMAC pair not present on the MAC Address table The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off Overview v Por Classification Port Policing Port Scheduler Port Shaping Port Tag Remarking Port DSCP DSCP Based QoS DSCP Translation DSCP Classification QoS Control List QCL Status Storm Control z gt Single IP Easy Port Mirroring UPnP Cnarvion Frame Type Enable Rate pps Unicast 1 v Multicast 1 v Broadcast o 1 v Apply Cancel Parameters description VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 165 166 Frame Type The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here Unicast Multicast or Broadcast Enable Enable or disable
342. r wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address has been seen after a configurable age time Function name Filtering Data Base General Setup Function description The MAC Address Table is configured on this page Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the static MAC table here Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of _ Overview Ea v agyreyauen A Static Trunk LACP gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping MAC Address Table Configuration Aging Configuration Disable Automatic Aging Aging Time 300 seconds MAC Table Learning gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE Y Filtering Data Base Dynamic MAC Table gt VLAN gt GARP gt GVRP gt Qos gt Single IP aje ___Port Members 144 12 13 14 15 Static MAC Table Configuration Port Members AAP raresee aa 4R 4 gt Daiata VLAN MAC g lalalalel7 Parameters description Aging Configuration Disable Automatic Aging Check it to enable this function Aging Time By default dynamic entries are removed fr
343. rSwitch P2261 User s Guide 197 198 network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Multi 802 1X variant Multi 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X Multi 802 1X is like Single 802 1 X not an IEEE standard but a variant that features many of the same characteristics In Multi 802 1X one or more supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time Each supplicant is authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security module In Multi 802 1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as destination MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the supplicant since that would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch Instead the switch uses the supplicant s MAC address which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant An exception to this is when no supplicants are attached In this case the switch sends EAPOL Request Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination to wake up any supplicants that might be on the port The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality MAC based Auth Unlike port based 802 1X MAC based authenticatio
344. rames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP IPv6 The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled Port Redirect Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button Clear The simple counts will be reset to
345. ration of attribute values A GARP participation in a switch or an end station consists of a GARP application component and a GARP Information Declaration GID component associated with each port or the switch The propagation of information between GARP participants for the same application in a bridge is carried out by the GARP Information Propagation GIP component Protocol exchanges take place between GARP participants by means of LLC Type 1 services using the group MAC address and PDU format defined for the GARP application concerned Function name GARP General Setup Function description The function is used to configure the basic GARP Configuration settings for all switch ports Auto Logout Off Overview Te gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN Y GARP Statistics GVRP gt Qos gt Single IP Easy Port Mirroring UPnP Security Maintenance Parameters description Port kkk Loh hh keh ed Ce GARP Port Configuration Refresh Attribute Type Auto refresh Timer Values Leave Leave All Application GARP Applicant Join Timer VLAN normal participant VLAN normal participant VLAN normal participant VLAN normal participant VLAN normal participant VLAN normal participant VLAN normal participant VLAN normal participant
346. re subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period Aging Period 212 If Aging Enabled is checked then the aging period is controlled with this input If other modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses they may have other requirements to the aging period The underlying port security will use the shorter requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10 000 000 seconds VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide To understand why aging may be desired consider the following scenario Suppose an end host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub which in turn is connected to a port on this switch on which Limit Control is enabled The end host will be allowed to forward if the limit is not exceeded Now suppose that the end host logs off or powers down If it wasn t for aging the end host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to forward To overcome this situation enable aging With aging enabled a timer is started once the end host gets secured When the timer expires the switch starts looking for frames from the end host and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period the end host is assumed to be disconnected and the corresponding resources are freed on the switch Port Configuration Port The port number to which the configuration below applies Mode Controls whet
347. rently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over DrayTek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview v Aaggieyauv F Static Trunk 7 gt LACP gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping VLAN Y MLD Snooping ID General Setup VLAN General Setup Port Group Filtering Status IPv6 SSM Information F gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN MLD Snooping Groups Information Auto refresh Start from VLAN 1 and group address ff00 entries per page with 20 o ooo o o PornMembers_ i Groups JBE ajsje 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 No more entries Parameters description VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group Groups Group address of the group displayed Port Members Ports under this group Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button 99 100 2 3 24 MLD Snooping IPv6 SSM Information Function name MLD Snooping IPv6 SSM Information Function description The section describes the user to configure the Entries in the MLDv2 Information Table are shown on this page The MLDv 2 Information Table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and the
348. resh System Start from Pot 1 VLAN 1 and IP address 0 0 0 0 with 20 entries per Coniston ome gt ACL Port VLAN ID IP Address MAC Address Y IP Source Guard No more entries General Setup Static Table gt ARP Inspection gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay gt NAS gt AAA Port Security gt Access Management SSH nerna Parameters description Start from Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed VLAN ID VLAN ID in which the IP traffic is permitted IP Address User IP address of the entry MAC Address Source MAC address Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 4 8 ARP Inspection General Setup Function name ARP Inspection General Setup Function description The function is used to configure the ARP Inspection parameters of the switch You could use the ARP Inspection configure to manage the ARP table Configuration gt ACL gt IP Source Guard Y ARP Inspection eneral Setup Static Table Dynamic Table gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay gt NAS gt AAA gt Port Security gt Access Management SSH nerna Parameters description ARP Inspection Configuration ARP Inspection Configuration M
349. respective tx and rx wakeup time as a way to agree upon the minimum wakeup time they need Function name Aggregation Static Trunk Function description The function is used to provide an overview of EEE information exchanged by LLDP Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off Overview v Mygyreygauen Static Trunk gt LACP gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping gt MVR Vv LLDP LLDP General Setup LLDP Neighbours LLDP MED General Setup LLDP MED Neighbours Port Statistics gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN Parameters description Auto refresh Refresh Fallback Receive Tw Local Tx Echo Echo Resolved Resolved EEE Tw Tx Tw Rx Tw Tx Tw Rx Tw activated No LLDP EEE information found Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted Tx Tw The link partner s maximum time that transmit path can hold off sending data after deassertion of LPI Rx Tw The link partner s time that receiver would like the transmitter to hold off to allow time for the receiver to wake from sleep Fallback Receive Tw The link partner s fallback receive Tw A receiving link partner may inform the transmitter of an alternate desired Tw_sys_tx Since a receiving link partner is likely to have discrete levels for savings this provides the transmitter with additional information that it may use for a more efficient allocation Sys
350. ress and port members for the new entry Click Apply After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 40 Filtering Data Base Dynamic MAC Table Function name Filtering Data Base Dynamic MAC Table Function description Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries and is sorted first by VLAN ID then by MAC address VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 127 128 Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 pan aD Ba ETa Auto Logout Of Ove rview v aggieygauon Static Trunk gt LACP MAC Address Table Auto refresh Start from VLAN 1 and MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 with 20 entries per page Cis Ga gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping MAC gt MLD Snooping Type VLAN Aika CPU 1 2 Sickles 00 18 24 gt LLDP Dynamic 1 ERSA v gt PoE 00 1D AA Dynamic v Filtering Data Base AG 26 18 00 1F 1F Salai ie Dynamic C4 88 40 A D Dynamic pa gt VLAN J 71 08 0C gt GARP 00 50 7F E GURE piste F0 C0 49 gt Qos 1C 4B D6 gt Single IP il Parameters description Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or a dynamic entry MAC address The MAC address of the entry VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry Port Members The ports that are members of the entry Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed
351. rform the Ping job 234 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide This page is left blank VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 235 Chapter 3 Trouble Shooting This section will guide you to solve abnormal situations if you cannot access into the Internet after installing the device and finishing the web configuration Please follow sections below to check your basic installation status stage by stage Checking if the hardware status is OK or not Checking if the network connection settings on your computer are OK or not Pinging the device from your computer Checking if the ISP settings are OK or not Backing to factory default setting if necessary If all above stages are done and the device still cannot run normally it is the time for you to contact your dealer for advanced help 3 1 Resolving No Link Condition The possible causes for a no link LED status are as follows The attached device is not powered on The cable may not be the correct type or is faulty The installed building premise cable is faulty o The port may be faulty 3 2Q amp A 236 1 Computer A can connect to Computer B but cannot connect to Computer C through the Managed Switch gt The network device of Computer C may fail to work Please check the link act status of Computer C on the LED indicator Try another network device on this connection gt The network configuration of Computer C may be something wrong Please verify the network con
352. riority is specified tag priority is don t care After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 4 4 ACL ACL Status Function name ACL ACL Status Function description The function is used to show the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch DrayTek lt pa VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview System e Ingress Rate Port CPU Configuration User Port Action Limiter Redirect Mirror CPU Once Cou All Deny Disabled Disabled Disabled 3 ACL Status Combined _ Auto refresh P ACL Management IPv4 UDP Ports Ip All 68 DHCP Deny Disabled Disabled Disabled Rate Limiters Management Server Access Control List f Reseved All EType Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled No No ACT Status Reserved All EType Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled No No gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay gt NAS gt AAA gt Port Security gt Access Management ann Parameters description User Indicates the ACL user Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any ingress port Policy Th
353. rmat Auto Logout Off Overview System Configuration Save as Backup Configuration Are you sure to save the current setting as Security Backup Configuration Restart Device gt Firmware Y Save Restore Factory Defaults Save Start Restore User gt Export import gt Diagnostics Click Save to perform the work You can save view or load the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags 228 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 5 7 Save Restore Restore User Function name Save Restore Restore User Function description The function is used to restore user information back to the switch Any current configuration files will be restored via XML format Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout of Overview System Configuration Security Restore Backup Configuration Are you sure to restore the Backup Configuration Restart Device gt Firmware Y Save Restore Factory Defaults Save Start Save User gt Export Import gt Diagnostics Click Save to perform the work You can save view or load the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 229 2 5 8 Export Import Export Config Function name Export Import Export Config Function description The function is used to export the Switch configuration Any current configuration files will be
354. rogrammable classifier for QoS Layer 4 Multimedia 8K MAC address and 4K VLAN support IEEE802 1Q Per port shaping policing and Broadcast Storm Control TEEE802 lad Q in Q nested VLAN support Full duplex flow control IEEE802 3x and half duplex backpressure Extensive front panel diagnostic LEDs System Power TP Port1 24 LINK ACT 10 100 1000Mbps SFP Port 21 24 SFP LINK ACT Management Supports concisely the status of port and easily port configuration Supports per port traffic monitoring counters Supports a snapshot of the system Information when you login Supports port mirror function Supports the static trunk function Supports 802 1Q VLAN Supports user management and limits three users to login Maximal packet length can be up to 9600 bytes for jumbo frame application Supports DHCP Broadcasting Suppression to avoid network suspended or crashed Supports to send the trap event while monitored events happened Supports default configuration which can be restored to overwrite the current configuration which is working on via web browser and CLI Supports on line plug unplug SFP modules Supports Quality of Service QoS for real time applications based on the information taken from Layer 2 to Layer 4 such as VoIP VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 11 Built in web based management and CLI management providing amore convenient UI for the user Supports port mirror function with ingress egress traffic Supports rapid spanni
355. rror management mechanisms SNAP The Subnetwork Access Protocol SNAP is a mechanism for multiplexing on networks using IEEE 802 2 LLC more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8 bit 802 2 Service Access Point SAP fields SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values it also supports vendor private protocol identifier spaces It is used with IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 4 IEEE 802 5 IEEE 802 11 and other IEEE 802 physical network layers as well as with non IEEE 802 physical network layers such as FDDI that use 802 2 LLC Function name VLAN Protocol based VLAN Protocol Group Function description The function is used to add new protocols to Group Name unique for each Group mapping entries as well as used to allow you to see and delete the already mapped entries Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base No Group entry found VLAN Membership Switch Status Port Status gt Private VLANs gt MAC based VLAN Protocol based VLAN Group to VLAN gt Voice VLAN gt GARP gt GVRP gt Qos x Parameters description Delete Check this box to delete the entry Frame Type Frame Type can have one of the following values Fthernet LLC SNAP Note On changing the Frame type field valid value of the VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 141 following text field will vary depending on the new
356. rt as untrusted sources of the DHCP message EXAMPLE Switch dhcp snooping port mode 1 trusted Switch dhcp snooping VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 277 proxy qi qri querier 278 Set IGMP Proxy Mode SYNTAX Mode lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter disable Disable IGMP Proxy enable Enable IGMP Proxy EXAMPLE Switch igmp proxy disable Switch igmp Set per VLAN Query Interval SYNTAX Qi lt vlan list gt lt 1 255 gt Parameter lt vlan list gt VLAN list available value is from 1 to 4094 format 1 3 5 lt 1 255 gt Range 1 255 sec Default 125 sec EXAMPLE Switch igmp qi 1 10 Switch igmp Set per VLAN Query Response Interval SYNTAX Qri lt vlan list gt lt 0 31744 gt Parameter lt vlan list gt VLAN list available value is from 1 to 4094 format 1 3 5 lt 0 31744 gt Range 0 31744 tenths of sec Default 100 tenths of sec EXAMPLE Switch igmp qi 1 10 Switch igmp Set per VLAN IGMP Querier SYNTAX Qri lt vlan list gt lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter lt vlan list gt VLAN list available value is from 1 to 4094 format 1 3 5 disable Disable per VLAN IGMP Querier enable Enable per VLAN IGMP Querier EXAMPLE Switch igmp querier 1 disable Switch igmp VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide router rv show Set Router Port SYNTAX Router lt port list gt lt disable gt lt enable
357. rver already then the switch will show Server disconnect Show To display the RADIUS AAA information 246 Syntax Show lt config gt Show lt statistics gt lt 1 5 gt Parameter lt config gt To show AAA configuration lt statistics gt To show RADIUS statistics lt 1 5 gt The RADIUS Server Index EXAMPLE Switch aaa show config Server Timeout 15 seconds VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Server Dead Time 300 seconds TACACS Authorization and Accounting Configuration Authorization Disable Fallback to Local Authorization Disable Accounting Disable RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration Server Mode IP Address or Host Name Port Secret 1 Disabled 1812 2 Disabled 1812 3 Disabled 1812 4 Disabled 1812 5 Disabled 1812 RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration Server Mode IP Address or Host Name Port Secret 1 Disabled 1813 2 Disabled 1813 3 Disabled 1813 4 Disabled 1813 5 Disabled 1813 TACACS Authentication Server Configuration Server Mode IP Address or Host Name Port Secret 1 Disabled 49 2 Disabled 49 3 Disabled 49 4 Disabled 49 5 Disabled 49 Switch aaa Switch aaa show statistics 1 Server 1 0 0 0 0 1812 RADIUS Authentication Statistics Rx Access Accepts 0 Tx Access Requests 0 Rx Access Rejects 0 Tx Access Retransmissions 0 Rx Access Challenges 0 Tx Pending Requests 0 Rx Malformed Acc Responses 0 Tx Timeouts 0 Rx Bad Authenticators 0 Rx Unknown Types
358. rview of QoS Egress Port Schedulers for all switch ports Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of _ Overview Ce Sr gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN gt GARP gt GVRP Y QoS Port Classification Port Policing Port Scheduler Port Shaping Port Tag Remarking Port DSCP DSCP Based QoS Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority ENS IS E l w iw Wim n e w me e Parameters description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers Mode Shows the scheduling mode for this port Weight QO Qn Shows the weight for this queue and port VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 153 2 3 59 QoS Port Shaping Function name QoS Port Shaping Function description The function is to provide an overview of QoS Egress Port Shapers for all switch ports Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview TT STOTT gt MLD Snooping gt MVR gt LLDP gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN gt GARP gt GVRP Qos Port Classification Port Policing Port Scheduler Port Tag Remarking Port DSCP DSC
359. s back sender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does not provide acknowledgments The syslog packet will always send out even if the syslog server does not exist Possible modes are Enabled Enable server mode operation Disabled Disable server mode operation Server Address Indicates the IPv4 host address of syslog server If the switch provide DNS feature it also can be a host name Syslog Level VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Indicates what kind of message will send to syslog server Possible modes are Emerg Send Emerg Alert Send Emerg Alert Crit Send Emerg Alert Crit Error Send Emerg Alert Crit Error 63 Warning Send warnings Notice Send Emerg Alert Crit Error Warning Notice Info Send Emerg Alert Crit Error Warning Notice Info Debug Send everything i e all After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 2 27 System Log Log Function name System Log Log Function description It describes that display the system log information of the switch Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of M Overview NTP amp Time Configuration gt Account gt IP gt Port gt Loop Protection Trap Event Severity gt SNMP Y Syslog General Setup a Detailed Log SMTP General Setup gt sFlow Agent Configuration Security Maintenance Parameters description
360. s table It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string In addition to community string a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet Set Community Indicate the community write access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c Mode Indicate the Set Community mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable Set Community Disabled Disable Set Community After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 2 20 SNMP Communities Function name Communities Function description This function is used to configure SNMPv3 communities The Community and User Name are unique To create a new community account please click the Add new community button and enter the account information then click Apply VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 53 Max Group Number 4 Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off Overview gt System Information Information Add new community Apply Device Name CPU Load NTP amp Time Configuration gt Account gt IP gt Port gt Loop Protection Trap Event Severity Y SNMP System General Setup Users Croan v Parameter Description Del
361. sales departmen 07 46 19 2011 08 03 16 55 20 v1 00 v0 87 v1l 00 v1 00 TIM0123456789 192216801 259225990259 10 0 0 0 0 00 01 c1 00 00 00 115200 64 16 0 2 3 8192 MAC addresses 8 queues per port 9600 To show the system detail information Syntax show Parameter none EXAMPLE Switch system show Model Name PSGS 2314Jd System Description 12 advance managed switch Location Taiwan Taipei Contact administrator sales departmen 07 46 19 2011 08 03 16 55 20 Device Name System Uptime Current Time BIOS Version v1 00 Firmware Version v0 87 Hardware Mechanical Version v1l 00 v1 00 Series Number TIM0123456789 Host IP Address 192 168 0570 Subnet Mask 259 200 x00 40 Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 Host MAC Address 00 01 c1 00 00 00 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Console Baudrate RAM Size Flash Size CPU Load 100ms 1s 10s Bridge FDB Size Transmit Queue Maximum Frame Size Switch system 115200 64 16 0 2 3 8192 MAC addresses 8 queues per port 9600 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 365 THERMAL of CLI port priority To configure the port priority Syntax port priority lt port list gt lt port priority gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt port priority gt To set the port priority available value is from 0 to 3 EXAMPLE Switch thermal port priority 3 5 3
362. settings contained in the same row Mode Select mirror mode Rx only Frames received on this port are mirrored on the mirror port Frames transmitted are not mirrored Tx only Frames transmitted on this port are mirrored on the mirror port Frames received are not mirrored Disabled Neither frames transmitted nor frames received are mirrored Enabled Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored on the mirror port Note For a given port a frame is only transmitted once It is therefore not possible to mirror Tx frames on the mirror port Because of this mode for the selected mirror port is VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide limited to Disabled or Rx only After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 72 UPnP Function name UPnP Function description The function is used to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components Auto Logout Of uto Logou UPnP Configuration Overview gt IGMP Snooping Mode Disabled gt MLD Snooping TIL 4 gt MVR Advertising Duration 100 gt LLDP ero Ss gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN gt GARP gt GVRP gt Qos gt Single IP Easy Port Mirroring m Security Maintenance ers descrip
363. snmp trap entry lt user gt Show snmpv3 users entry lt view gt Show snmpv3 views entry EXAMPLE Switch snmp show mode SNMPv3 State Show SNMP State Enabled SNMPv3 Engine ID 80001455030001c1000000 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 355 Trap 356 Switch snmp To configure the SNMP trap parameter the command adds an SNMP trap entry Syntax trap lt trap index gt lt version gt lt trap host IP address gt lt trap port gt lt severity level gt lt security name gt lt security_level gt lt Authentication protocol gt lt Authentication password gt Parameter lt trap index gt Index to SNMP trap table Range 1 6 lt version gt SNMP trap protocol version v2 v3 v2 is v2c and v3 is v3 lt trap host IP address gt To set IP Address of the management station to receive notification messages lt trap port gt To set the trap port the available value is from 1 to 65535 lt severity level gt To configure the Severity level the available value is from 0 to 7 lt 0 gt Emergency system is unusable lt 1 gt Alert action must be taken immediately lt 2 gt Critical critical conditions lt 3 gt Error error conditions lt 4 gt Warning warning conditions lt 5 gt Notice normal but significant condition lt 6 gt Informational informational messages lt 7 gt Debug debug level messages lt security name gt Specifies the community access string
364. snooping mode operation When DHCP snooping mode operation is enabled the DHCP request messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allow reply packets from the trusted ports Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation Port Mode Configuration Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode Possible port modes are Trusted Configures the port as trusted source of the DHCP messages Untrusted Configures the port as untrusted source of the DHCP messages After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 188 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 4 12 DHCP Snooping Statistics Function name DHCP Snooping Statistics Function description The function is used to show the DHCP Snooping Statistics information of the switch The statistics show only packet counters when DHCP snooping mode is enabled and relay mode is disabled And it doesn t count the DHCP packets for DHCP client Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of DHCP Snooping Port Statistics Pot 1 Auto refresh Overview Ea System e Receive Packets Transmit Packets Configuration Rx Discover 0 Tx Discover 0 Rx Offer 0 Tx Offer 0 E AGE Rx Request 0 Tx Request 0 ARE aria Rx Decline 0 Tx Decline 0 DHCP Snooping Rx ACK 0 Tx ACK 0 General Setup q Rx NAK 0 Tx NAK 0 Rx Release 0 Tx Release 0 gt DHCP Relay Rx Inform 0 Tx Inform 0 g
365. st commonly used object in the IOS It is used for packet filtering but also for selecting types of traffic to be analyzed forwarded or influenced in some way The ACLs are divided into EtherTypes IPv4 ARP protocol MAC and VLAN parameters and etc Here we will just go over the standard and extended access lists for TCP IP As you create ACEs for ingress classification you can assign a policy for each port The policy number is 1 8 however each policy can be applied to any port This makes it very easy to determine what type of ACL policy you will be working with Function name ACL Ports Function description The function is used to configure the ACL parameters ACE of the each switch port These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE Auto Logout Of z ACL Ports Configuration Overview System Configuration v ACL Rate Limiters Access Control List ACL Status gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay gt NAS gt AAA gt Port Security gt Access Management ne Parameters description Port Policy ID Action v Permit v Permit ts Permit v Rate Limiter ID v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled Permit v Disabled 9 Port Redirect Disabled PN Disabled Port 1 Pot2 m Disabled fg Mirror Disabled D
366. t 1 3 5 lt disable gt To disable GVRP function on port lt enable gt To enable GVRP function on port EXAMPLE Switch gvrp mode 3 5 enable Switch gvrp To enable or disable the GVRP restricted role on port Syntax rrole lt port list gt lt disable enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt disable gt To disable GVRP restricted role on port lt enable gt To enable GVRP restricted role on port EXAMPLE Switch gvrp rrole 3 5 enable Switch gvrp To show the GVRP function information Syntax show lt config gt show lt statistics gt Parameter lt config gt To show the GVRP configuration lt statistics gt To show the basic GVRP port statistics EXAMPLE Switch gvrp show config GVRP global mode Enabled Port Mode Restricted Role 1 Diabled Diabled 2 Diabled Diabled 3 Enabled Enabled 4 Enabled Enabled 5 Enabled Enabled VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 215 Diabled Diabled Diabled Diabled Diabled Diabled 9 Diabled Diabled 10 Diabled Diabled Switch gvrp oOo aon Switch gvrp show statistics 1 10 Port Joins Tx Count Leaves Tx Count oaorA nN OF WD BP Oo Oo OO oOo O oa Oo oO amp 10 Switc Dog O O O O n O OO oO gvrp Https Commands of CLI mode redirect show 276 Configure the HTTPS mode SYNTAX mode lt disable gt lt enable gt
367. t Filtering Data Base gt VLAN gt GARP gt GVRP gt Qos gt Aen M Parameters description Hash Code Contributors a ee Aggregation Mode Configuration Hash Code Contributors Source MAC Address cd Destination MAC Address IP Address v TCP UDP Port Number v Aggregation Group Configuration Port Members Group 11 12 13 14 145 46 Normal Source MAC Address The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address or uncheck to disable By default Source MAC Address is enabled Destination MAC Address The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address or uncheck to disable By default Destination MAC Address is disabled IP Address The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the IP Address or uncheck to disable By default IP Address is enabled TCP UDP Port Number The TCP UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the TCP UDP Port Number or uncheck to disable By default TCP UDP Port Number is enabled Aggregation Group Configuration Group ID Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row Group ID Normal indicates there is no
368. t NAS Rx Lease Query 0 Tx Lease Query 0 gt AAA Rx Lease Tx Lease j 0 0 gt Port Security Unassigned Unassigned gt Access Management Rx Lease Unknown 0 Tx Lease Unknown 0 SSH Rx Lease Active 0 Tx Lease Active 0 HTTPS Ave RAnd mai Parameters description Rx and Tx Discover The number of discover option 53 with value 1 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Offer The number of offer option 53 with value 2 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Request The number of request option 53 with value 3 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Decline The number of decline option 53 with value 4 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx ACK The number of ACK option 53 with value 5 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx NAK The number of NAK option 53 with value 6 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Release The number of release option 53 with value 7 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Inform The number of inform option 53 with value 8 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Lease Query The number of lease query option 53 with value 10 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Lease The number of lease unassigned option 53 with value 11 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 189 190 Unassigned packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Lease Unknown The number of lease unknown option 53 with value 12
369. t Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt disable gt Disable port BPDU Guard lt enable gt Enable port BPDU Guard EXAMPLE Switch mstp p bpduGuard 3 5 enable Switch mstp p cost To set the STP port instance path cost 322 Syntax p cost lt 0 7 gt lt port list gt lt 0 200000000 gt Parameter VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide p edge p mode p p2p lt 0 7 gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTII 1 lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt 0 200000000 gt STP port path cost 1 200000000 or the value zero means auto status EXAMPLE Switch mstp p cost 0 3 5 0 Switch mstp To set the STP adminEdge port parameter Syntax p edge lt port list gt lt disable enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt disable gt Configure MSTP adminEdge to Non edge lt enable gt Configure MSTP adminEdge to Edge EXAMPLE Switch mstp p edge 3 5 enable Switch mstp To set the STP enabling for a port Syntax p mode lt port list gt lt disable enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt disable gt Disable MSTP protocol lt enable gt Enable MSTP protocol EXAMPLE Switch mstp p mode 3 5 enable Switch mstp To set the STP point to point port parameter Syntax
370. t Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded No MAC addresses can be learned on the port until it is administratively re opened on the Limit Control configuration Web page 215 MAC Count Current The two columns indicate the number of currently learned Limit MAC addresses forwarding as well as blocked and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port respectively If no user modules are enabled on the port the Current column will show a dash If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port the Limit column will show a dash Indicates the number of currently learned MAC addresses forwarding as well as blocked on the port If no user modules are enabled on the port a dash will be shown Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button 2 4 23 Port Security Port Status Function name Port Security Port Status Function description The function shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to
371. t Email Address 4 Configuration Security Email Address 5 Maintenance Email Address 6 SMTP Configuration User Name Sender Parameters description Mail Server Specify the IP Address of the server transferring your email Username Specify the username on the mail server Password Specify the password on the mail server Sender Set the mail sender name Return Path To set the mail return path as sender mail address Email Address 1 6 Email address that would like to receive the alarm message After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 2 30 sFlow Agent Collector Function name sFlow Agent Collector Function description The sFlow Collector configuration for the switch can be monitored and modified here Up to 1 Collector is supported This page allows for configuring sFlow collector IP type sFlow collector IP Address Port Number for each sFlow Collector The Current field displays the currently configured sFlow Collector The Configured field displays the new Collector Configuration Auto Logout Of Overview A NTP amp Time Configuration Configured Current gt Account Receiver Id 1 1 gt IP IP Type IPV4 IPv4 gt Port IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 gt Loop Protection Port 6343 6343 Trap Event Severity gt SNMP Time O
372. t LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic comm name LLDP MEDO1 Switch lldpmed Syntax civic contry code lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry and it is the two letter ISO 3166 country code EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic country code 86 Switch lldpmed Syntax civic country lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic country tw Switch lldpmed Syntax civic district lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic district El Switch lldpmed Syntax VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 297 298 civic floor lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic floor 5 Switch lldpmed Syntax civic house no lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic house no 5 Switch lldpmed Syntax civic house no suffix lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic house no suffix line3 Switch lldpmed Syntax civic landmark lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The val
373. t Secret Enabled 192 168 2 22 65535 radius Disabled 1813 Disabled 1813 Disabled 1813 5 Disabled 1813 TACACS Authentication Server Configuration Server Mode IP Address or Host Name Port Secret 1 Disabled 49 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Accounting 2 Disabled 49 3 Disabled 49 4 Disabled 49 5 Disabled 49 Switch aaa To enable or disable the RADIUS accounting operation mode Syntax accounting lt enable disable gt Parameter lt disable gt Globally disable Accounting operation mode lt enable gt Globally enable Accounting operation mode EXAMPLE Switch aaa accounting enable Server disconnect Switch aaa accounting disable Switch aaa NOTE If you didn t connect the RADIUS Server already then the switch will show Server disconnect Authorization To configure enable disable RADIUS Authorization mode Deadtime Syntax authorization lt enable disable gt Parameter lt disable gt Globally disable Authorization operation mode lt enable gt Globally enable Authorization operation mode EXAMPLE Switch aaa authorization enable Switch aaa To configure the RADIUS server deadtime Syntax deadtime lt 0 3600 gt Parameter lt 0 3600 gt Time that a server is considered dead if it doesn t answer a request The available value is from 0 to 3600 second Default Setting None EXAMPLE Switch aaa deadtime 3600
374. t coordinate value gt Meters or floors with max 4 digits lt floor gt Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different floor to floor dimension lt meter gt Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed coordinate altitude 25 floor Switch lldpmed Syntax coordinate datum lt nad83 mllw nad83 navd88 wgs84 gt Parameter lt nad83 mllw gt North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water MLLW This datum pair is to be used when referencing location on water sea ocean lt nad83 navd88 gt North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 NAVD88 This datum pair is to be used when referencing location on land not near tidal water which would use Datum NAD83 MLLW lt wegs84 gt Geographical 3D World Geodesic System 1984 CRS Cod 4327 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed coordinate datum nad83 navd88 Switch lldpmed Syntax coordinate latitude lt coordinate value gt lt north south gt Parameter lt coordinate value gt 0 to 90 degrees with max 4 digits lt north gt North of the equator lt south gt South of the equator EXAMPLE VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 301 delete 302
375. t describes that display the detailed log information of the switch Dray Tek fi ab bb see ae ee wlrrrrrrirrrrrY F gt VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview ca ra Detailed System Log Information a NTP amp Time Configuration ID 1 gt Account gt IP gt Port gt Loop Protection Message lt lt _ _ lt lt gt gt C gt Trap Event Severity gt SNMP Warning Y Syslog 2011 01 01 00 00 02 General Setup Message Switch just made a cold boot Log SMTP General Setup gt sFlow Agent Configuration Security Maintenance Parameters description ID ID gt 1 of the system log entry Message The detailed message of the system log entry Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 65 2 2 29 SMTP General Setup Function name SMTP General Setup Function description The function is used to set an Alarm trap when the switch alarm then you could set the SMTP server to send you the alarm mail Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of oro evan F NTP amp Time Configuration Mail Server gt Account gt IP gt Port Password gt Loop Protection Severity Level Trap Event Severity gt SNMP Y Syslog Return Path General Setup Email Address 1 Log Detailed Log Email Address 2 SMTP General Setup Email Address 3 e SFiow Agen
376. t or not Restricted Role If enabled causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI even if it has the best spanning tree priority vector Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected If set it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity It can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influence the spanning tree active topology possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator This feature is also known as Root Guard Restricted TCN If enabled causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other ports If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning tree s active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned station location information It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network causing address flushing in that region possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical link state of the attached LANs transits frequently BPDU Guard If enabled causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU s Contrary to the similar bridge setting the port Edge status does not affect this setting A port entering error disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge
377. te Check to delete the entry Port The logical port for the settings VLAN ID The VLAN ID number for the settings MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets IP Address Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets Add new entry Click to add a new entry to the Static ARP Inspection table Specify the Port VLAN ID MAC address and IP address for the new entry Click Apply Static ARP Inspection Table VLAN ID MAC Address After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 186 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 4 10 ARP Inspection Dynamic Table Function name ARP Inspection Dynamic Table Function description The function is used to configure the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table parameters of the switch The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries and is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by MAC address and then by IP address Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Ps Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Auto refresh Overview System Al Start from Port 1 VLAN 1 MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 and IP address Configuration 0 0 0 0 with 20 entries perpage lt lt gt ACL gt IP Source Guard No more entries Y ARP Inspection General Setup Static Table 4 gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay gt NAS gt AAA gt Port Security gt Access Management SSH
378. ted to adhere to this class include but are not limited to end user communication appliances such as IP Phones PC based softphones or other communication appliances that directly support the end user Discovery services defined in this class include provision of 115 116 location identifier including ECS E911 information embedded L2 switch support inventory management LLDP MED Capabilities LLDP MED Capabilities describes the neighbour unit s LLDP MED capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 LLDP MED capabilities 2 Network Policy 3 Location Identification 4 Extended Power via MDI PSE 5 Extended Power via MDI PD 6 Inventory 7 Reserved Application Type Application Type indicating the primary function of the application s defined for this network policy advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device The possible application types are shown below 1 Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications 2 Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media 3 Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets
379. tems that do not implement this option default the value to be the same as that of the Receive Tw_sys_tx Echo Tx Tw The link partner s Echo Tx Tw value The respective echo values shall be defined as the local link VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide partner reflection echo of the remote link partners respective values When a local link partner receives its echoed values from the remote link partner it can determine whether or not the remote link partner has received registered and processed its most recent values For example if the local link partner receives echoed parameters that do not match the values in its local MIB then the local link partner infers that the remote link partners request was based on stale information Echo Rx Tw The link partner s Echo Rx Tw value Resolved Tx Tw The resolved Tx Tw for this link Note NOT the link partner The resolved value that is the actual tx wakeup time used for this link based on EEE information exchanged via LLDP Resolved Rx Tw The resolved Rx Tw for this link Note NOT the link partner The resolved value that is the actual tx wakeup time used for this link based on EEE information exchanged via LLDP Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button 119
380. ter lt protocol gt Protocol based VLAN ethertype protocol to group mapping lt ethernet gt Protocol based VLAN Ethernet II protocol to group mapping lt ether type gt Ether type available value is from 0x0600 to Oxffff lt protocol based vlan name gt Up to 16 characters to describe protocol based VLAN group name EXAMPLE Switch vcl protocol vlan protocol ethernet 0x0600 ethevin3 Switch vcl show protocol vlan Protocol Type Protocol Value Group Name Ethernet ETYPE 0x600 ethevin3 Group Name VID Ports provla0 3 7 10 Switch vcl Syntax protocol vlan lt protocol gt lt llc gt lt DSAP value gt lt SSAP value gt lt protocol based vlan name gt Parameter lt protocol gt Protocol based VLAN ethertype protocol to group mapping lt llc gt Protocol based VLAN LLC protocol to group mapping lt DSAP value gt DSAP value available value is from 0x00 to Oxff lt SSAP value gt SSAP value available value is from 0x00 to Oxff lt protocol based vlan name gt Up to 16 characters to describe protocol based VLAN group name EXAMPLE Switch vcl protocol vlan protocol llc 0x00 Oxff llcvl3 Switch vcl show protocol vlan Protocol Type Protocol Value Group Name LLC DSAP 0x00 SSAP 0xff licv13 Ethernet ETYPE 0x600 ethevin3 Group Name VID Ports provla0 3 TAL Switch vcl Syntax protocol vlan lt protocol gt lt snap gt lt oui address gt lt protocol ID gt lt protocol based vlan name
381. ter finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 137 2 3 47 VLAN MAC based VLAN General Setup MAC address based VLAN decides the VLAN for forwarding an untagged frame based on the source MAC address of the frame A most common way of grouping VLAN members is by port hence the name port based VLAN Typically the device adds the same VLAN tag to untagged packets that are received through the same port Later on these packets can be forwarded in the same VLAN Port based VLAN is easy to configure and applies to networks where the locations of terminal devices are relatively fixed As mobile office and wireless network access gain more popularity the ports that terminal devices use to access the networks are very often non fixed A device may access a network through Port A this time but through Port B the next time If Port A and Port B belong to different VLANs the device will be assigned to a different VLAN the next time it accesses the network As a result it will not be able to use the resources in the old VLAN On the other hand if Port A and Port B belong to the same VLAN after terminal devices access the network through Port B they will have access to the same resources as those accessing the network through Port A do which brings security issues To provide user access and ensure data security in the mean time the MAC based VLAN technology is
382. the device s user interface or SNMP Device name The name of the switch User defined Default is VigorSwitch P2261 System Date The date that this switch is powered up System Uptime The time accumulated since this switch is powered up Its format is day hour minute second BIOS version The version of the BIOS in this switch Firmware version The firmware version in this switch Hardware Mechanical version 30 The version of Hardware and Mechanical The figure before the hyphen is the version of electronic hardware the one after the hyphen is the version of mechanical VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Serial Code The serial number is assigned by the manufacturer Host IP address The IP address of the switch Subnet Mask Displays the IP subnet mask assigned to the device Gateway IP Address Displays the default gateway IP address assigned to the device Host MAC address It is the Ethernet MAC address of the management agent in this switch Console Baudrate Displays the baudrate of RS232 COM port RAM size The size of the DRAM in this switch Flash size The size of the flash memory in this switch Bridge FDB Size Displays the bridge forwarding database size of the device Transmit Queue Displays the information about the transmit priority queue of switch Maximum Frame Size Displays the information about
383. the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise Auto Logout Off Dii Port Security Port Status Port 1 Port 1__ Auto refresh Refresh System MAC Address VLAN ID State Time of Addition Age Hold Configuration No MAC addresses attached gt ACL gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay gt NAS gt AAA Y Port Security Limit Control Switch Status gt Access Management SSH v Parameters description 216 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide MAC Address amp VLAN The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port If ID no MAC addresses are learned a single row stating No MAC addresses attached is displayed State Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding In the blocked state it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic Time of Addition Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port Age Hold If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address it will stay in the blocked state until the hold time measured in seconds expires If all user m
384. the firmware versions for the routers explained in this manual Note For Windows 7 user please make sure the Windows Features of Telnet Client has been turned on under Control Panel gt gt Programs Type cmd and press Enter The Telnet terminal will be open later Programs 1 cmd See more results cmd x Shut down gt In the following window type Telnet 192 168 1 1 as below and press Enter Note that the IP address in the example is the default address of the router If you have changed the default enter the current IP address of the router ga C Windows system32 cmd exe Lo Microsoft Windows Version 6 1 7601 R Copyright lt c gt 2009 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved C Users User gt telnet 192 168 1 1 Next type admin admin for Account Password Then type You will see a list of valid common commands depending on the router that your use VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 239 For users using previous Windows system e g 2000 XP simply click Start gt gt Run and type Telnet 192 168 1 1 in the Open box as below Next type admin admin for Account Password And type to get a list of valid common commands Run 2 x resource and Windows will open it for you Open telnet 192 168 1 1 v Z Type the name of a program folder document or Internet Cancel Browse 802 1X Commands of CLI Agetime Configure the time in seconds between check for activ
385. the port and will not cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized Reinitialize Forces a reinitialization of the clients on the port and thereby a reauthentication immediately The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the 201 reauthentication is in progress After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 202 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 4 16 NAS Switch Status Function name NAS Switch Status Function description The function is used to show the each port NAS status information of the switch The status includes Admin State Port State Last Source Last ID QoS Class and Port VLAN ID Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout lor YI Overview System Configuration gt ACL gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay Y NAS General Setup Port Status gt AAA gt Port Security gt Access Management SSH nerna Parameters description Network Access Server Switch Status Refresh Last Port VLAN Admin State Port State Globally Authorized Disabled Force Globally Authorized Disabled Force Globally Authorized Disabled Force Globally Authorized Disabled Force Globally Authorized Disabled Force Globally Authorized Disabled Force Globally Authorized Disabled Force Globally Authorized Disabled Farre Glohallv Port The s
386. the storm control status for the given frame type Rate The rate unit is packets per second pps Valid values are 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K or 1024K 1024K 2048K 4096K 8192K 16384K or 32768K 1024K 2048K 4096K 8192K 16384K or 32768K The 1 kpps is actually 1002 1 pps After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 68 Single IP General Setup Function name Single IP General Setup Function description Single IP Management SIM a simple and useful method to optimize network utilities and management is designed to manage a group of switches as a single entity called an SIM group Implementing the SIM feature will have the following advantages for users Simplify management of small workgroups or wiring closets while scaling networks to handle increased bandwidth demand o Reduce the number of IP addresses needed on the network Virtual stacking structure Eliminate any specialized cables for stacking and remove the distance barriers that typically limit topology options when using other stacking technology VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off Overview y uo gt IGMP Snooping s Mode Disabled gt MLD Snooping Group Name VirtualStack gt MVR gt PoE gt Filtering Data Base gt VLAN gt GARP gt GVRP gt Qos Y Single IP Information Easy Port Mirror
387. this ACE Notice the UDP frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type EXAMPLE Switch acl ace 1 0 port 1 ipv4 Switch acl ace port ipv4 Switch acl ace port ipv4 show ACE ID 2 i Rate Limiter Disabled Ingress Port 1 Port Copy Disabled Mirror Disabled Type User Logging Disabled Frame Type IPv4 Shutdown Disabled Action Permit Counter 0 MAC Parameters VLAN Parameters DMAC Type Any 802 10 Tagged Any VLAN ID Any Tag Priority Any IP Parameters Protocol Any Source Any Destination Any TTL Any Fragment Any Options Any VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Switch acl ace port any Switch acl ace port ipv4 end Success ACE ID 1 added last Configure ACL port default action SYNTAX action lt port list gt lt deny gt lt permit gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from to 10B format 1 3 Spe deny Deny forwarding permit Permit forwarding EXAMPLE Switch acl action 1 permit Switch acl Switch acl show port Rate Port Policy Action Limiter Port Copy Mirror Logging Shutdown Counter 1 Deny Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 2 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 3 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 4 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 5 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 6 Permit Disabl
388. tination MAC Disabled IP Address Disabled TCP UDP Port Enabled Group ID Name Type Configured Ports Aggregated Ports 2 LLAG2 Static 5 7 None Switch aggregation VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Arp inspection Commands of CLI add Add ARP inspection static entry SYNTAX add lt port list gt lt 1 4094 gt lt ip address gt lt mac address gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 lt ip address gt IP address allowed for doing ARP request lt mac address gt MAC address format 0a 1b 2c 3d 4e 5f EXAMPLE Switch arp inspection add 1 5 192 168 1 2 Oa 1lb 2c 3d 4e 5f Switch arp inspection delete Delete ARP inspection static entry SYNTAX delete lt port list gt lt 1 4094 gt lt ip address gt lt mac address gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 lt ip address gt IP address allowed for doing ARP request lt mac address gt MAC address format 0a 1b 2c 3d 4e 5f EXAMPLE Switch arp inspection Switch arp inspection delet 1 5 192 168 1 2 Oa lb 2c 3d 4e 5f mode Configure ARP inspection mode SYNTAX Delete lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter disable Globally disable ARP inspection mode enable Globally enable ARP inspection mode EXAMPLE Switch arp inspection mode disable Switch arp inspection port mode Configure ARP inspection port mode SYNTAX Delete lt port
389. tion Mode Indicate the UPnP operation mode Possible modes are Enabled Enable UPnP mode operation Disabled Disable UPnP mode operation When the mode is enabled two ACEs are added automatically to trap UPNP related packets to CPU The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is disabled TTL The TTL value is used by UPnP to send SSDP advertisement messages Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 Advertising Duration The duration carried in SSDP packets is used to inform a control point or control points how often it or they should receive an SSDP advertisement message from this switch If a control point does not receive any message within the duration it will think that the switch no longer exists Due to the unreliable nature of UDP in the standard it is recommended that such refreshing of advertisements to be VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 171 done at less than one half of the advertising duration In the implementation the switch sends SSDP messages periodically at the interval one half of the advertising duration minus 30 seconds Valid values are in the range 100 to 86400 Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 4 Security 172 2 4 1 ACL Ports The switch access control list ACL is probably the mo
390. tion The RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned QoS Class functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether RADIUS assigned QoS Class is enabled on that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned QoS Class is disabled on all ports RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled RADIUS assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch Incoming traffic will be classified to and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether RADIUS assigned VLAN is enabled on that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned VLAN is disabled on all ports Guest VLAN Enabled VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN typically with limited network access on which 802 1 X unaware clients are placed after a network administrator defined timeout The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below The Guest VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a qui
391. tion VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide private vlan Show private VLAN membership information EXAMPLE Switch pvlan show port isolate Port Isolation Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 10A Disabled 9B Disabled 10B Disabled Switch pvlan Switch pvlan show private vlan PVLAN ID Ports oo 4 noe WD EF ie D Switch pvlan QoS Commands of CLI DSCP Classification Configure DSCP ingress classification dscp map SYNTAX DSCP Classification lt class list gt lt dpl list gt lt 0 63 gt Parameter lt class list gt QoS class list available value is from 0 to 7 lt dpl list gt Drop precedence level list available value is from 0 to 1 lt 0 63 gt Mapped DSCP EXAMPLE Switch qos DSCP Classification map 1 1 0 Switch qos Configure DSCP mapping table This table is used to map QoS class and DP level based on DSCP value DSCP value used to map QoS class and DPL is either translated DSCP value or incoming frame DSCP value SYNTAX dscp map lt dscp list gt lt 0 7 gt lt 0 1 gt Parameter lt dscp list gt DSCP list format 1 3 5 7 lt 0 7 gt QoS class VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 341 lt 0 1 gt Drop Precedence Level EXAMPLE Switch qos dscp map 1 1 0 Switch qos dscp remap Configure DSCP egress remap table This table is used if the port egress remarking mode is rem
392. to use when sending SNMP trap packets Range Range 1 32 characters ASCII characters 33 126 only lt security level gt The security level assigned to the user 11213 1 gt NoauthNoPriv 2 gt AuthNoPriv 3 gt AuthPriv lt Authentication protocol gt The method used for user authentication 1 2 1 gt MDS 2 gt SHA lt Authentication password gt Authentication Password is restricted to 8 40 EXAMPLE Switch snmp trap 1 v3 192 168 20 11 3333 0 alarm authnoPriv sHA jdsseefe Switch snmp Switch snmp show trap SNMPv3 Trap Host Configuration Community Severity Auth Priv No Ver Server IP Port Security Name Level Protocol Protocol VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide v3 192 168 20 11 3333 alarm Emergency SHA None Switch snmp User To configure SNMP users the command adds an SNMPv3 user entry Syntax user lt user name gt lt security level gt lt Authentication Protocol gt lt Authentication Password gt Parameter lt username gt The name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Range 1 32 characters ASCII characters 33 126 only lt security level gt The security level assigned to the user NoauthNoPriv AuthNoPriv AuthPriv lt Authentication protocol gt The method used for user authentication MD5 ISHA lt Authentication password gt Authentication Password is restricted to 8 40 EXAMPLE Switch snmp user user authnoPriv mD5 uitisieegg Swit
393. ttings will take effect 2 4 22 Port Security Switch Status Function name Port Security Switch Status Function description This function shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview System Configuration gt ACL gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay gt NAS gt AAA Y Port Security Limit Control Port Status gt Access Management SSH nurrnea Parameters description Port Security Switch Status Auto refresh Refresh User Module Legend User Module Name Limit Control 802 1X DHCP Snooping V
394. ture Unit OOS Floor 5 Room No Hale Placetype meetingroom Postal Community Name LLDP MEDO1 P O Box 22 Addination Code 205 Emergency Call Service 886227853961 Switch lldpmed Syntax show lt info gt lt port list gt Parameter lt info gt Show LLDP MED neighbor device information lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed show info 3 5 No LLDP MED entries found Syntax show lt policy gt Parameter lt policy gt Show LLDP MED policy configuration VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 305 EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed show policy Policy Id Application Type Tag Vlan ID L2 Priority DSCP 0 Guest Voice Tagged 2 6 63 Switch lldpmed Syntax show lt port policy gt Parameter lt port policy gt Show LLDP MED port policy configuration EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed show port policy Port Policies 1 none 2 none 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 none 7 none 8 none 9 none 10 none Switch lldpmed 306 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide MAC Commands of CLI age time delete flush learning Configure aging time of MAC address SYNTAX age time lt 10 1000000 gt Parameter lt 10 1000000 gt Available value is from 10 to 1000000 EXAMPLE Switch mac age time 10 Switch mac Delete commands SYNTAX delete static mac lt mac address gt lt 1 4094 gt Parameter static
395. tus gt Private VLANs gt MAC based VLAN Parameters description VLAN Membership Configuration Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page L lt gt gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 1 default Delete Click it to delete the entry VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN VLAN Name Indicates the name of VLAN VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain at least one alphabet VLAN name can be edited for the existing VLAN entries or it can be added to the new entries Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID To include a port ina VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Adding a New VLAN Click to add a new VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the VLAN can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The VLAN is enabled on the selected stack switch unit when you click on Save The VLAN is thereafter present on the other stack switch units but with no port members The check box is greyed out when VLAN is displayed on other stacked switches but user can add member ports to it A VLAN without any port members on any stack unit will be deleted when you click Apply The button can be used to undo the addition of new VLANs Refresh The simple counts will
396. ty values are being used as well as the DSCP value The tagged format includes an additional field known as the tag header The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 VLAN ID VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 L2 Priority L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 A value of 0 represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802 1D 2004 DSCP DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behaviour for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 Adding a new policy Click to add a new policy Specify the Application type Tag VLAN ID L2 Priority and DSCP for the new policy Click Apply Port Policies Configuration Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the same network policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration Port The port number to which the configuration applies Policy ID The set of policies that shall apply to a given port The set of policies is selected by check marking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies
397. ue for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic landmark great Switch lldpmed Syntax civic leading street direction lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic leading street direction north Switch lldpmed Syntax civic name lt LINE gt Parameter VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic name PC01 Switch lldpmed Syntax civic p o box lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic p o box 22 Switch lldpmed Syntax civic place type lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic place type meetingroom Switch lldpmed Syntax civic room number lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic room number 15 Switch lldpmed Syntax civic state lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EXAMPLE Switch lldpmed civic state Taipei Switch lldpmed Syntax civic street lt LINE gt Parameter lt LINE gt The value for the Civic Address Location entry EX
398. ue shaper mode rate Configure the port queue shaper rate lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 lt queue list gt Queue list available value is from 0 to 7 disable Disable use of excess bandwidth enable Enable use of excess bandwidth EXAMPLE Switch qos queue shaper excess 1 0 disable Switch qos Switch qos Show QoS information VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 345 SYNTAX Show Parameter class map Show QoS class and DP level to DSCP mapping dscp map Show DSCP to QoS class and DP level mapping dscp translation Show DSCP ingress and egress translation port classify Show QoS ingress port classification port dscp Show port DSCP configuration port map Show port classification PCP DEI to QoS class DP level mapping table port shaper Show port shaper configuration qce Show QCL control list qcl status Show QCL status queue shaper Show port queue shaper configuration remarking map Show port tag remarking mapping table scheduler mode Show port scheduler mode configuration scheduler weight Show port scheduler weight configuration storm Show storm control configuration tag remarking Show port tag remarking configuration EXAMPLE Switch qos show class map QoS Class DP Level DSCP 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 2 0 3 0 0 3 0 4 0 0 4 0 5 0 0 5 0 6 0 0 6 0 7 0 0 7 0 Switch qos Switch qos show dscp map DSCP Trust QoS Class DP Level 0 Enabl
399. unction description The function allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off Overview System IP Address 0 0 0 0 Configuration n Security Ping Length 56 Ping Count 5 nn ICMP Ping Restart Device Ping Interval 1 gt Firmware gt Save Restore gt Export Import Diagnostics Ping6 VeriPHY Parameters description IP Address Set the IP Address of device what you want to ping it Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes Ping Count The count of the ICMP packet Values range from 1 time to 60 times Ping Interval The interval of the ICMP packet Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds Start Click the Start button then the switch will start to ping the device using ICMP packet size what set on the switch After you click Start 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number amp roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs PING6 server 10 10 132 20 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 0 time Oms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 1 time Oms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 2 time Oms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 3 time Oms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 4 time Oms Sent 5 packets received 5
400. unt please click the Add new group button and enter the group information then click Apply Max Group Number v1 2 v2 2 v3 10 Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Off x Overview NTP amp Time Configuration gt Account eP gt Port gt Loop Protection Trap Event Severity Y SNMP System General Setup Communities Users Views Access Trap gt Syslog Parameter Description Delete Click it to delete the selected user setting Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM Security Name A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Add new group VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Click it to add a new user SNMPv3 Groups Configuration Security Model Delete vi x Test 1 x Petete _ f group Delete Security Name Group Name 57 58 After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 2 23 SNMP Views Function nam
401. unting Server and the switch stack TACACS Authentication Server Configuration Enabled Enable the TACACS Authentication Server by checking this box IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the TACACS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation Port The TCP port to use on the TACACS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 49 is used on the TACACS Authentication Server Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the TACACS Authentication Server and the switch stack After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 2 4 19 AAA RADIUS Overview Function name AAA RADIUS Overview Function description The function shows you an overview of the RADIUS Authentication and Accounting server status to ensure the function is workable Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout y Overview System Configuration gt ACL gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay gt NAS Y AAA General Setup RADIUS O RADIUS Details gt Port Security gt Access Management SSH nerna Parameters description 3 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled 0 0 0 0 1812 Disabled Ion Ie w Ih e RADIUS Accounting
402. uration Static IP Address 192 168 1 100 Subnet Mask 299 2519 2 299 lt 0 G 192 168 1 254 D Ss 168 954 1 61 ateway S Server TP Server VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide IP Source Guard of CLI add delete limit To add or modify IP source guard static entry Syntax add lt port list gt lt VLAN ID gt lt ip address gt lt mac address gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID available value is from 1 to 4094 lt ip address gt IP address allowed for doing IP source guard lt mac address gt MAC address format Oa 1b 2c 3d 4e 5f EXAMPLE Switch ip source guard add 3 5 2 192 168 2 22 Oa 1lb 2c 3d 4e 5f Switch ip source guard Switch ip source guard show binding table 3 5 Type Port VLAN IP Address MAC Address Static 3 2 192 168 2 22 0a 1b 2c 3d 4e 5f Static 4 2 192 168 2 22 0a 1b 2c 3d 4e 5f Static 5 2 192 166 2 22 0a 1b 2c 3d 4e 5f Switch ip source guard To delete IP source guard static entry Syntax delete lt port list gt lt VLAN ID gt lt ip address gt lt mac address gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID available value is from 1 to 4094 lt ip address gt IP address allowed for doing IP source guard lt mac address gt MAC address format Oa 1b 2c 3d 4e 5f EXAMPLE Switch ip source guard delete 3
403. uration command sends message to all the slaves connected in stack Default value of Global MVRP Mode is Disable Port Configuration Port The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure per port GVRP settings GVRP Mode Enable disable GVRP Mode on this port The default VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 149 configuration is Disable GVRP Role Enable disable GVRP role on this port The default configuration is Disable Join Tx Count Explain Join Tx Count here Leave Tx Count Explain Leave Tx Count here Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse to click on Refresh button After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect 2 3 56 QoS Port Classification The switch supports four QoS queues per port with strict or weighted fair queuing scheduling It supports QoS Control Lists QCL for advance programmable QoS classification based on IEEE 802 1p Ethertype VID IPv4 IPv6 DSCP and UDP TCP ports and ranges High flexibility is in the classification of incoming frames to a QoS class The QoS classification looks for information up to Layer 4 including IPv4 and IPv6 DSCP IPv4 TCP UDP port numbers and user priority of tagged frames This QoS classification mechanism is implemented in a QoS control list
404. ut the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout IP Address IP address and UDP port for the authentication server in question State Shows the state of the server It takes one of the following values Disabled The selected server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled Round Trip Time VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide The time interval measured in milliseconds between the most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and the Access Request that matched it from the RADIUS authentication server The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the 211 server yet Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatica
405. ut LLDP information and will drop LLDP information received from neighbours enable The switch will send out LLDP information and will analyze LLDP information received from neighbours rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information but LLDP information from neighbour units is analyzed tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbours but will send out LLDP information EXAMPLE Switch lldp mode 1 enable Switch lldp Configure LLDP Optional TLVs SYNTAX option tlv lt port list gt lt mgmt addr gt lt disable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 10B format 1 3 mgmt addr Management IP address port desc Port description Sys capa System capability sys desc System description sys name System name disable Disable TLV enable Enable TLV EXAMPLE Switch lldp option tlv 1 mgmt addr enable Switch lldp Configure LLDP reinit delay SYNTAX reinit lt 1 10 gt Parameter lt 1 10 gt LLDP reinit delay EXAMPLE VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 293 show 294 Switch lldp reinit 1 Switch lldp Show LLDP information SYNTAX Show Parameter config Show LLDP configuration info Show LLDP neighbor device information statistics Show LLDP statistics EXAMPLE Switch lldp show config Interval 9 Hold 23 Tx Delay aoe Reinit Delay 1 Port System System
406. ut bo 0 Syslog Datagram Size 1400 1400 General Setup Log oni Detailed Log SMTP General Setup Y sFlow Agent Sampler Configuration v sFlow Receiver Configuration Parameters description Received Id The Receiver ID input fields allow the user to select the receiver ID Indicate the ID of this particular sFlow Receiver Currently one ID is supported as one collector is supported IP Type A drop down list to select the type of IP of Collector is displayed By default IPv4 is the type of Collector IP type You could use IPv4 or IPv6 IP Address The address of a reachable IP is to be entered into the text box This IP is used to monitor the sFlow samples sent by sFlow Agent our switch By default The IP is set to 0 0 0 0 and a new entry has to be added to it Port A port to listen to the sFlow Agent has to be configured for the Collector The value of the port number has to be typed into the text box The value accepted is within the range of 1 65535 But an VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 67 appropriate port number not used by other protocols need to be configured By default the port s number is 6343 Time Out It is the duration during which the collector receives samples Once it is expired the sampler stops sending the samples It is through the management the value is set before it expires The value accepted is within the range of 0 2147483647 By default it
407. uthentication over 802 1 X based authentication is that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone Also only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The maximum number of clients that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled When RADIUS Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled checked on a given port the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid traffic received on the supplicant s port will be classified to the given QoS Class If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a QoS Class or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class Refer to the written documentation for a description of the RADIUS attributes needed in order to successfully identify a Q
408. ve all lt port list gt lt timer value gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt timer value gt leave all time value available value is from 10000 to 100000 seconds EXAMPLE Switch mrp leave all 3 5 10000 Error Set leave all timer failed Switch mrp NOTE If you didn t set the MRP environment already then the switch will show Set leave all timer failed VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 317 leave time To set the MRP leave timer configuration Syntax leave time lt port list gt lt timer value gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt timer value gt leave time value available value is from 600 to 1000 seconds EXAMPLE Switch mrp leave time 3 5 600 Error Set leave timer failed Switch mrp NOTE Ifyou didn t set the MRP environment already then the switch will show Set leavetimer failed periodic To enable or disable periodic tx timer Syntax periodic lt port list gt lt disable enable gt Parameter lt port list gt Port list available value is from 1 to 14 format 1 3 5 lt disable gt Disable periodic tx timer lt enable gt Enable periodic tx timer EXAMPLE Switch mrp periodic 3 5 enable Switch mrp show To show the MRP configuration Syntax show lt config gt Parameter lt config gt Show MRP configuratio
409. witch You could use the Static IP Source Guard Table configure to manage the entries Auto Logout Off System Configuration gt ACL Y IP Source Guard General Setup static Table Dynamic Table gt ARP Inspection gt DHCP Snooping gt DHCP Relay gt NAS gt AAA gt Port Security Access Management SSH Parameters description Static IP Source Guard Table Delete Port VLAN ID IP Address MAC address Delete Check to delete the entry Port The logical port for the settings VLAN ID The ID number for the settings IP Address Allowed Source IP address MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address Adding new entry Click to add a new entry to the Static IP Source Guard table Specify the Port VLAN ID IP address and IP Mask for the new entry Click Apply Static IP Source Guard Table Delete Port VLAN ID IP Address MAC address if After finished the above settings click Apply to save the configuration The settings will take effect VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 183 184 2 4 7 IP Source Guard Dynamic Table Function name IP Source Guard Dynamic Table Function description The function is used to configure the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table parameters of the switch You could use the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table configure to manage the entries Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of ma Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Auto ref
410. witch P2261 User s Guide authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Note Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is configured to X seconds using the AAA configuration page and suppose that the first server in the list is currently down but not considered dead Now if the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds then it will never get authenticated because the switch will cancel on going backend authentication server requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant And since the server hasn t yet failed because the X seconds haven t expired the same server will be contacted upon the next backend authentication server request from the switch This scenario will loop forever Therefore the server timeout should be smaller than the supplicant s EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate Single 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfu
411. witch igmp throttling 1 0 Switch igmp Set per VLAN Unsolicited Report Interval SYNTAX Snooping lt vlan list gt lt 0 31744 gt Parameter lt vlan list gt VLAN list available value is from 1 to 4094 format 1 3 5 lt 0 31744 gt Range 0 31744 sec Default 1 sec EXAMPLE Switch igmp uri 1 1 Switch igmp IP Commands of CLI dhcp Enable Disable DHCP client mgmt vlan SYNTAX Dhep lt disable gt lt enable gt Parameter disable Disable DHCP client enable Enable DHCP client EXAMPLE Switch ip dhcp enable Switch ip Set the management VLAN ID VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide name server Setup show 282 SYNTAX mgmt vlan lt 1 4094 gt Parameter lt 1 4094 gt Management VLAN ID available value is from 1 to 4094s EXAMPLE Switch ip mgmt vlan 1 Switch ip Set DNS IP address SYNTAX name server lt ip address gt Parameter lt ip address gt DNS IP address EXAMPLE Switch ip name server 168 95 1 1 Switch ip Set the IP address SYNTAX Setup lt ip address gt lt ip mask gt lt ip address gt Parameter lt ip address gt IP address lt ip mask gt IP subnet mask lt ip address gt EXAMPLE Gateway IP address Switch ip setup 192 168 1 100 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 254 Switch ip Show ip information SYNTAX Show EXAMPLE Switch ip show DHCP Client Enabled Active Config
412. witch port number Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states Last Source The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication Last ID The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication QoS Class QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled Port VLAN ID VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read 203 204 more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Auto refresh The simple counts will be refreshed automatically on the UI screen Refresh The simple counts will be refreshed manually when user use mouse
413. witch vcl show mac vlan Switch vcl NOTE The delete command was used for what you want to delete the command or entry you had set on the switch Syntax delete lt protocol vlan gt lt ethernet gt lt ether type gt Parameter lt protocol vlan gt Delete protocol based VLAN ethertype protocol to group mapping lt ethernet gt Delete protocol based VLAN Ethernet II protocol to group mapping lt ether type gt Ether type available value is from 0x0600 to Oxffff EXAMPLE Switch vcl protocol vlan protocol ethernet 0x0600 protocol01 Switch vcl show protocol vlan Protocol Type Protocol Value Group Name Ethernet ETYPE 0x600 protocol0l Switch vcl delete protocol vlan protocol ethernet 0x0600 Switch vcl show protocol vlan Switch vcl Syntax delete lt protocol vlan gt lt llc gt lt DSAP value gt lt SSAP value gt Parameter lt protocol vlan gt Delete protocol based VLAN lt llc gt Delete protocol based VLAN LLC protocol to group mapping lt DSAP value gt DSAP value available value is from 0x00 to Oxff VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide 371 mac vlan lt SSAP value gt SSAP value available value is from 0x00 to Oxff EXAMPLE Switch vcl protocol vlan protocol llc 0x00 Oxff protocolvlanl Switch vcl show protocol vlan Protocol Type Protocol Value Group Name LLC DSAP 0x00 SSAP 0xff protocolvlanl Switch vcl delete protocol vlan protocol llc 0x00 Ox
414. y IANA In the switch you can configure SSM for arbitrary IP multicast addresses also Function name IGMP Snooping IPv4 SSM Information Function description The function is used to display the SFM information for the switch Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMPv3 SSM Source Specific Multicast Information table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMPv3 Information Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMPv3 Information Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next IGMPv3 Information Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Dray Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout of w Overvi iew v AaggieygauvnN D IGMP SFM Information Auto refresh Refresh Static Trunk Start from VLAN 1 and Group 224 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page _ lt lt gt LACP gt Spanning Tree Vv IGMP Snoop
415. y Tek VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of x N i PoE Auto Checking Y aygyreygauerr BZ Static Trunk E Ping Check Disable gt LACP gt Spanning Tree Interval gt IGMP Snooping Ping IP Address Time Failure Log Failure Action gt MLD Snooping ao gt MVR 3 J Nothing gt LLDP Y PoE General Setup error 0 total 0 Nothing error 0 total 0 Nothing _ Status 0 0 0 WI error 0 total 0 Nothing Power Delay Auto Checking Schedule 0 error 0 total 0 Nothing error 0 total 0 Nothing Y Filtering Data Base 0 0 error 0 total 0 Nothing General Setup Dynamic MAC Table arear f tatal N Mathine 124 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Parameters description Ping Check Check the device with PING command Ping IP Address Type the IP address of the device Interval Time sec Set the time interval for PING command Retry Time Set the retry time for performing the PING command Failure Log Log the failure status Failure Action Select the action for device failure Reboot Tim sec 2 3 38 PoE Schedule Function name PoE Schedule Set the time to reboot the device VigorSwitch P2261 Auto Logout Of Overview v ayy eyauen Static Trunk gt LACP gt Spanning Tree gt IGMP Snooping gt MLD Snooping gt MV
416. y year lt Day that DST starts gt DST starts date format is YYYY MM DD lt Time that DST starts gt DST starts time format is HH MM lt Day that DST ends gt DST ends date format is YY YY MM DD lt Time that DST ends gt DST ends time format is HH MM EXAMPLE Switch time daylight enable 50 by dates 2011 08 10 13 30 2011 10 31 13 30 Switch time show daylight Clock Source Local Settings Local Time 2011 01 01 06 56 08 YYYY MM DD HH MM SS Time Zone Offset 0 min Daylight Savings Enabled Time Set Offset 50 min Daylight Savings Type By dates From 2011 08 10 13 30 YYYY MM DD HH MM To 2011 10 31 13 30 YYYY MM DD HH MM Switch time To delete NTP server entry Syntax delete lt NTP server index gt Parameter lt NTP server index gt NTP server index available value is from 1 to 5 EXAMPLE Switch time ntp server 1 192 168 30 22 Switch time ntp server 2 192 168 30 35 Switch time show ntp Current Time 2011 01 01 07 00 33 Time Zone GMT 0 00 NTP Mode Enabled Index Server IP host address or a host name string 1 192 168 30 22 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Manual Ntp 2 192 168 30 35 3 4 5 Switch time Switch time delete 1 Switch time show ntp Current Time E 2011 01 01 0701 20 Time Zone GMT 0 00 NTP Mode Enabled Index Server IP host address or a host name string 192 168 30 35 oO A U NE Switch time
417. ybric Hybric Access Access Access Hybric Hybric Hybric Hybric Hybric Port Type UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware To show the VLAN configuration and information Syntax show lt port config gt Parameter lt port config gt Show VLAN port configuration EXAMPLE Switch vlan show port config TPID for Custom S port 0x88a8 VigorSwitch P2261 User s Guide Port PVID Frame Type Ingress Filter Egress Rule Port Type 1 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 2 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 3 3 Untagged Enabled Access UnAware 4 3 Untagged Enabled Access UnAware 5 3 Untagged Enabled Access UnAware 6 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 7 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 8 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 9 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware 10 1 All Disabled Hybric UnAware Switch vlan Syntax show lt port status gt lt combined gvrp mstp mvr mvrp nas static voice gt Parameter lt port status gt Show VLAN port status lt combined gt VLAN port status for combined VLAN Users lt gvrp gt VLAN port status for GVRP lt mstp gt VLAN port status for MSTP lt mvyr gt VLAN port status for MVR lt myrp gt VLAN port status for MVRP lt nas gt VLAN port status for NAS lt static gt Static VLAN port status lt voice gt VLAN port status for Voice VLAN EXAMPLE Port PVID Frame Type il 1 All 2 1 All 3 3 Untagged 4 3 Unt

Port Commands of CLI

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents